第一菩提经的注释巴利
1. Paṭhamabodhisuttavaṇṇanā
1 在这段经文里,“如是我闻”等部分属于序分。其中,“如是”是虚词;“我”等是名词。在“住在优楼频螺”这句里,“vi”是前缀,“harati”是动词。按照这个方法,应当理解一切地方的词类划分。巴利
1. Yaṃ panettha ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādikaṃ nidānaṃ, tattha evanti nipātapadaṃ. Metiādīni nāmapadāni. Uruvelāyaṃ viharatīti ettha vīti upasaggapadaṃ, haratīti ākhyātapadanti imināva nayena sabbattha padavibhāgo veditabbo.
不过,从含义上说,“如是”(evaṃ)这个词有很多种不同的用法,包括:比喻、教导、随喜、呵责、领受话语、行相、示例、确定、询问,以及表示“此”这个词的含义和限量等。
比如,在“如此生而为人,应当多做善事”(《法句经》53)等语句中,它是比喻的用法。在“你应当这样前进,应当这样后退”(《增支部》4.122)等语句中,是教导的用法。在“世尊,正是这样!善逝,正是这样!”(《增支部》3.66)等语句中,是随喜的用法。在“这个贱民女不管遇到谁,都这样称赞那个秃头沙门的容貌”(《相应部》1.187)等语句中,是呵责的用法。在“那些比丘回答世尊说:‘是的,尊者’”(《长部》2.3;《中部》1.1)等语句中,是领受话语的用法。在“尊者,我这样理解世尊所宣说的法”(《中部》1.398)等语句中,是行相的用法。在“来,年轻人,你去沙门阿难那里;到了之后,以我的名义问候沙门阿难是否无病、无恙、起居轻便、气力充足、安住舒适,就说:‘年轻人须婆·都提耶之子问候尊者阿难是否无病、无恙、起居轻便、气力充足、安住舒适。’还要这样说:‘请尊者阿难出于慈悲,前往年轻人须婆·都提耶之子的住处’”(《长部》1.445)等语句中,是示例的用法。在“‘迦罗摩们,你们怎么想?这些法是善还是不善?’‘尊者,是不善。’‘是有罪还是无罪?’‘尊者,是有罪。’‘是智者所呵责还是智者所称赞?’‘尊者,是智者所呵责。’‘若完全执取,是否导致无益和痛苦?你们在这里怎么想?’‘尊者,若完全执取,确实导致无益和痛苦。我们在这里是这样认为的’”(《增支部》3.66)等语句中,是确定的用法。在“这些人善沐浴、善涂香,须发修剪整齐,佩戴花环装饰”(《长部》1.286)等语句中,是询问的用法。在“如是种种各种技艺行业”(《长部》1.182)以及“这样的种类、这样的行相”等语句中,是表示“此”(idaṃ)这个词的含义。因为“已去”(gata)这个词是“方式”(pakāra)的同义词,“种类”(vidha)和“行相”(ākāra)这两个词也是如此。世间人在用“种类”“相应”“已去”这些词时,说的就是“方式”的意思。在“这样快速地转变,这样有限的寿命”(《增支部》1.48)等语句中,是限量的用法。巴利
Atthato pana evaṃsaddo tāva upamūpadesasampahaṃsanagarahaṇavacanasampaṭiggahākāra- nidassanāvadhāraṇapucchāidamatthaparimāṇādi anekatthappabhedo. Tathā hesa ‘‘evaṃ jātena maccena, kattabbaṃ kusalaṃ bahu’’nti evamādīsu (dha. pa. 53) upamāyaṃ āgato. ‘‘Evaṃ te abhikkamitabbaṃ, evaṃ te paṭikkamitabba’’ntiādīsu (a. ni. 4.122) upadese. ‘‘Evametaṃ bhagavā, evametaṃ sugatā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 3.66) sampahaṃsane. ‘‘Evamevaṃ panāyaṃ vasalī yasmiṃ vā tasmiṃ vā tassa muṇḍakassa samaṇakassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.187) garahaṇe. ‘‘Evaṃ, bhanteti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosu’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.3; ma. ni. 1.1) vacanasampaṭiggahe. ‘‘Evaṃ byā kho ahaṃ, bhante, bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.398) ākāre. ‘‘Ehi tvaṃ, māṇavaka, yena samaṇo ānando tenupasaṅkama, upasaṅkamitvā mama vacanena samaṇaṃ ānandaṃ appābādhaṃ appātaṅkaṃ lahuṭṭhānaṃ balaṃ phāsuvihāraṃ puccha ‘subho māṇavo todeyyaputto bhavantaṃ ānandaṃ appābādhaṃ appātaṅkaṃ lahuṭṭhānaṃ balaṃ phāsuvihāraṃ pucchatī’ti, evañca vadehi ‘sādhu kira bhavaṃ ānando yena subhassa māṇavassa todeyyaputtassa nivesanaṃ, tenupasaṅkamatu anukampaṃ upādāyā’ti’’ādīsu (dī. ni. 1.445) nidassane. ‘‘‘Taṃ kiṃ maññatha, kālāmā, ime dhammā kusalā vā akusalā vā’ti? ‘Akusalā, bhante’. ‘Sāvajjā vā anavajjā vā’ti? ‘Sāvajjā, bhante’. ‘Viññūgarahitā vā viññuppasatthā vā’ti? ‘Viññūgarahitā, bhante’. ‘Samattā samādinnā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti, no’vā? ‘Kathaṃ vo ettha hotī’ti? ‘Samattā, bhante, samādinnā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti, evaṃ no ettha hotīti’’’ādīsu (a. ni. 3.66) avadhāraṇe. ‘‘Evamete sunhātā suvilittā kappitakesamassū āmuttamālābharaṇā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.286) pucchāyaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃgatāni puthusippāyatanāni (dī. ni. 1.182), evaṃvidho evamākāro’’tiādīsu idaṃsaddassa atthe. Gatasaddo hi pakārapariyāyo, tathā vidhākārasaddā. Tathā hi vidhayuttagatasadde lokiyā pakāratthe vadanti. ‘‘Evaṃ lahuparivattaṃ evamāyupariyanto’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 1.48) parimāṇe.
难道说,在“你们是否这样想过:寿命就是这样有限”这句话里,因为“这样”一词表达了提问的方式和限量的方式,所以“这样”就只有“方式”的意思吗?不是的,因为这里有特殊性。这里的“这样”只表示一般的方式,所以被理解为方式义。但在“我这样理解”这类说法中,它表达的是特殊的方式。这些“这样”既能表达提问的方式,也能表达限量的方式,因此是特殊方式的表达。这样理解之后,“像这样出生的人”等比喻和例证才能成立。巴利
Nanu ca ‘‘evaṃ vitakkitaṃ no tumhehi, evamāyupariyanto’’ti cettha evaṃsaddena pucchanākāraparimāṇākārānaṃ vuttattā ākārattho eva evaṃsaddoti. Na, visesasabbhāvato. Ākāramattavācako hettha evaṃsaddo ākāratthoti adhippeto. ‘‘Evaṃ byā kho’’tiādīsu pana ākāravisesavacano. Ākāravisesavācino cete evaṃsaddā pucchanākāraparimāṇākārānaṃ vācakattā. Evañca katvā ‘‘evaṃ jātena maccenā’’tiādīni upamānaudāharaṇāni yujjanti. Tattha hi –
就像从一堆花里,可以编出许多花环;
既然已经这样生为必死之人,就应该多做善事。巴利
‘‘Yathāpi puppharāsimhā, kayirā mālāguṇe bahū; Evaṃ jātena maccena, kattabbaṃ kusalaṃ bahu’’nti. –
在这里,从“像花堆一样”这个角度来说:投生为人、亲近善士、听闻正法、如理作意、获得财富等,这些是布施等福行的因缘集合;再加上容貌光彩、香气等殊胜功德的具备,众多福行就像花环一样。又因为众生有必死的本性,所以应当造作福行。因此,从无差别的角度,把花堆和花环都作为比喻。这两个比喻的运用方式,先通过“犹如”一词作不确定的表述,再通过“如是”一词作确定的表述。而当这种比喻方式被确定时,从意义上它就是比喻本身,所以说“在比喻中出现”。巴利
Ettha puppharāsiṭṭhānīyato manussuppatti sappurisūpanissayasaddhammassavanayonisomanasikārabhogasampattiādito dānādipuññakiriyāhetusamudāyato sobhāsugandhatādiguṇavisesayogato mālāguṇasadisiyo bahukā puññakiriyā maritabbasabhāvatāya maccena kattabbāti abhedatāya puppharāsi mālāguṇā ca upamā, tesaṃ upamānākāro yathāsaddena aniyamato vutto. Puna evaṃsaddena niyamanavasena vutto. So pana upamākāro niyamiyamāno atthato upamā eva hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘upamāyaṃ āgato’’ti.
同样地,在“应当以这样的方式前进”等教导中,凭借与沙门相称的威仪成就,其中那种教导的方式,从意义上说就是教导本身,所以说:“在‘你应当这样前进,你应当这样后退’等教导中。”巴利
Tathā ‘‘evaṃ iminā ākārena abhikkamitabba’’ntiādinā upadisiyamānāya samaṇasāruppāya ākappasampattiyā yo tattha upadesākāro, so atthato upadesoyevāti vuttaṃ – ‘‘evaṃ te abhikkamitabbaṃ, evaṃ te paṭikkamitabbantiādīsu upadese’’ti.
对于“正是如此,世尊!正是如此,善逝!”这句话,那些正确无颠倒地了知世尊所说之义的人,以种种方式对其中所具有的功德生起欢喜、令心踊跃,这就是随喜。在这里,应当按前面所说的方式,把它理解为随喜的表现形式。巴利
‘‘Evametaṃ bhagavā, evametaṃ sugatā’’ti ettha bhagavatā yathāvuttamatthaṃ aviparītato jānantehi kataṃ yaṃ tattha vijjamānaguṇānaṃ pakārehi haṃsanaṃ udaggatākaraṇaṃ sampahaṃsanaṃ, so tattha pahaṃsanākāroti vuttanayena yojetabbaṃ.
在“同样地,然而此……”这一句里,应当按前面所说的方式,把它理解为呵责的表现形式。而这种呵责的表现形式,从“贱民”等辱骂词语的伴随出现可以知道,在这里是用“如此”这个词来表达的。正如在这里一样,也应当知道,譬喻等方式之所以被说出,是因为那些以譬喻等方式所说的“花堆”等词的伴随出现。巴利
‘‘Evamevaṃ panāya’’nti ettha garahaṇākāroti vuttanayena yojetabbaṃ. So ca garahaṇākāro ‘‘vasalī’’tiādikhuṃsanasaddasannidhānato idha evaṃsaddena pakāsitoti viññāyati. Yathā cettha, evaṃ upamākārādayopi upamādivasena vuttānaṃ puppharāsiādisaddānaṃ sannidhānato vuttāti veditabbaṃ.
对于“我们如此认为”这一句,同样是为了让人们对前面所说的那些法能带来不利与痛苦这一点生起确定,于是以认可、接受的方式发问:“或者,你们对这件事怎么想?”在这样问过之后,回答“我们对此就是这样认为的”,因此那种方式的确定就通过“如此”这个词显示了出来。再者,当那些法导致不利和痛苦的方式被确定下来时,它就具有了限定、简别的含义。所以说:“在‘我们对此如此认为’等语句中,是简别义。”巴利
‘‘Evaṃ no’’ti etthāpi tesaṃ yathāvuttadhammānaṃ ahitadukkhāvahabhāvena sanniṭṭhānajananatthaṃ anumatiggahaṇavasena ‘‘no vā kathaṃ vo ettha hotī’’ti pucchāya katāya ‘‘evaṃ no ettha hotī’’ti vuttattā tadākārasanniṭṭhānaṃ evaṃsaddena āvikataṃ. So pana tesaṃ dhammānaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanākāro niyamiyamāno avadhāraṇattho hotīti vuttaṃ – ‘‘evaṃ no ettha hotītiādīsu avadhāraṇe’’ti.
“你要这样说”——也就是“照我所说的那样,去对沙门阿难说”——这种说法方式,现在要用“如是”这个词来指出,所以说它是“指示义”。巴利
‘‘Evañca vadehī’’ti yathāhaṃ vadāmi evaṃ samaṇaṃ ānandaṃ vadehīti vadanākāro idāni vattabbo evaṃsaddena nidassīyatīti ‘‘nidassanattho’’ti vuttaṃ.
这些“如是”一词虽然也表达方式的差别,但因为它们具有譬喻等特殊含义的用法,所以说它们有譬喻等意义。不过,“是的,尊者”这句话,是被劝导要好好听闻、作意佛法的比丘们,以承认自己已安住于其中的方式说出来的,所以这里的“如是”一词是接受话语的意思。因此,“是的,尊者”就等于说“善哉,尊者”“很好,尊者”。而在这里,这个词应当理解为用于方式、指示和简择的意思。巴利
Evamākāravisesavācīnampi etesaṃ evaṃsaddānaṃ upamādivisesatthavuttitāya upamādiatthatā vuttā. ‘‘Evaṃ, bhante’’ti pana dhammassa sādhukaṃ savanamanasikāre niyojitehi bhikkhūhi tattha patiṭṭhitabhāvassa paṭijānanavasena vuttattā tattha evaṃsaddo vacanasampaṭiggahattho. Tena evaṃ, bhanteti sādhu, bhante, suṭṭhu, bhanteti vuttaṃ hoti. Svāyamidha ākāranidassanāvadhāraṇesu daṭṭhabbo.
在这里,它用“如是”这个词,从“方式”这个含义上点明这个意思:世尊的教说有着种种不同的理路、极为精微,从种种不同的意乐中产生,义理和文句都圆满具足,有种种神变,在法的教说和体证上极为深奥,能随顺一切众生各自的语言而进入他们的耳中。有谁能够以一切方式完全了知世尊这样的教说呢?然而,即使只是让闻法的意愿以最大程度生起,也仍然是“如是我闻”——也就是说,我也只是以一种方式听闻了而已。巴利
Tattha ākāratthena evaṃsaddena etamatthaṃ dīpeti – nānānayanipuṇamanekajjhāsayasamuṭṭhānaṃ atthabyañjanasampannaṃ vividhapāṭihāriyaṃ dhammatthadesanāpaṭivedhagambhīraṃ sabbasattānaṃ sakasakabhāsānurūpato sotapathamāgacchantaṃ tassa bhagavato vacanaṃ sabbappakārena ko samattho viññātuṃ, sabbathāmena pana sotukāmataṃ janetvāpi evaṃ me sutaṃ, mayāpi ekenākārena sutanti.
在这里,单一性、差异性、无作用、如是法性,以及被称为“欢喜旋、三莲、狮子游戏、方观、钩”的这些,按照爱味等所缘等的分类而有多种多样的理趣,所以叫种种理趣。或者,理趣就是圣典的走向;这些圣典走向,按施设与随施设等、按杂染分与世间及两者夹杂等、按善等、按蕴等、按摄等、按时解脱等、按安立等、按善根等、按三法发趣等而分成种种类型,所以叫种种理趣。通过这些理趣而显得精细、柔和、微细,所以说种种理趣微细。巴利
Ettha ca ekattanānattaabyāpāraevaṃdhammatāsaṅkhātā nandiyāvattatipukkhalasīhavikkīḷitadisālocanaaṅkusasaṅkhātā ca assādādivisayādibhedena nānāvidhā nayā nānānayā. Nayā vā pāḷigatiyo, tā ca paññattianupaññattādivasena saṃkilesabhāgiyādilokiyāditadubhayavomissakādivasena kusalādivasena khandhādivasena, saṅgahādivasena, samayavimuttādivasena, ṭhapanādivasena , kusalamūlādivasena, tikapaṭṭhānādivasena ca nānappakārāti nānānayā, tehi nipuṇaṃ saṇhaṃ sukhumanti nānānayanipuṇaṃ.
意乐就是志向,而它按常见等分类、按少尘垢等分类,有多种多样。或者,从自己的意乐等开始的种种意乐,就是种种意乐。它是种种意乐的生起,是它产生的原因,所以叫从种种意乐生起。巴利
Āsayova ajjhāsayo, so ca sassatādibhedena apparajakkhatādibhedena ca anekavidho. Attajjhāsayādiko eva vā aneko ajjhāsayo anekajjhāsayo. So samuṭṭhānaṃ uppattihetu etassāti anekajjhāsayasamuṭṭhānaṃ.
因为具足了戒等义上的成就,以及彰显这些义的文句上的成就——也就是通过开示、阐明、开显、分别、显了、施设这六种义句,和字母、词、文、方式、语法、解说这六种文句——所以说是具足义与文。巴利
Sīlādiatthasampattiyā tabbibhāvanabyañjanasampattiyā saṅkāsanapakāsanavivaraṇavibhajanauttānīkaraṇapaññattivasena chahi atthapadehi akkharapadabyañjanākāraniruttiniddesavasena chahi byañjanapadehi ca samannāgatattā atthabyañjanasampannaṃ.
由于神通、记心、教诫的区分,以及其中每一种又按所缘等区分,所以有种种、多种多样的神变,这就是“种种神变”。在这里,因为能除去对立面,能去除贪等烦恼,所以叫神变。若按这个意思,世尊并没有应被去除的贪等对立面;而凡夫在远离随烦恼、具备八种功德、对立面已被去除的心里,神通也能生起,所以不能按那里生起的用法在这里说“神变”。但如果说是大悲世尊所调伏的有情有对立面的烦恼,因为去除那些烦恼而说为神变,这样说是合理的。或者,世尊和教法的对立面是外道,因为去除他们而说为神变。因为他们通过示现神通、记心、教诫,在见解上被破除,又没有能力显示自己的见解,所以被去除、被除掉。或者,“paṭi”这个词表示“后来”的意思,就像“tasmiṃ paṭipaviṭṭhamhi, añño āgañchi brāhmaṇo”等句子里那样。所以,在心已等持、远离随烦恼之后,由已完成任务者随后应当执行、应当运作,这就是神变。或者,自己的随烦恼已被第四禅和道去除之后,随后再去去除,就是神变。神通、记心、教诫这三者,在远离随烦恼、已完成任务之后,为了有情的利益而再次运作;而当自己的随烦恼已被去除时,它们也能去除其他有情的随烦恼,所以成为神变。神变本身就是神变;或者,在神变——即神通、记心、教诫这一集合中——所存在的每一种,都叫神变。或者,神变就是第四禅和道,因为能去除对立面。这里应当理解为:从那里生起的,作为相状的,或者从那里来的,就是神变。巴利
Iddhiādesanānusāsanībhedena tesu ca ekekassa visayādibhedena vividhaṃ bahuvidhaṃ vā pāṭihāriyaṃ etassāti vividhapāṭihāriyaṃ. Tattha paṭipakkhaharaṇato rāgādikilesāpanayanato pāṭihāriyanti atthe sati bhagavato na paṭipakkhā rāgādayo santi ye haritabbā, puthujjanānampi vigatūpakkilese aṭṭhaguṇasamannāgate citte hatapaṭipakkhe iddhividhaṃ pavattati, tasmā tattha pavattavohārena ca na sakkā idha pāṭihāriyanti vattuṃ. Sace pana mahākāruṇikassa bhagavato veneyyagatā ca kilesā paṭipakkhā, tesaṃ haraṇato pāṭihāriyanti vuttaṃ, evaṃ sati yuttametaṃ. Atha vā bhagavato ceva sāsanassa ca paṭipakkhā titthiyā, tesaṃ haraṇato pāṭihāriyaṃ. Te hi diṭṭhiharaṇavasena diṭṭhippakāsane asamatthabhāvena ca iddhiādesanānusāsanīhi haritā apanītā honti. Paṭīti vā ayaṃ saddo pacchāti etassa atthaṃ bodheti ‘‘tasmiṃ paṭipaviṭṭhamhi, añño āgañchi brāhmaṇo’’tiādīsu (cūḷani. pārāyanavagga, vatthugāthā 4) viya. Tasmā samāhite citte vigatūpakkilese katakiccena pacchā haritabbaṃ pavattetabbanti paṭihāriyaṃ. Attano vā upakkilesesu catutthajjhānamaggehi haritesu pacchā haraṇaṃ paṭihāriyaṃ. Iddhiādesanānusāsaniyo vigatūpakkilesena katakiccena sattahitatthaṃ puna pavattetabbā, haritesu ca attano upakkilesesu parasattānaṃ upakkilesaharaṇāni hontīti paṭihāriyāni bhavanti. Paṭihāriyameva pāṭihāriyaṃ, paṭihāriye vā iddhiādesanānusāsanīsamudāye bhavaṃ ekekaṃ pāṭihāriyanti vuccati. Paṭihāriyaṃ vā catutthajjhānaṃ maggo ca paṭipakkhaharaṇato. Tattha jātaṃ nimittabhūtato tato vā āgatanti pāṭihāriyanti attho veditabbo.
然而,因为对经典之义的教说——即被称为“依此语言而通达”的,或被称为“对因、因之果以及两者之施设的证悟”的——或者法义教说与证悟,是甚深的;就像大海一样,对于没有积累善根资粮的人来说,难以找到立足之处,也难以潜入;所以,世尊的教说依这四种甚深而成立,即法义教说与证悟甚深。巴利
Yasmā pana tantiatthadesanā tabbohārābhisamayasaṅkhātā hetuhetuphalatadubhayapaññattipaṭivedhasaṅkhātā vā dhammatthadesanāpaṭivedhā gambhīrā, sasādīhi viya mahāsamuddo anupacitakusalasambhārehi alabbhaneyyappatiṭṭhā duppariyogāhā ca, tasmā tehi catūhi gambhīrabhāvehi yuttanti bhagavato vacanaṃ dhammatthadesanāpaṭivedhagambhīraṃ.
世尊的教法之声只有一种,当它在一个刹那中响起时,就能让说各种不同语言的众生,各自以自己的语言同时听到,没有先后之分。要知道,诸佛的佛威力确实不可思议,所以能随顺一切众生各自的语言,进入他们的耳中。巴利
Eko eva bhagavato dhammadesanāghoso, ekasmiṃ khaṇe pavattamāno nānābhāsānaṃ sattānaṃ attano attano bhāsāvasena apubbaṃ acarimaṃ gahaṇūpago hoti. Acinteyyo hi buddhānaṃ buddhānubhāvoti sabbasattānaṃ sakasakabhāsānurūpato sotapathaṃ āgacchatīti veditabbaṃ.
以“示现”之义,他为了免除自身(自居为作者的过失),表明“我不是自生者,这不是我亲证的”,现在就用“如是我闻,我也这样听闻”来标示接下来要讲述的整部经。巴利
Nidassanatthena ‘‘nāhaṃ sayambhū, na mayā idaṃ sacchikata’’nti attānaṃ parimocento ‘‘evaṃ me sutaṃ, mayāpi evaṃ suta’’nti idāni vattabbaṃ sakalaṃ suttaṃ nidasseti.
为了显示“决定”这个意思——就像世尊说的“比丘们,在我的比丘弟子中,多闻第一的就是阿难;在具行迹者、具念者、坚定者、侍者中第一的也是阿难”(增支部1.219-223),又像法将说的“具寿阿难通达义理、通达法、通达文句、通达语言、通达前后关联”(增支部5.169)——世尊和法将如此称赞,他按照这种称赞,展示自己忆持的力量,让众生生起想听的愿望。“如是我闻,而且无论从义理上还是从文句上,都不缺不多,就应该这样看待,不应看成别的样子。”所谓“别的样子”,是指不同于在世尊面前亲闻的方式,而不是说世尊开示的方式可以不同。因为世尊的开示有不可思议的威力,不可能以一切方式完全了知——这就是那句话的意思。不违背所闻的方式,正是忆持的力量。巴利
Avadhāraṇatthena ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ bahussutānaṃ yadidaṃ ānando, gatimantānaṃ, satimantānaṃ, dhitimantānaṃ, upaṭṭhākānaṃ yadidaṃ ānando’’ti (a. ni. 1.219-223) evaṃ bhagavatā, ‘‘āyasmā ānando atthakusalo, dhammakusalo, byañjanakusalo, niruttikusalo, pubbāparakusalo’’ti (a. ni. 5.169) evaṃ dhammasenāpatinā ca pasatthabhāvānurūpaṃ attano dhāraṇabalaṃ dassento sattānaṃ sotukāmataṃ janeti. ‘‘Evaṃ me sutaṃ, tañca kho atthato vā byañjanato vā anūnamanadhikaṃ, evameva na aññathā daṭṭhabba’’nti. Aññathāti bhagavato sammukhā sutākārato aññathā na pana bhagavatā desitākārato. Acinteyyānubhāvā hi bhagavato desanā, sā neva sabbākārena sakkā viññātunti vuttovāyamattho. Sutākārāvirujjhanameva hi dhāraṇabalaṃ.
“me”这个词出现在三种含义里。比如在“gāthābhigītaṃ me abhojaneyyaṃ”这类句子里,意思是“被我”。在“sādhu me, bhante, bhagavā saṃkhittena dhammaṃ desetu”这类句子里,意思是“为我”。在“dhammadāyādā me, bhikkhave, bhavatha”这类句子里,意思是“我的”。而在这里,它同时适用于“由我听闻”和“我的听闻”这两种含义。巴利
Mesaddo tīsu atthesu dissati. Tathā hissa ‘‘gāthābhigītaṃ me abhojaneyya’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.194; su. ni. 81) mayāti attho. ‘‘Sādhu me, bhante, bhagavā saṃkhittena dhammaṃ desetū’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.88; 5.382; a. ni. 4.257) mayhanti attho. ‘‘Dhammadāyādā me, bhikkhave, bhavathā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.29) mamāti attho. Idha pana ‘‘mayā sutaṃ, mama suta’’nti ca atthadvaye yujjati.
在这里,如果要说“不是他人的人就是我”,那么由于它存在于被称为“自己的内在相续”的自身相续中,所以“me”这个词虽然是三重的,却看起来只表示一种意义,但实际上可以根据具格、为格等语法差别而了知它有意义上的分化。因此,应当理解“me这个词见于三种意义中”这句话。巴利
Ettha ca yo paro na hoti, so attāti evaṃ vattabbe niyakajjhattasaṅkhāte sasantāne vattanato tividhopi mesaddo kiñcāpi ekasmiṃyeva atthe dissati, karaṇasampadānādivisesasaṅkhāto pana viññāyatevāyaṃ atthabhedoti ‘‘me-saddo tīsu atthesu dissatī’’ti vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
关于“所闻”这个词:它既可以带前缀,也可以不带前缀,有多种不同的含义,比如行走、闻名、沾湿、积集、勤修、耳所识知、随耳门而了知等等。确实,前缀能限定动作,但由于它只是起显明作用,所以即使带了前缀,“所闻”这个词本身仍然表达相应的那些含义。因此,在列举不带前缀的“所闻”一词的含义时,把带前缀的用法也一并收进来,并不矛盾。巴利
Sutanti ayaṃ sutasaddo saupasaggo anupasaggo ca gamanavissutakilinnūpacitānuyogasotaviññeyya sotadvārānusāra viññātādianekatthappabhedo. Kiñcāpi hi upasaggo kiriyaṃ viseseti, jotakabhāvato pana satipi tasmiṃ sutasaddo eva taṃ tamatthaṃ vadatīti anupasaggassa sutasaddassa atthuddhāre saupasaggassa gahaṇaṃ na virujjhati.
在这里,“senāya pasuto”(随军)等说法中,意思是“随军而行”。“sutadhammassa passato”(所闻教法之见者)等说法中,意思是“闻名法者”。“avassutā avassutassa”(漏泄者对漏泄者)等说法中,意思是“被烦恼染污者对染污者”。“tumhehi puññaṃ pasutaṃ anappakaṃ”(你们已积集不少福)等说法中,意思是“已积集”。“ye jhānappasutā dhīrā”(那些勤修禅那的智者)等说法中,意思是“勤修禅那者”。“diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ mutaṃ”(所见、所闻、所觉)等说法中,意思是“耳所识”。“sutadharo sutasannicayo”(持闻者、积集闻者)等说法中,意思是“持守依耳门随转而了知者”。但在这里,它的意思是“依耳门随转而领受”或“领受”。因为当“me”这个词表示“由我”时,就与“如是我依耳门随转而领受”相合;当它表示“我的”时,就与“如是我的听闻,依耳门随转的领受”相合。巴利
Tattha ‘‘senāya pasuto’’tiādīsu gacchantoti attho. ‘‘Sutadhammassa passato’’tiādīsu (udā. 11) vissutadhammassāti attho. ‘‘Avassutā avassutassā’’tiādīsu (pāci. 657) kilesena kilinnā kilinnassāti attho. ‘‘Tumhehi puññaṃ pasutaṃ anappaka’’ntiādīsu (khu. pā. 7.12) upacitanti attho. ‘‘Ye jhānappasutā dhīrā’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 181) jhānānuyuttāti attho. ‘‘Diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ muta’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.241) sotaviññeyyanti attho. ‘‘Sutadharo sutasannicayo’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.339) sotadvārānusāraviññātadharoti attho. Idha panassa ‘‘sotadvārānusārena upadhārita’’nti vā ‘‘upadhāraṇa’’nti vā attho. Me-saddassa hi mayāti atthe sati ‘‘evaṃ mayā sutaṃ sotadvārānusārena upadhārita’’nti yujjati. Mamāti atthe sati ‘‘evaṃ mama sutaṃ sotadvārānusārena upadhāraṇa’’nti yujjati.
在这三个词当中,由于与“所闻”一词结合的“如此”一词,必须用来显示听闻的动作,所以“如此”显示的是在耳识领受等耳门识之后生起的意门识的作用。“我”显示的是具有此识的人。因为所有句子都带有表示决定的“eva”之义,以达到确定的效果。“所闻”显示的是排除“未听闻”,即没有减少、没有增加、没有颠倒地把握。正如所听闻的就应说为“所闻”,因此那是正确地听闻,没有减少、没有增加、没有颠倒地把握。或者,依据“声音通过排除其他意义来表达意义”的观点,“所闻”的意思就是“不是未听闻”,所以“所闻”显示对“未听闻”的否定,也就是没有减少、没有增加、没有颠倒地把握。这就是说:如是我闻,不是我所见,不是以自然智亲证,也不是以其他方式获得;而正是听闻,且是正确地听闻。又或者,在带决定义的“如此”一词中,有这样的义理结合:与它相关的“所闻”一词含有决定的意义,因此“所闻”一词应被理解为对“未听闻”的否定,以及显示没有减少、没有增加、没有颠倒地把握。因此,应当知道这也是依据听闻之因与听闻之差别,作出了“所闻”一词的释义结合。巴利
Evametesu tīsu padesu yasmā sutasaddasannidhāne payuttena evaṃsaddena savanakiriyājotakena bhavitabbaṃ, tasmā evanti sotaviññāṇasampaṭicchanādisotadvārikaviññāṇānantaraṃ uppannamanodvārikaviññāṇakiccanidassanaṃ. Meti vuttaviññāṇasamaṅgīpuggalanidassanaṃ. Sabbāni hi vākyāni evakāratthasahitāniyeva avadhāraṇaphalattā tesaṃ. Sutanti assavanabhāvappaṭikkhepato anūnānadhikāviparītaggahaṇanidassanaṃ. Yathā hi sutaṃ sutamevāti vattabbataṃ arahati tathā taṃ sammā sutaṃ anūnaggahaṇaṃ anadhikaggahaṇaṃ aviparītaggahaṇañca hotīti. Atha vā saddantaratthāpohanavasena saddo atthaṃ vadatīti etasmiṃ pakkhe yasmā sutanti etassa asutaṃ na hotīti ayamattho vutto, tasmā sutanti assavanabhāvappaṭikkhepato anūnānadhikāviparītaggahaṇanidassanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – evaṃ me sutaṃ, na mayā idaṃ diṭṭhaṃ, na sayambhūñāṇena sacchikataṃ, na aññathā vā upaladdhaṃ. Api ca sutaṃva, tañca kho sammadevāti. Avadhāraṇatthe vā evaṃsadde ayamatthayojanā, tadapekkhassa sutasaddassa niyamattho sambhavatīti tadapekkhassa sutasaddassa assavanabhāvappaṭikkhepo anūnānadhikāviparītaggahaṇanidassanatā ca veditabbā. Iti savanahetusavanavisesavasenapi sutasaddassa atthayojanā katāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
同样地,“如是”这个词,是在说明:那依耳门相续而转起的识路,因为执取了种种含义和文句,所以它以种种方式在所缘中运转,这就是“如是”一词的“行相”之义。“我”是显示自身。“所闻”是显示法,因为如前所说的识路是以教法为所缘。这里的大意是:以种种方式在所缘中转起的识路是工具,我没有做别的,只做了这件事——这个法已被听闻。巴利
Tathā evanti tassā sotadvārānusārena pavattāya viññāṇavīthiyā nānatthabyañjanaggahaṇato nānappakārena ārammaṇe pavattibhāvappakāsanaṃ ākārattho evaṃsaddoti karitvā. Meti attappakāsanaṃ. Sutanti dhammappakāsanaṃ yathāvuttāya viññāṇavīthiyā pariyattidhammārammaṇattā. Ayañhettha saṅkhepo – nānappakārena ārammaṇe pavattāya viññāṇavīthiyā karaṇabhūtāya mayā na aññaṃ kataṃ, idaṃ pana kataṃ, ayaṃ dhammo sutoti.
同样地,“如是”这个词是用来指示和说明的,它的意思就是“指示”,因为应当被指示的东西本身就可以被指出来。因此要知道,通过“如是”这个词,整部经也都被涵盖了。“我”是在说明人。“闻”是在说明人的作用。因为通过“闻”这个词所获得的听闻行为,是和听闻识的相续联系在一起的,而在这里就有对人的施设,在没有人的施设的纯粹法相续中,听闻行为是得不到的。这里的简要意思是:我要说的那部经,是我这样听闻的。巴利
Tathā evanti nidassitabbappakāsanaṃ nidassanattho evaṃsaddoti katvā nidassetabbassa niddisitabbabhāvato. Tasmā evaṃsaddena sakalampi suttaṃ paccāmaṭṭhanti veditabbaṃ. Meti puggalappakāsanaṃ. Sutanti puggalakiccappakāsanaṃ. Sutasaddena hi labbhamānā savanakiriyā savanaviññāṇappabandhappaṭibaddhā, tattha ca puggalavohāro, na ca puggalavohārarahite dhammappabandhe savanakiriyā labbhati. Tassāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – yaṃ suttaṃ niddisissāmi, taṃ mayā evaṃ sutanti.
同样地,“如是”是指:当某一心相续随着种种不同的所缘而运转时,就会执取种种不同的意义和文句,因此这是对种种行相的说明,也就是说“如是”这个词本身就具有“行相”的意思。因为“如是”这种行相概念,是依据诸法各自运转的行相而可以被施设的,这就是它的本性。“我”是对作者的说明。“听闻”是对所缘境的说明,因为应当听闻的法,对于以听闻行为来行事的补特伽罗来说,正是通过听闻行为而成为其运转的所依处。到这里就表明了:以种种方式运转的心相续,对于具备它的人来说,在其所缘境上已经有了执取的确定。巴利
Tathā evanti yassa cittasantānassa nānārammaṇappavattiyā nānatthabyañjanaggahaṇaṃ hoti, tassa nānākāraniddeso ākārattho eva evaṃsaddoti katvā. Evanti hi ayamākārapaññatti dhammānaṃ taṃ taṃ pavattiākāraṃ upādāya paññapetabbasabhāvattā. Meti kattuniddeso. Sutanti visayaniddeso, sotabbo hi dhammo savanakiriyākattupuggalassa savanakiriyāvasena pavattiṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Ettāvatā nānappakārena pavattena cittasantānena taṃsamaṅgino kattu visaye gahaṇasanniṭṭhānaṃ dassitaṃ hoti.
或者,“如是”是在说明个人的作用。因为对于已经听闻的诸法,以“如是”这个词,本身就具有揭示所执取的行相、或者作为例证、或者作为确定的作用,由此说明了对那种行相等状态的执持;这正是通常被称为“个人”的诸法的运作,所以称为个人的作用。“听闻”是在说明识的作用,因为即使是主张有个人的人,听闻的行为也不可能脱离识而存在。“我”则是在说明兼具这两种作用的个人。因为“我”这个词的使用,必然以特定的众生为对象,而识的作用也应该就在那里一并安立。这里的要点是:由具足听闻行为和识的个人,依于识而获得“听闻行为”的称谓,这就是“听闻”。巴利
Atha vā evanti puggalakiccaniddeso, sutānañhi dhammānaṃ gahitākārassa nidassanassa avadhāraṇassa vā pakāsanasabhāvena evaṃsaddena tadākārādidhāraṇassa puggalavohārupādānadhammabyāpārabhāvato puggalakiccaṃnāma niddiṭṭhaṃ hotīti. Sutanti viññāṇakiccaniddeso, puggalavādinopi hi savanakiriyā viññāṇanirapekkhā na hotīti. Meti ubhayakiccayuttapuggalaniddeso. Meti hi saddappavatti ekanteneva sattavisesavisayā viññāṇakiccañca tattheva samodahitabbanti. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepo – mayā savanakiccaviññāṇasamaṅginā puggalena viññāṇavasena laddhasavanakiccavohārena sutanti.
同样地,“如是”和“我”,从真实究竟义的角度来看,是不存在的施设。因为一切可由声了知的义理,都只能透过施设来通达;而一切施设又都归摄在“存在的”等六种施设之中。所以,像幻术、阳焰那样并非真实存在的事物,即使像那些只是靠传闻来执取的说法那样,也不是无上的义理。而色、声等,以及可坏、可感受等这些究竟自性,从真实究竟义的角度来说是存在的。然而,当说“如是”和“我”时,所指的那个形态义,并不具有究竟自性,在真实究竟义中找不到,所以叫做不存在的施设。那么,在这里,从究竟义上说,有什么东西能得到“如是”或“我”这样的指称呢?“闻”则是存在的施设。因为在这里,通过耳朵所听到的内容,从究竟义上来说是存在的。巴利
Tathā evanti ca meti ca saccikaṭṭhaparamatthavasena avijjamānapaññatti. Sabbassa hi saddādhigamanīyassa atthassa paññattimukheneva paṭipajjitabbattā sabbapaññattīnañca vijjamānādīsu chasu paññattīsu avarodho, tasmā yo māyāmarīciādayo viya abhūtattho anussavādīhi gahetabbo viya anuttamatthopi na hoti. So rūpasaddādiko ruppanānubhavanādiko ca paramatthasabhāvo saccikaṭṭhaparamatthavasena vijjati. Yo pana evanti ca meti ca vuccamāno ākārattho, so aparamatthasabhāvo saccikaṭṭhaparamatthavasena anupalabbhamāno avijjamānapaññatti nāma. Tasmā kiñhettha taṃ paramatthato atthi, yaṃ evanti vā meti vā niddesaṃ labhetha? Sutanti vijjamānapaññatti, yañhi taṃ ettha sotena upaladdhaṃ, taṃ paramatthato vijjamānanti.
“如是”是依着进入耳门的法,通过回想它们被认知的方式等而说的,属于回想施设。“我”是依着相续所包含的、具有作者等特殊差别的五蕴而应当被表述的,所以是所依施设。“闻”是参照“见”等而说的,所以是类比施设。即使“闻”这个说法所指的内容,是在不具备“见”等自性的声处中发生的,但就像“第二”“第三”是参照“第一”等而说的一样,由于它是参照“见、觉、识”而被认定为“闻”,所以必须参照“见”等来说。所谓“没有不曾听闻的”,正是用这个“闻”字来说明这个意思。巴利
Tathā evanti sotapathamāgate dhamme upādāya tesaṃ upadhāritākārādīnaṃ paccāmasanavasena. Meti sasantatipariyāpanne khandhe karaṇādivisesavisiṭṭhe upādāya vattabbato upādāpaññatti. Sutanti diṭṭhādīni upanidhāya vattabbato upanidhāpaññatti. Diṭṭhādisabhāvarahite saddāyatane pavattamānopi sutavohāro dutiyaṃ tatiyantiādiko viya paṭhamādīni, diṭṭhamutaviññāte apekkhitvā sutanti viññeyyattā diṭṭhādīni upanidhāya vattabbo hoti. Asutaṃ na hotīti hi sutanti pakāsitoyamatthoti.
在这里,“如是”这个说法表明他没有迷乱。因为阿难尊者是用“如是”来确认自己亲身通达、听闻过的种种差别,所以这就显示出他不迷乱。迷乱的人不可能以种种方式通达,而诸经典按因缘的方式来说又多种多样、极难通达,因此这句话就是在说明不迷乱。用“闻”这个说法,则表明他对所闻之法没有忘失,因为所闻的形态被如实呈现出来。一个人如果听闻之后忘掉了,过一段时间就不会承认“这是我听过的”。这样,由不迷乱而成就慧:因为不迷乱,或者仅凭听闻时生起的慧,就能成就后来进一步生起的慧;同样,由不忘失而成就念。其中,以慧为先导的念,有能力确定字句。因为字句所要通达的形态并不太深,只需按照所闻来忆持,这就是此时该做的事,所以这时念的作用更突出,慧则处于辅助地位,因此说“以慧为先导”。以念为先导的慧,则有能力通达义理。因为义理所要通达的形态很深,所以这时慧的作用更突出,念则处于辅助地位,因此说“以念为先导”。由于兼具这两者的能力,他就有能力守护具足义与字的法藏,因此成就了“持法藏者”的身份。巴利
Ettha ca evantivacanena asammohaṃ dīpeti. Paṭividdhā hi attanā sutassa pakāravisesā evanti idha āyasmatā ānandena paccāmaṭṭhā, tenassa asammoho dīpito hoti. Na hi sammūḷho nānappakārapaṭivedhasamattho hoti, paccayākāravasena nānappakārā duppaṭividdhā ca suttantāti dīpitanti. Sutantivacanena sutassa asammosaṃ dīpeti, sutākārassa yāthāvato dassiyamānattā. Yassa hi sutaṃ sammuṭṭhaṃ hoti, na so kālantare mayā sutanti paṭijānāti. Iccassa asammohena paññāsiddhi, sammohābhāvena paññāya eva vā savanakālasambhūtāya taduttarikālapaññāsiddhi, tathā asammosena satisiddhi. Tattha paññāpubbaṅgamāya satiyā byañjanāvadhāraṇasamatthatā. Byañjanānañhi paṭivijjhitabbo ākāro nātigambhīro, yathāsutaṃ dhāraṇameva tattha karaṇīyanti satiyā byāpāro adhiko, paññā tattha guṇībhūtā hoti paññāya pubbaṅgamāti katvā. Satipubbaṅgamāya paññāya atthappaṭivedhasamatthatā. Atthassa hi paṭivijjhitabbo ākāro gambhīroti paññāya byāpāro adhiko, sati tattha guṇībhūtāyevāti satiyā pubbaṅgamāyāti katvā. Tadubhayasamatthatāyogena atthabyañjanasampannassa dhammakosassa anupālanasamatthatāya dhammabhaṇḍāgārikattasiddhi.
另一种解释:用“如是”这个词来说明如理作意。靠着如理作意,对于那些正在被说的行相展示和确定,以及上面将要讲到的、能显示种种通达的内容,就能不颠倒地成立,因为这是以法为对象的。因为不如理作意的人,不可能有种种通达。用“闻”这个词来说明不散乱。因为当有人问“第一部菩提经是在哪里说的”这类问题时,对于典籍范围内将要讲述的经文,如果心不专注,就没办法听闻,因为心散乱的人根本听不进去。就像这样,一个心散乱的人,即使别人把一切好事都讲给他听,他也会说:“我没听到,你再说一遍。”在这里,如理作意能成就自身的正志和过去世所积的福德,因为心志不正的人,或者过去世没积福德的人,不会有如理作意。不散乱则能成就听闻正法和亲近善士,因为没听闻过的人,以及没有亲近善士的人,也不会有不散乱。所以说,心散乱的人听不进去,不亲近善士的人也不可能有真正的听闻。巴利
Aparo nayo – evantivacanena yonisomanasikāraṃ dīpeti, tena ca vuccamānānaṃ ākāranidassanāvadhāraṇatthānaṃ upari vakkhamānānaṃ nānappakārappaṭivedhajotakānaṃ aviparītasiddhi dhammavisayattā. Na hi ayoniso manasikaroto nānappakārappaṭivedho sambhavati. Sutantivacanena avikkhepaṃ dīpeti, ‘‘paṭhamabodhisuttaṃ kattha bhāsita’’ntiādipucchāvasena pakaraṇapattassa vakkhamānassa suttassa savanaṃ samādhānamantarena na sambhavati vikkhittacittassa savanābhāvato. Tathā hi vikkhittacitto puggalo sabbasampattiyā vuccamānopi ‘‘na mayā sutaṃ, puna bhaṇathā’’ti bhaṇati. Yonisomanasikārena cettha attasammāpaṇidhiṃ pubbe ca katapuññataṃ sādheti sammā appaṇihitattassa pubbe akatapuññassa vā tadabhāvato. Avikkhepena saddhammassavanaṃ sappurisūpanissayañca sādheti assutavato sappurisūpanissayavirahitassa ca tadabhāvato. Na hi vikkhitto sotuṃ sakkoti, na ca sappurise anupanissayamānassa savanaṃ atthīti.
另一种解释:已经说过,“对于心相续以种种方式生起时,能够把握种种义理和文句的,就是对种种方式的说明。”而这种善巧的行相——通过抉择世尊言教中义理与文句的种种差别,从而完整地掌握全部教法的成就,圆满地成就利他——对于心没有好好安立的人,或者过去没有积福德的人,是不会真正生起的。因此,用“如是”这个善巧的行相,说明了他自身后二轮(见轮和智轮)的成就;用“闻”,通过听闻的关联,说明了前二轮(戒轮和定轮)的成就。因为住在不适宜的地方、又没有善知识依止的人,是不会有听闻的。这样,由后二轮的成就,他的意乐清净就得以成立。心善加安立并且过去积了福德的人,意乐清净,因为导致不清净的烦恼已经远离了。正如所说:“心若善加安立,就能因此变得更好”(《法句经》43),以及“阿难,你已积了福德,努力精进吧,你很快就会成为无漏者”(《长部》2.207)。由前二轮的成就,则加行清净得以成立。因为住在适宜的地方、依止善知识、跟随善人的见解去做,加行就是清净的。又因为意乐清净,证悟的善巧得以成立,因为先前已经净化了渴爱和邪见等杂染;因为加行清净,教法的善巧得以成立。身语加行极其清净的人,因为没有追悔,心不散乱,在所学中得心应手。这样,具足加行清净和意乐清净、具足教法与证悟成就的人,他的言语就像日出前的曙光,就像善业的如理作意,堪为世尊言教的先导。因此,在恰当的地方安立序分,说出了“如是我闻”等语。巴利
Aparo nayo – ‘‘yassa cittasantānassa nānappakārappavattiyā nānatthabyañjanaggahaṇaṃ hoti, tassa nānākāraniddeso’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmā ca so bhagavato vacanassa atthabyañjanappabhedaparicchedavasena sakalasāsanasampattiogāhanena niravasesaṃ parahitapāripūrīkaraṇabhūto evaṃ bhaddako ākāro na sammā appaṇihitattassa pubbe akatapuññassa vā hoti. Tasmā evanti iminā bhaddakena ākārena pacchimacakkadvayasampattimattano dīpeti, sutanti savanayogena purimacakkadvayasampattiṃ. Na hi appatirūpe dese vasato sappurisūpanissayavirahitassa ca savanaṃ atthi. Iccassa pacchimacakkadvayasiddhiyā āsayasuddhi siddhā hoti. Sammā paṇihitacitto pubbe ca katapuñño visuddhāsayo hoti tadasuddhihetūnaṃ kilesānaṃ dūrībhāvato. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘sammā paṇihitaṃ cittaṃ, seyyaso naṃ tato kare’’ti (dha. pa. 43) ‘‘katapuññosi tvaṃ, ānanda, padhānamanuyuñja, khippaṃ hohisi anāsavo’’ti (dī. ni. 2.207) ca. Purimacakkadvayasiddhiyā payogasuddhi. Patirūpadesavāsena hi sappurisūpanissayena ca sādhūnaṃ diṭṭhānugatiāpajjanena parisuddhappayogo hoti. Tāya ca āsayasuddhiyā adhigamabyattisiddhi, pubbeyeva taṇhādiṭṭhisaṃkilesānaṃ visodhitattā payogasuddhiyā āgamabyattisiddhi. Suparisuddhakāyavacīpayogo hi vippaṭisārābhāvato avikkhittacitto pariyattiyaṃ visārado hoti. Iti payogāsayasuddhassa āgamādhigamasampannassa vacanaṃ aruṇuggamanaṃ viya sūriyassa udayato yonisomanasikāro viya ca kusalakammassa arahati bhagavato vacanassa pubbaṅgamaṃ bhavitunti ṭhāne nidānaṃ ṭhapento evaṃ me sutantiādimāha.
另一种解释:“如是”这个词,是用前面所说的那种方式——也就是能显示种种通达的说法——来表明他自己已经圆满具备义无碍解和辩无碍解。“闻”这个词,因为紧接在“如是”之后,或者是因为指向后面将要说的内容,用能显示对所闻分类通达的说法,来表明他自己已经圆满具备法无碍解和词无碍解。而当他说出这个和前面所说一样、能显示如理作意的“如是”时,他是在表明:“这些法我已经用内心反复审察,用见解彻底通达。”因为对教法文本的通达是这样的:用内心审察“这里讲了戒,这里讲了定,这里讲了慧,这里有这么多连接”等等,伴随着随闻而来的思惟行相,成为对法的审察忍,或者称为知遍知的见解,对处处所说的色法和无色法,以“这是色,色有这么多”等等方式善加判定,从而通达,并能给自己和他人带来利益与安乐。当他说出这个能显示与听闻相应的“闻”时,他是在表明:“我多闻这些法,忆持,用言语反复串习。”因为对教法文本的听闻、忆持和串习,都依赖于倾耳专注。通过这两者,他显示法是善说的、义理与文句都圆满,从而激发对听闻的恭敬心。因为对于义理与文句圆满的法,如果不恭敬听闻,就会失去大利益。所以,激发恭敬心之后,应当殷重地听闻法。巴利
Aparo nayo – evanti iminā pubbe vuttanayeneva nānappakārappaṭivedhadīpakena vacanena attano atthapaṭibhānapaṭisambhidāsampattisabbhāvaṃ dīpeti. Sutanti iminā evaṃsaddasannidhānato vakkhamānāpekkhāya vā sotabbabhedappaṭivedhadīpakena dhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāsampattisabbhāvaṃ dīpeti. Evanti ca idaṃ vuttanayeneva yonisomanasikāradīpakavacanaṃ bhāsamāno ‘‘ete dhammā mayā manasānupekkhitā diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhā’’ti dīpeti. Pariyattidhammo hi ‘‘idha sīlaṃ kathitaṃ, idha samādhi, idha paññā, ettakā ettha anusandhiyo’’tiādinā nayena manasā anupekkhito anussavākāraparivitakkasahitāya dhammanijjhānakkhantibhūtāya ñātapariññāsaṅkhātāya vā diṭṭhiyā tattha tattha vuttarūpārūpadhamme ‘‘iti rūpaṃ, ettakaṃ rūpa’’ntiādinā nayena suṭṭhu vavatthapetvā paṭividdho attano ca paresañca hitasukhāvaho hotīti. Sutanti idaṃ savanayogadīpakavacanaṃ bhāsamāno ‘‘bahū mayā dhammā sutā dhātā vacasā paricitā’’ti dīpeti. Sotāvadhānappaṭibaddhā hi pariyattidhammassa savanadhāraṇaparicayā. Tadubhayenapi dhammassa svākkhātabhāvena, atthabyañjanapāripūriṃ dīpento savane ādaraṃ janeti. Atthabyañjanaparipuṇṇañhi dhammaṃ ādarena assuṇanto mahatā hitā paribāhiro hotīti ādaraṃ janetvā sakkaccaṃ dhammo sotabbo.
阿难尊者用“如是我闻”这整句话,表明他不把如来所宣说的法当成自己的东西,这样就超越了非善人的境地;他承认自己是声闻弟子,这样就进入了善人的境地。同样,他让心从非正法中脱离出来,把心安立在正法上。他表明“这只是我所听闻的,正是那位世尊所说的话”,由此使自己免除过失,指出导师,确立胜者的教说,安立法的传承。巴利
‘‘Evaṃme suta’’nti iminā pana sakalena vacanena āyasmā ānando tathāgatappaveditaṃ dhammaṃ attano adahanto asappurisabhūmiṃ atikkamati, sāvakattaṃ paṭijānanto sappurisabhūmiṃ okkamati. Tathā asaddhammā cittaṃ vuṭṭhāpeti, saddhamme cittaṃ patiṭṭhāpeti. ‘‘Kevalaṃ sutamevetaṃ mayā, tasseva pana bhagavato vacana’’nti dīpento attānaṃ parimoceti, satthāraṃ apadisati, jinavacanaṃ appeti, dhammanettiṃ patiṭṭhāpeti.
另外,他不承认“如是我闻”这句话是自己编造的,而是表明这是从前亲耳听闻的:“这是我在那位世尊面前亲自领受的——那位具足四无畏、持有十力、安住于牛王之境、发出狮子吼、一切众生中最殊胜、于法得自在、法王、以法为尊、法之明灯、以法为归依、正法最胜转轮王、正等正觉者。对于其中的义、法、词、句,都不应有任何疑惑或犹豫。”他以此消除一切人与天神对这教法的不信,令他们生起信心成就。因此这样说:巴利
Apica ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’nti attanā uppāditabhāvaṃ appaṭijānanto purimassavanaṃ vivaranto ‘‘sammukhā paṭiggahitamidaṃ mayā tassa bhagavato catuvesārajjavisāradassa dasabaladharassa āsabhaṭṭhānaṭṭhāyino sīhanādanādino sabbasattuttamassa dhammissarassa dhammarājassa dhammādhipatino dhammadīpassa dhammasaraṇassa saddhammavaracakkavattino sammāsambuddhassa, na ettha atthe vā dhamme vā pade vā byañjane vā kaṅkhā vā vimati vā kattabbā’’ti sabbadevamanussānaṃ imasmiṃ dhamme assaddhiyaṃ vināseti, saddhāsampadaṃ uppādeti. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
它能灭除不信,增长对教法的信心;
如是我闻,乔达摩的弟子这样说。巴利
‘‘Vināsayati assaddhaṃ, saddhaṃ vaḍḍheti sāsane; Evaṃ me sutamiccevaṃ, vadaṃ gotamasāvako’’ti.
“一”是数目限定的说明。这个“一”字,出现在其他、最胜、无伴、数目等意思中。比如在“常恒的我和世间,唯有这是真实的,其余都是虚妄”这类句子中,它表示“其他”;在“心一境性”这类说法中,它表示“最胜”;在“独自远离”这类说法中,它表示“无伴”;在“诸比丘,唯有这一个刹那、这一个时机,适合修梵行”这类说法中,它表示“数目”。在这里也应当理解为数目义。因此说:“‘一’是数目限定的说明。”巴利
Ekanti gaṇanaparicchedaniddeso. Ayañhi ekasaddo aññaseṭṭhāsahāyasaṅkhyādīsu dissati. Tathā hi ayaṃ ‘‘sassato attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṃ moghamaññanti ittheke abhivadantī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.27; udā. 55) aññe dissati. ‘‘Cetaso ekodibhāva’’ntiādīsu (pārā. 11; dī. ni. 1.228) seṭṭhe. ‘‘Eko vūpakaṭṭho’’tiādīsu (cūḷava. 445; dī. ni. 1.405) asahāye. ‘‘Ekova kho, bhikkhave, khaṇo ca samayo ca brahmacariyavāsāyā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.29) saṅkhyāyaṃ, idhāpi saṅkhyāyameva daṭṭhabbo. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘ekanti gaṇanaparicchedaniddeso’’ti.
Samayaṃ 是限定性的说明。Ekaṃ samayaṃ 是非限定性的阐明。其中,samaya 这个词——巴利
Samayanti paricchinnaniddeso. Ekaṃ samayanti aniyamitaparidīpanaṃ. Tattha samayasaddo –
在和合、刹那、时节、集合、因与见中,
在获得、断除和通达中,也能看到它。巴利
‘‘Samavāye khaṇe kāle, samūhe hetudiṭṭhisu; Paṭilābhe pahāne ca, paṭivedhe ca dissati’’.
同样地,在“或许明天我们也能趁着时机和机会前去亲近”这类句子中,它的意思是“和合”,因为其意图是获得合适的时机和条件的聚合,所以应当理解为“缘的和合”。在“诸比丘,只有唯一的刹那和时机是用于修梵行的”这类句子中,它的意思是“刹那”,也就是“机会”。因为如来出世等就是修习正道梵行的机会,由于它是获得那类缘的原因,所以刹那本身就是时机——凡是被称为刹那和时机的,就是唯一的,这就是其含义。在“热时、酷热时”这类句子中,它的意思是“时节”。在“大集会在林中”这类句子中,它的意思是“集合”。所谓大集会,就是比丘们和天神们的大聚集。在“跋陀利,那时你未能通达,世尊住在舍卫城,世尊也会知道我——‘有个叫跋陀利的比丘,在导师的教法中修学没有圆满’——跋陀利,这也是你未能通达的时机”这类句子中,它的意思是“原因”。这里,学处的理由就被称为“时机”。在“那时,游行者优迦诃摩那·沙门蒙地咖之子,住在末利夫人的园林里,那是以议论时机著称的、有黑乌木单层大厅的地方”这类句子中,它的意思是“见解”。因为坐在那里的外道们各自宣说自己所主张的见解,所以那个游行者住的园林被称为“议论时机的”。巴利
Tathā hissa ‘‘appeva nāma svepi upasaṅkameyyāma kālañca samayañca upādāyā’’ti evamādīsu (dī. ni. 1.447) samavāyo attho, yuttakālañca paccayasāmaggiñca labhitvāti hi adhippāyo, tasmā paccayasamavāyoti veditabbo . ‘‘Ekova kho, bhikkhave, khaṇo ca samayo ca brahmacariyavāsāyā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.29) khaṇo, okāsoti attho. Tathāgatuppādādiko hi maggabrahmacariyassa okāso tappaccayappaṭilābhahetuttā, khaṇo eva ca samayo, yo khaṇoti ca samayoti ca vuccati, so eko yevāti hi attho. ‘‘Uṇhasamayo pariḷāhasamayo’’tiādīsu (pāci. 358) kālo. ‘‘Mahāsamayo pavanasmi’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.332) samūho. Mahāsamayoti hi bhikkhūnaṃ devatānañca mahāsannipātoti attho. ‘‘Samayopi kho te, bhaddāli, appaṭividdho ahosi, bhagavā kho sāvatthiyaṃ viharati, bhagavāpi maṃ jānissati ‘bhaddāli nāma bhikkhu satthusāsane sikkhāya na paripūrakārī’ti, ayampi kho te, bhaddāli, samayo appaṭividdho ahosī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.135) hetu. Sikkhāpadassa kāraṇañhi idha samayoti adhippetaṃ. ‘‘Tena kho pana samayena uggāhamāno paribbājako samaṇamuṇḍikāputto samayappavādake tindukācīre ekasālake mallikāya ārāme paṭivasatī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.260) diṭṭhi. Tattha hi nisinnā titthiyā attano attano diṭṭhisaṅkhātaṃ samayaṃ pavadantīti so paribbājakārāmo ‘‘samayappavādako’’ti vuccati.
在现世的利益,以及在来世的利益;
通达了义的智者被称为贤者。巴利
‘‘Diṭṭhe dhamme ca yo attho, yo cattho samparāyiko; Atthābhisamayā dhīro, paṇḍitoti pavuccatī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.129) –
在“诸句等”中,“现观”是获得的意思。因为“义现观”就是义的证得,这就是它的意思。在“以正现观慢而作苦的尽头”等句中,它是断除的意思。诤事、平息、止息、消失,这些就是现观,也就是断除。在“苦有逼迫义、有为义、热恼义、变异义、现观义”等句中,它是通达。所谓通达,因为应当被现观,所以就是现观;现观本身就是义,所以叫“现观义”——这是把逼迫等应当被现观的性质归为一体来说的。或者,作为现观即通达之对象的义,就是“现观义”,因此那些逼迫等就完全以那种方式被说成是现观义。其中,逼迫是苦谛对具有它的诸法的伤害,使它们无法舒展。热恼是以苦苦等方式的烧灼、燃烧。巴利
Ādīsu paṭilābho. Atthābhisamayāti hi atthassa adhigamāti attho. ‘‘Sammā mānābhisamayā antamakāsi dukkhassā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.28) pahānaṃ. Adhikaraṇaṃ samayaṃ vūpasamanaṃ apagamoti abhisamayo pahānaṃ. ‘‘Dukkhassa pīḷanaṭṭho saṅkhataṭṭho santāpaṭṭho vipariṇāmaṭṭho abhisamayaṭṭho’’tiādīsu (paṭi. ma. 2.8) paṭivedho . Paṭivedhoti hi abhisametabbato abhisamayo, abhisamayova attho abhisamayaṭṭhoti pīḷanādīni abhisametabbabhāvena ekībhāvaṃ upanetvā vuttāni, abhisamayassa vā paṭivedhassa visayabhūto attho abhisamayaṭṭhoti tāneva tathā ekantena vuttāni. Tattha pīḷanaṃ dukkhasaccassa taṃsamaṅgino hiṃsanaṃ avipphārikatākaraṇaṃ. Santāpo dukkhadukkhatādivasena santappanaṃ paridahanaṃ.
在这里,“时”有这些含义:辅助条件被审察、聚集、和合,这叫“和合时”。道与梵行在这里和合、相遇,依靠那些能承载它的人,这一刹那叫“时”。众生或有自性的法,在这里或通过它与生起等法、俱生等法一起聚合,这叫“时间时”。因为时间只是法的运作,从究竟意义上说并非实有,但它被假立为法运作的所依和能作,就像依假名施设,把本不相应的事说成“缘”一样。“聚时”是指诸支分的和合运作、共同安住,如同“集”;其实聚就是诸支分共同安住的状态。“因时”是指其他缘具足时,果由此生起、运作,如同“集起”。“见时”是指以结合的方式系缚,在自己的对象上运作,或以牢固执取的方式,众生依各自的执著而被系缚、运作;因为众生被见结系缚得极其牢固。“得时”是指会合、聚集、获得。“舍时”是指舍离、离去、消失。但从断除的意义上说,更殊胜的“时”叫“现观”,如同“阿毗达摩”一样。以智慧正确地面对、通达,叫“现观”,即诸法不颠倒的自性。以面对的方式正确地前往、了知,叫“现观”,即对诸法如实自性的觉悟。这样,应当了知“时”这个词在各种不同意义上的用法。巴利
Ettha ca sahakārīkāraṇasannijjhaṃ sameti samavetīti samavāyo samayo. Sameti samāgacchati ettha maggabrahmacariyaṃ tadādhārapuggalehīti khaṇo samayo. Sameti ettha etena vā saṃgacchati satto sabhāvadhammo vā uppādādīhi sahajātādīhi vāti kālo samayo. Dhammappavattimattatāya atthato abhūtopi hi kālo dhammappavattiyā adhikaraṇaṃ karaṇaṃ viya ca kappanāmattasiddhenānurūpena voharīyatīti. Samaṃ, saha vā avayavānaṃ ayanaṃ pavatti avaṭṭhānanti samūho samayo yathā samudāyoti. Avayavasahāvaṭṭhānameva hi samūho. Avasesapaccayānaṃ samāgame sati eti phalametasmā uppajjati pavattatīti samayo hetu yathā samudayoti. Sameti saṃyojanabhāvato sambandho eti attano visaye pavattati, daḷhaggahaṇabhāvato vā saṃyuttā ayanti pavattanti sattā yathābhinivesaṃ etenāti samayo diṭṭhi. Diṭṭhisaṃyojanena hi sattā ativiya bajjhantīti. Samiti saṅgati samodhānanti samayo paṭilābho. Samayanaṃ upasamayanaṃ apagamoti samayo pahānaṃ. Samucchedappahānabhāvato pana adhiko samayoti abhisamayo yathā abhidhammoti. Abhimukhaṃ ñāṇena sammā etabbo abhisametabboti abhisamayo, dhammānaṃ aviparītasabhāvo. Abhimukhabhāvena sammā eti gacchati bujjhatīti abhisamayo, dhammānaṃ yathābhūtasabhāvāvabodho. Evaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ atthe samayasaddassa pavatti veditabbā.
在解释“samaya”这个词的义项时,连带说明“abhisamaya”一词的取义,其理由依照前面所讲的方式即可理解。不过在这里,由于“和合”等含义都不成立,所以它的意思就是“时间”。因为就像地点、说法者和听众等是说法的因缘一样,这里作为说法因缘的,也只能是时间。也就是说,此处“samaya”指的就是时间,因此说“一时”,是在表明:在年、季、月、半月、夜、日、上午、正午、下午、初夜、中夜、后夜、片刻等种种时间差别当中,指的是某一个特定的时间。巴利
Samayasaddassa atthuddhāre abhisamayasaddassa gahaṇe kāraṇaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Idha panassa kālo attho samavāyādīnaṃ asambhavato. Desadesakaparisā viya hi desanāya nidānabhāve kālo eva icchitabboti. Yasmā panettha samayoti kālo adhippeto, tasmā saṃvaccharautumāsaddhamāsarattidivasapubbaṇhamajjhanhikasāyanhapaṭhamayāma- majjhimayāmapacchimayāmamuhuttādīsu kālabhedabhūtesu samayesu ekaṃ samayanti dīpeti.
那为什么这里只笼统地说是“一时”,而不具体指明是哪个季节、哪一年呢?虽然每一部经是在哪一年、哪个季节、哪个月、哪半月、哪一夜或哪一天讲的,长老都能用智慧清清楚楚地了知、确定;但如果要这样说:“如是我闻,在某年、某季、某月、某半月、某夜、某日……”那就很难轻松地记住、诵持,或教别人诵持,而且要说的话也太多了。所以就用一个词把所有这层意思收摄起来,说“一时”。巴利
Kasmā panettha aniyamitavaseneva kālo niddiṭṭho, na utusaṃvaccharādivasena niyametvā niddiṭṭhoti ce? Kiñcāpi etesu saṃvaccharādīsu samayesu yaṃ yaṃ suttaṃ yasmiṃ yasmiṃ saṃvacchare utumhi māse pakkhe rattibhāge divasabhāge vā vuttaṃ, sabbampi taṃ therassa suviditaṃ suvavatthāpitaṃ paññāya. Yasmā pana ‘‘evaṃ me sutaṃ asukasaṃvacchare asukautumhi asukamāse asukapakkhe asukarattibhāge asukadivasabhāge vā’’ti evaṃ vutte na sakkā sukhena dhāretuṃ vā uddisituṃ vā uddisāpetuṃ vā, bahu ca vattabbaṃ hoti, tasmā ekeneva padena tamatthaṃ samodhānetvā ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti āha.
世尊在人与天人之间极其著名的许多不同时候,比如入胎时、出生时、生起厌离紧迫感时、出家时、修苦行时、降伏魔罗时、现等正觉时、现法乐住时、说法时、般涅槃时等等,在这些时候当中,这里指的是被称为“说法时”的那一个时候,所以说“一时”。又或者,在智慧的作用和悲悯的作用这两类时候中,它指的是悲悯作用的时候;在自利修行和利他修行这两类时候中,它指的是利他修行的时候;在众人集会时两件应做之事中,它指的是说法的时候;在说法和修行这两类时候中,它指的是说法的时候。针对这些时候中的某一个,而说“一时”。巴利
Ye vā ime gabbhokkantisamayo jātisamayo saṃvegasamayo abhinikkhamanasamayo dukkarakārikasamayo māravijayasamayo abhisambodhisamayo diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārasamayo desanāsamayo parinibbānasamayoti evamādayo bhagavato devamanussesu ativiya pakāsā anekakālappabhedā eva samayā, tesu samayesu desanāsamayasaṅkhātaṃ ekaṃ samayanti dīpeti. Yo vāyaṃ ñāṇakaruṇākiccasamayesu karuṇākiccasamayo, attahitaparahitappaṭipattisamayesu parahitappaṭipattisamayo, sannipatitānaṃ karaṇīyadvayasamayesu dhammakathāsamayo, desanāpaṭipattisamayesu desanāsamayo, tesu samayesu aññatarasamayaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti āha.
那么,为什么这里不像阿毗达摩里那样用处格来表述——“在那时,欲界善心生起”——也不像其他一些经文里那样说“诸比丘,在那时,比丘远离欲、远离不善法”,也不像律藏里那样用工具格说“那时,佛世尊”,而是不用这些方式,改用表示完全相续关联的业格,说成“一时”呢?因为那些地方有那样的道理,而这里的情况不同,意义成立的根据不一样。
在阿毗达摩和其他经里,“时”这个词能成立两种含义:一是作为“所依处”“所缘”意义上的“依处”义,二是“以有显有”意义上的“有之状态”义。所谓“时”作为时间和聚集,是那里所说的触等诸法的所依。从究竟义来说,时间并不是真实存在的,但因为那些刹那生起的法在此前、此后都不存在,所以依着它们作为所依而被安立认知,就像说“早晨出生”“傍晚出生”那样。而“聚集”虽然离开各组成部分、从究竟义来说也不真实存在,但通过假立施设的形相,被安立为各组成部分的所依,就像说“树上有枝”“谷子生在谷堆里”那样。
意思是:在欲界善心生起的那段时间、那个法聚中,触等诸法也正是在同一时间、同一法聚中生起。同样,通过称为“刹那和合因”的“时”的存在状态,标示出那里所说的触等诸法的存在。就像说“牛在挤奶时他去了,挤完奶后他回来了”,这里是通过挤奶这个动作来标示“去”这个动作;同样,这里说“在那时”,由于“时”这个词并非完全没有所指,所以“有”这层意思自然就能被理解。因此,通过“时”的存在,标示出心生起的动作,以及触等诸法存在的动作。
也就是说:在如理作意等因由、各种条件和合具足的那个时候、那个第九刹那,欲界善心生起;就在那个时候、那个刹那、那个因由、那个条件和合之中,触等诸法也存在。因此,为了阐明这个意义,才用业格来表述。巴利
Kasmā panettha yathā abhidhamme ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hotī’’ti (dha. sa. 1) ca ito aññesu suttapadesu ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehī’’ti (a. ni. 4.200) ca bhummavacanena niddeso kato, vinaye ca ‘‘tena samayena buddho bhagavā’’ti (pārā. 1) karaṇavacanena niddeso kato, tathā akatvā ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti accantasaṃyogatthe upayogavacanena niddeso katoti? Tattha tathā, idha ca aññathā atthasambhavato. Tattha hi abhidhamme ito aññesu ca suttantesu ādhāravisayasaṅkhāto adhikaraṇattho kiriyāya kiriyantaralakkhaṇasaṅkhāto bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇattho ca sambhavatīti. Adhikaraṇañhi kālattho samūhattho ca samayo tattha vuttānaṃ phassādidhammānaṃ, tathā kālo sabhāvadhammappavattimattatāya paramatthato avijjamānopi ādhārabhāvena paññāto taṅkhaṇappavattānaṃ tato pubbe parato ca abhāvato yathā ‘‘pubbaṇhe jāto sāyanhe jāto’’tiādīsu. Samūhotipi avayavavinimutto paramatthato avijjamānopi kappanāmattasiddhena rūpena avayavānaṃ ādhārabhāvena paññāpīyati, yathā ‘‘rukkhe sākhā, yavo yavarāsimhi samuṭṭhito’’tiādīsu. Yasmiṃ kāle dhammapuñje ca kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti, tasmiṃyeva kāle dhammapuñje ca phassādayopi hontīti ayañhi tattha attho. Tathā khaṇasamavāyahetusaṅkhātassa samayassa bhāvena tattha vuttānaṃ phassādidhammānaṃ bhāvo lakkhīyati. Yathā hi ‘‘gāvīsu duyhamānāsu gato, duddhāsu āgato’’ti ettha gāvīnaṃ dohanakiriyāya gamanakiriyā lakkhīyati, evaṃ idhāpi yasmiṃ samayeti vutte ca padatthassa sattāvirahābhāvato satīti ayamattho viññāyamāno eva hotīti samayassa sattākiriyāya cittassa uppādakiriyā phassādīnaṃ bhavanakiriyā ca lakkhīyati. Tathā yasmiṃ samaye yasmiṃ navame khaṇe yasmiṃ yonisomanasikārādihetumhi paccayasamavāye vā sati kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti, tasmiṃ samaye khaṇe hetumhi paccayasamavāye ca phassādayopi hontīti. Tasmā tadatthajotanatthaṃ bhummavacanena niddeso kato.
在律藏里也是这样:像“靠食物而住”“靠诵习而住”这类说法,表示的是原因;像“用斧头砍”“用锄头挖”这类说法,表示的是工具。这两层意思在这里都说得通。要知道,制定学处的那一刻,就连法将(舍利弗)这样的人也难以理解。世尊在听到有人犯戒之后,就以那个时刻作为工具、作为原因,召集比丘僧团,追问并呵责那个犯事的人,并且不越过犯事发生的那段时间,就制定学处,就像制定第三条波罗夷那样,是着眼于制定学处的因缘,才在各处安住的。因此,为了说明这个意思,在律藏里就用工具格来表达。巴利
Vinaye ca ‘‘annena vasati, ajjhenena vasatī’’tiādīsu viya hetuattho, ‘‘pharasunā chindati, kudālena khaṇatī’’tiādīsu viya karaṇattho ca sambhavati. Yo hi sikkhāpadapaññattisamayo dhammasenāpatiādīhipi dubbiññeyyo, tena samayena karaṇabhūtena hetubhūtena ca vītikkamaṃ sutvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ sannipātāpetvā otiṇṇavatthukaṃ puggalaṃ paṭipucchitvā vigarahitvā ca taṃ taṃ vatthuṃ otiṇṇasamayasaṅkhātaṃ kālaṃ anatikkamitvā sikkhāpadāni paññāpento tatiyapārājikādīnaṃ viya sikkhāpadapaññattiyā hetuṃ apekkhamāno tattha tattha vihāsi, tasmā tadatthajotanatthaṃ vinaye karaṇavacanena niddeso kato.
不过,在这里以及类似的情形中,“完全相连”的含义是成立的。因为当世尊以同时生起的因缘而说出这首优陀那的时候,他在那一整段时间里,确实都是以圣者的安住为先导,在随观法义。所以,就像“诵习一个月”这类说法一样,为了表明业格的含义,这里就用业格来表达。因此这样说:巴利
Idha pana aññasmiñca evaṃjātike accantasaṃyogattho sambhavati. Yasmiñhi samaye saha samuṭṭhānahetunā idaṃ udānaṃ uppannaṃ, accantameva taṃ samayaṃ ariyavihārapubbaṅgamāya dhammapaccavekkhaṇāya bhagavā vihāsi, tasmā ‘‘māsaṃ ajjhetī’’tiādīsu viya upayogatthajotanatthaṃ idha upayogavacanena niddeso kato. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
看的是这个那个具体含义,并且结合处格和具格来说。
在其他地方“时”被提及,这里则是用具格说起的。巴利
‘‘Taṃ taṃ atthamapekkhitvā, bhummena karaṇena ca; Aññatra samayo vutto, upayogena so idhā’’ti.
古师们则解释说:不管是说“yasmiṃ samaye”,还是说“tena samayena”,还是说“ekaṃ samayaṃ”,这些只是说法上的差别,这个表述在任何情况下都只是处格的意思。所以,即使说成“ekaṃ samayaṃ”,也应该理解为“在某一时”。巴利
Porāṇā pana vaṇṇayanti – ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye’’ti vā ‘‘tena samayenā’’ti vā ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti vā abhilāpamattabhedo esa niddeso, sabbattha bhummameva atthoti. Tasmā ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti vuttepi ekasmiṃ samayeti attho veditabbo.
世尊就是尊贵者。世间人把尊贵者称为“世尊”。而这位佛陀因为具足一切功德、最为殊胜,是一切众生中的尊贵者,因此应当知道他就是世尊。古人也这样说:巴利
Bhagavāti garu. Garuñhi loke ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vadanti. Ayañca sabbaguṇavisiṭṭhatāya sabbasattānaṃ garu, tasmā bhagavāti veditabbo. Porāṇehipi vuttaṃ –
世尊这个词最殊胜,世尊这个词最无上;
他值得敬重,又与敬重相应,所以被称为世尊。巴利
‘‘Bhagavāti vacanaṃ seṭṭhaṃ, bhagavāti vacanamuttamaṃ; Garu gāravayutto so, bhagavā tena vuccatī’’ti.
在这里,“最胜”这个词是用来表达最胜的意思,因为它是和最胜的功德相伴而说的。或者说,“说”就是言语,也就是意义。所谓“世尊”这个词是最胜的,意思是:用“世尊”这个词所表达的那个意义,就是最胜的。所谓“世尊”这个词是无上的,这里的含义也应当按同样的方式理解。“与恭敬相应”是指与尊重相应,因为与尊贵的功德相连,或者因为值得特别尊重,所以是与恭敬相应。如此应当知道,“世尊”这个词,是对具有殊胜功德、在众生中最为至上、尊贵、值得恭敬者的称呼。再者——巴利
Tattha seṭṭhavācakavacanaṃ seṭṭhanti vuttaṃ seṭṭhaguṇasahacaraṇato. Atha vā vuccatīti vacanaṃ, attho. Bhagavāti vacanaṃ seṭṭhanti bhagavāti iminā vacanena vacanīyo yo attho, so seṭṭhoti attho. Bhagavāti vacanamuttamanti etthāpi vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. Gāravayuttoti garubhāvayutto garuguṇayogato visesagarukaraṇārahatāya vā gāravayutto. Evaṃ guṇavisiṭṭhasattuttamagarugāravādhivacanaṃ bhagavāti idaṃ vacananti veditabbaṃ. Apica –
具有部分、亲近、分享、已分析区分。
他作了破坏,故称为尊贵者,具足福德。
以众多正理善修自身者。
他被称为世尊,因为他已经到达了存在的尽头。巴利
‘‘Bhagī bhajī bhāgī vibhattavā iti, Akāsi bhagganti garūti bhāgyavā; Bahūhi ñāyehi subhāvitattano, Bhavantago so bhagavāti vuccatī’’ti. –
按照《大义释》(大义释 84)里所讲的方式:巴利
Niddese (mahāni. 84) āgatanayena –
具足福运,具足破碎,相应结合,并且以恐惧而善加分别。
已受用、已舍弃诸趣,于诸有中,世尊从彼而称。巴利
‘‘Bhāgyavā bhaggavā yutto, bhagehi ca vibhattavā; Bhattavā vantagamano, bhavesu bhagavā tato’’ti. –
通过这首偈颂,应当理解“世尊”这个词的含义。而这个含义在《清净道论》(visuddhi. 1.142)里已经从各个方面完整讲过了,所以应当按照那里所讲的方式来展开解释。巴利
Imāya gāthāya ca vasena bhagavāti padassa attho veditabbo. So panāyaṃ attho sabbākārena visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.142) vutto, tasmā tattha vuttanayeneva vivaritabbo.
另外,“世尊”也可以从“分”或“舍弃分”来解释。如来对布施、持戒等波罗蜜的修行,以及对禅那、解脱等超越凡人的法,曾经追求、亲近、反复修习,所以称为世尊。或者,他曾经对这些法生起愿望,想着“怎样才能让这些法在应当受教化的有情心中生起呢”,所以称为世尊。又或者,他舍弃了称为“分”的权势与名声,像吐掉一口唾沫一样毫无留恋地抛弃,所以称为世尊。因为如来把已经到手的四洲统治权——那如同转轮王的荣耀、堪比天界之主——以及依靠转轮王成就、由七宝照耀的名声,连一根草都不看重,毫无留恋地舍弃,然后出家,证得正等正觉。因此,他对这些吉祥等诸“分”已经舍弃,所以称为世尊。另一种解释:星宿叫做“分”,因为它们与星宿一同运行、转动,所以称为“分”。须弥山、持双山、北俱卢洲、雪山等不同器世间的庄严所依,因为能安住一劫之久,这些“分”他也舍弃了;因为他超越了居住其中的有情,通过断除与那些境界相连的欲贪而舍弃。这样,也是因为“舍弃诸分”而称为世尊。应当依照这样的理路来理解“世尊”这个词的含义。巴利
Apica bhāge vani, bhage vā vamīti bhagavā. Tathāgato hi dānasīlādipāramidhamme jhānavimokkhādiuttarimanussadhamme vani bhaji sevi bahulamakāsi, tasmā bhagavā. Atha vā teyeva ‘‘veneyyasattasantānesu kathaṃ nu kho uppajjeyyu’’nti vani abhipatthayīti bhagavā. Atha vā bhagasaṅkhātaṃ issariyaṃ yasañca vami uggiri kheḷapiṇḍaṃ viya anapekkho chaḍḍayīti bhagavā. Tathā hi tathāgato hatthagataṃ cakkavattisiriṃ devalokādhipaccasadisaṃ cātuddīpissariyaṃ, cakkavattisampattisannissayañca sattaratanasamujjalaṃ yasaṃ tiṇāyapi amaññamāno nirapekkho pahāya abhinikkhamitvā sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho, tasmā ime siriādike bhage vamīti bhagavā. Atha vā bhāni nāma nakkhattāni, tehi samaṃ gacchanti pavattantīti bhagā. Sineruyugandharauttarakuruhimavantādibhājanalokavisesasannissayasobhā kappaṭṭhitibhāvato, tepi bhage vami, tannivāsisattāvāsasamatikkamanato tappaṭibaddhachandarāgappahānena pajahīti. Evampi bhage vamīti bhagavāti evamādinā nayena bhagavāti padassa attho veditabbo.
在这里,用“如是我闻”这句话,是顺着听闻的方式来说法,把世尊的法身呈现在眼前;借此安慰那些因为见不到导师而失落的人,让他们知道:“这不是已经过去的导师的教法,这位就是你们的导师。”正如世尊说过:“阿难,我所宣说、制定的法和律,在我去世后,就是你们的导师。”而“一时世尊”这句话,则显示世尊在那个时刻已不存在,说明色身的般涅槃;借此警醒那些沉迷于寿命的人:“像这样宣说正法、具足十力、身如金刚聚合的世尊尚且般涅槃,对别的生命还能抱什么希望呢?”同时也让他们对正法生起精进。巴利
Ettāvatā cettha evaṃ me sutanti vacanena yathāsutaṃ dhammaṃ savanavasena bhāsanto bhagavato dhammasarīraṃ paccakkhaṃ karoti, tena ‘‘nayidaṃ atikkantasatthukaṃ pāvacanaṃ, ayaṃ vo satthā’’ti satthu adassanena ukkaṇṭhitaṃ janaṃ samassāseti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘yo kho, ānanda, mayā dhammo ca vinayo ca desito paññatto, so vo mamaccayena satthā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.216; mi. pa. 4.1.1). Ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavāti vacanena tasmiṃ samaye bhagavato avijjamānabhāvaṃ dassento rūpakāyaparinibbānaṃ sādheti, tena ‘‘evaṃvidhassa nāma dhammassa desetā dasabaladharo vajirasaṅghātasamānakāyo sopi bhagavā parinibbuto, kenaññena jīvite āsā janetabbā’’ti jīvitamadamattaṃ janaṃ saṃvejeti, saddhamme cassa ussāhaṃ janeti.
说“如是”,是在指出教说的圆满,因为接下来要讲的整部经都以“如是”来标示。“我闻”则指出声闻的圆满和听闻的圆满,因为这说明它是由一位证得无碍解、被世尊在五个方面立为第一的法藏持者亲自听闻的,也说明了“这是我自己亲自听闻的,不是辗转听来的,不是从传承中搬来的”这个意思。“一时”指出时间的圆满,因为这是世尊住在优楼频螺的那段时间,体现了佛陀出世所带来的庄严。确实,佛陀出世就是最殊胜的时间圆满。“世尊”指出说法者的圆满,因为它显示了具足功德、为众生中最上者的尊贵。巴利
Evanti ca bhaṇanto desanāsampattiṃ niddisati, vakkhamānassa sakalasuttassa evanti nidassanato. Me sutanti sāvakasampattiṃ savanasampattiñca niddisati, paṭisambhidāpattena pañcasu ṭhānesu bhagavatā etadagge ṭhapitena dhammabhaṇḍāgārikena sutabhāvadīpanato ‘‘tañca kho mayāva sutaṃ, na anussutikaṃ, na paramparābhata’’nti imassa catthassa dīpanato. Ekaṃ samayanti kālasampattiṃ niddisati bhagavato uruvelāyaṃ viharaṇasamayabhāvena buddhuppādappaṭimaṇḍitabhāvadīpanato. Buddhuppādaparamā hi kālasampadā. Bhagavāti desakasampattiṃ niddisati guṇavisiṭṭhasattuttamagarubhāvadīpanato.
优楼频螺的意思是“大沙堆”,也就是一大堆沙子。另一种说法是,“优楼”指沙子,“频螺”指边界;为了越过边界而把沙子运来,所以叫优楼频螺。这里应当这样理解它的意思。巴利
Uruvelāyanti mahāvelāyaṃ, mahante vālukārāsimhīti attho. Atha vā urūti vālukā vuccati, velāti mariyādā. Velātikkamanahetu ābhatā uru uruvelāti evampettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
过去,在佛陀还没有出世的时候,据说有一万名苦行者在那个地方居住。他们共同立下一条规矩:身业和语业,别人也能看得见,但意业却是看不见的。所以,谁要是生起邪思惟,就让他自己责备自己,然后用钵装满沙子,倒在这个地方,这就是对他的惩罚。从那时起,谁要是生起那样的思惟,就会在那里用钵装沙倒下去。就这样,那里渐渐堆成了一座大沙堆。后来的人把它围起来,建成了塔庙的所在地。针对这件事,注疏里才说:优楼频螺就是大沙堆的意思,也就是一座大沙山,应该这样理解。巴利
Atīte kira anuppanne buddhe dasasahassatāpasā tasmiṃ padese viharantā ‘‘kāyakammavacīkammāni paresampi pākaṭāni honti, manokammaṃ pana apākaṭaṃ. Tasmā yo micchāvitakkaṃ vitakketi, so attanāva attānaṃ codetvā pattapuṭena vālukaṃ āharitvā imasmiṃ ṭhāne ākiratu, idamassa daṇḍakamma’’nti katikavattaṃ katvā tato paṭṭhāya yo tādisaṃ vitakkaṃ vitakketi, so tattha pattapuṭena vālukaṃ āharitvā ākirati. Evaṃ tattha anukkamena mahāvālukārāsi jāto, tato naṃ pacchimā janatā parikkhipitvā cetiyaṭṭhānamakāsi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘uruvelāyanti mahāvelāyaṃ, mahante vālukārāsimhīti attho daṭṭhabbo’’ti.
“住”这个词,笼统地说,是显示他具备威仪路住、天住、梵住、圣住当中的某一种住。但在这里,应当理解为:在行、站、坐、卧这些威仪当中,显示他与称为“坐”的威仪相应,同时也显示他具备圣住。其中,因为一种威仪会阻断另一种威仪,而他用另一种威仪把它断开之后,仍能不间断地维持身体、让身体继续运作,所以这里“住”这个词的意思,应当按威仪路住来理解。另外,因为世尊以天住等方式,为众生带来、献上、引导、生起种种利益,所以也可以从“带来种种利益”这个角度来理解“住”的意思。巴利
Viharatīti avisesena iriyāpathadibbabrahmaariyavihāresu aññataravihārasamaṅgitāparidīpanaṃ. Idha pana ṭhānanisajjāgamanasayanappabhedesu iriyāpathesu āsanasaṅkhātairiyāpathasamāyogaparidīpanaṃ ariyavihārasamaṅgitāparidīpanañcāti veditabbaṃ. Tattha yasmā ekaṃ iriyāpathabādhanaṃ aññena iriyāpathena vicchinditvā aparipatantaṃ attabhāvaṃ harati pavatteti, tasmā viharatīti padassa iriyāpathavihāravasenettha attho veditabbo. Yasmā pana bhagavā dibbavihārādīhi sattānaṃ vividhaṃ hitaṃ harati upaharati upaneti uppādeti, tasmā tesampi vasena vividhaṃ haratīti evamattho veditabbo.
“河”是因为流淌、流动,所以叫河。这条河叫“河”,意思是河流、向下流的水。“尼连禅河”:它的水没有污浊,本来应该说成“无浊水”,但把“拉”音变成了“罗”音,所以说成“尼连禅”,意思是远离了泥、水藻、苔藓等过失的水。有些人说:“本来应该说‘青水’,却说成了‘尼连禅’。”也可以理解为,这就是这条河的名字。为了显示世尊住在哪一段河岸,所以说“菩提树下”。在这里,“菩提”在“菩提是指四种道中的智”这句话里,指的是道智;在“证得菩提,具足殊胜广大智慧”这句话里,指的是一切知智。世尊就是在这里证得了这两种菩提,所以这棵树也获得了“菩提树”这个名字。或者也可以说,世尊以七觉支而觉悟,所以叫菩提;因为觉悟时依靠这棵树,所以这棵树也获得了“菩提树”的名字。“菩提树”的“根”,意思是附近。这个“根”字,在“根,乃至要拔取像甘草根那么一点点”等说法里,指的是根茎、根源;在“贪是不善根”等说法里,指的是不共的因;在“正午时分树影覆盖到哪里、无风时树叶落在哪里,这个范围就叫树下”等说法里,指的是附近。这里取的也是附近的意思,所以应该理解为:在菩提树的根部,也就是在菩提树附近。巴利
Najjāti nadati sandatīti nadī, tassā najjā, nadiyā ninnagāyāti attho. Nerañjarāyāti nelaṃ jalamassāti ‘‘nelañjalāyā’’ti vattabbe lakārassa rakāraṃ katvā ‘‘nerañjarāyā’’ti vuttaṃ, kaddamasevālapaṇakādidosarahitasalilāyāti attho. Keci ‘‘nīlajalāyāti vattabbe nerañjarāyāti vutta’’nti vadanti. Nāmameva vā etaṃ etissā nadiyāti veditabbaṃ. Tassā nadiyā tīre yattha bhagavā vihāsi, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘bodhirukkhamūle’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘bodhi vuccati catūsu maggesu ñāṇa’’nti ettha (cūḷani. khaggavisāṇasuttaniddesa 121) maggañāṇaṃ bodhīti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Pappoti bodhiṃ varabhūrimedhaso’’ti ettha (dī. ni. 3.217) sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. Tadubhayampi bodhiṃ bhagavā ettha pattoti rukkhopi bodhirukkhotveva nāmaṃ labhi. Atha vā satta bojjhaṅge bujjhīti bhagavā bodhi, tena bujjhantena sannissitattā so rukkhopi bodhirukkhoti nāmaṃ labhi, tassa bodhirukkhassa. Mūleti samīpe. Ayañhi mūlasaddo ‘‘mūlāni uddhareyya antamaso usīranāḷamattānipī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.195) mūlamūle dissati. ‘‘Lobho akusalamūla’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.305) asādhāraṇahetumhi. ‘‘Yāvatā majjhanhike kāle chāyā pharati, nivāte paṇṇāni patanti, ettāvatā rukkhamūla’’ntiādīsu samīpe. Idhāpi samīpe adhippeto, tasmā bodhirukkhassa mūle samīpeti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
“最初正觉”的意思是:最初成为正觉之后,也就是一切之中最早的意思。到这里,法藏者安立《自说经》的因缘时,就已经把时间、地点、说法者等差别都清楚地显示出来了。巴利
Paṭhamābhisambuddhoti paṭhamaṃ abhisambuddho hutvā, sabbapaṭhamaṃyevāti attho. Ettāvatā dhammabhaṇḍāgārikena udānadesanāya nidānaṃ ṭhapentena kāladesadesakāpadesā saha visesena pakāsitā honti.
这里有人问:在结集法与律的时候,为什么要说因缘的话呢?难道不是只应该结集世尊亲口说过的言教吗?回答是:这是为了让开示能够长久住世、不被遗忘、令人信受。因为把开示和时间、地点、说法者、事缘等联系起来安立下来,开示就能长久住世、不会忘失、令人信受,就像世间的判决要依据地点、时间、当事人、原因、征相来判定一样。正是因为这个道理,大迦叶尊者问道:“贤友阿难,第一《自说经》是在哪里说的?”等等。而掌持法藏的阿难尊者在回答时,就说了“如是我闻”等话,作为这部《自说经》的因缘。巴利
Etthāha ‘‘kasmā dhammavinayasaṅgahe kayiramāne nidānavacanaṃ vuttaṃ, nanu bhagavatā bhāsitavacanasseva saṅgaho kātabbo’’ti? Vuccate – desanāya ciraṭṭhitiasammosasaddheyyabhāvasampādanatthaṃ. Kāladesadesakavatthuādīhi upanibandhitvā ṭhapitā hi desanā ciraṭṭhitikā hoti asammosā saddheyyā ca desakālakattuhetunimittehi upanibaddho viya vohāravinicchayo. Teneva ca āyasmatā mahākassapena ‘‘paṭhamaṃ, āvuso ānanda, udānaṃ kattha bhāsita’’ntiādinā desādīsu pucchāya katāya vissajjanaṃ karontena dhammabhaṇḍāgārikena ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādinā udānassa nidānaṃ bhāsitanti.
另外,说因缘语也是为了显示导师的成就。如来世尊因无先前撰述、比量、传承与推理而成立为正等觉者。因为正等觉者以智慧在一切处无碍而行,对一切所知法都平等通达,所以不需要依靠先前撰述等。同样,如来因无师拳、法吝、对教法与弟子的贪恋,而成立为漏尽者。因为彻底断尽诸漏的人,在任何地方都不可能有师拳等情形,所以他利益众生的行为极为清净。这样,通过显示他已彻底远离那些能败坏正见与戒行的无明和贪爱,又显示他智慧圆满、断惑圆满,以佛陀与清净之德,前两种无畏因此成立;又因为他在障碍法与出离法上毫无迷惑,后两种无畏也随之成立。于是,世尊具足四种无畏,以及自利利他的实践,都通过因缘语显示出来——因为在各个场合,他都能随顺在场听众的根性意乐,以应时应机自然现起的辩才开示法义。而在这里,则应理解为通过显示体验解脱之乐以及对缘起的作意来配合说明。因此说:巴利
Apica satthu sampattipakāsanatthaṃ nidānavacanaṃ. Tathāgatassa hi bhagavato pubbaracanānumānāgamatakkābhāvato sambuddhattasiddhi. Na hi sammāsambuddhassa pubbaracanādīhi attho atthi sabbattha appaṭihatañāṇacāratāya ekappamāṇattā ñeyyadhammesu. Tathā ācariyamuṭṭhidhammamacchariyasāsanasāvakānurāgābhāvato khīṇāsavattasiddhi. Na hi sabbaso parikkhīṇāsavassa katthacipi ācariyamuṭṭhiādīnaṃ sambhavoti suvisuddhassa parānuggahappavatti. Iti desakadosabhūtānaṃ diṭṭhisīlasampattidūsakānaṃ accantaṃ avijjātaṇhānaṃ abhāvasaṃsūcakehi ñāṇasampadāpahānasampadābhibyañjakehi ca sambuddhavisuddhabhāvehi purimavesārajjadvayasiddhi, tato ca antarāyikaniyyānikadhammesu sammohābhāvasiddhito pacchimavesārajjadvayasiddhīti bhagavato catuvesārajjasamannāgamo attahitaparahitappaṭipatti ca nidānavacanena pakāsitā honti, tattha tattha sampattaparisāya ajjhāsayānurūpaṃ ṭhānuppattikappaṭibhānena dhammadesanādīpanato. Idha pana vimuttisukhappaṭisaṃvedanapaṭiccasamuppādamanasikārapakāsanenāti yojetabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘satthu sampattipakāsanatthaṃ nidānavacana’’nti.
同样地,因缘语是为了阐明教法的成就。因为世尊的一切行为都被智慧和慈悲所摄持,所以不存在无意义的修行,也不存在只为自身利益的修行。因此,正等觉者的一切身业、语业、意业,完全是为了利益他人而运作;当这些行为按其实际生起的方式被宣说时,它们就依现世利益、后世利益和究竟利益,恰如其分地以教诫众生的意义而成为“教法”,而不是文学作品。大师的这种行持,连同时间、地点、说法者和听众等,在各处都通过因缘语被恰当地阐明。但在这里,则应结合正等觉、体证解脱之乐以及对缘起的作意来理解。因此说:“为了阐明教法的成就而说因缘语。”巴利
Tathā sāsanasampattipakāsanatthaṃ nidānavacanaṃ. Ñāṇakaruṇāpariggahitasabbakiriyassa hi bhagavato natthi niratthakā paṭipatti attahitā vā. Tasmā paresaṃyeva atthāya pavattasabbakiriyassa sammāsambuddhassa sakalampi kāyavacīmanokammaṃ yathāpavattaṃ vuccamānaṃ diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthehi yathārahaṃ sattānaṃ anusāsanaṭṭhena sāsanaṃ, na kabbaracanā. Tayidaṃ satthu caritaṃ kāladesadesakaparisāpadesādīhi saddhiṃ tattha tattha nidānavacanena yathārahaṃ pakāsīyati, idha pana abhisambodhivimuttisukhappaṭisaṃvedanapaṭiccasamuppādamanasikārenāti yojetabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘sāsanasampattipakāsanatthaṃ nidānavacana’’nti.
另外,通过说明大师就是衡量标准,来显示教法本身就是衡量标准,这就是因缘语的目的。而这里所说的“大师与教法作为衡量标准”这一层意思,应当依照前面讲过的方式来理解。因为用“世尊”这个词,一方面说明了如来已经断除贪、嗔、痴等一切烦恼垢染和恶行过失,另一方面说明他是一切众生中最尊贵的,同时还说明他具足不共于他人的智慧、慈悲等殊胜功德。这样一来,这个含义就通过各个方面完全显示出来了。以上只是对因缘语用途作一个概要性的说明。巴利
Apica satthuno pamāṇabhāvappakāsanena sāsanassa pamāṇabhāvadassanatthaṃ nidānavacanaṃ. Sā cassa pamāṇabhāvadassanatā heṭṭhā vuttanayānusārena veditabbā. Bhagavāti hi iminā tathāgatassa rāgadosamohādisabbakilesamaladuccaritādidosappahānadīpanena , sabbasattuttamabhāvadīpanena ca anaññasādhāraṇañāṇakaruṇādiguṇavisesayogaparidīpanena, ayamattho sabbathā pakāsito hotīti idamettha nidānavacanappayojanassa mukhamattadassanaṃ.
从“如是我闻”开始,一直到“宣说了这首优陀那”这一句为止,应当理解为这首优陀那的因缘。因为结集者在结集时所说的这段话,正是为了从一开始就说明:世尊是以怎样的身心修行方式而宣说了这首优陀那。巴利
Taṃ panetaṃ ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’nti ārabhitvā yāva ‘‘imaṃ udānaṃ udānesī’’ti padaṃ, tāva imassa udānassa nidānanti veditabbaṃ. Tathā hi taṃ yathā paṭipanno bhagavā imaṃ udānaṃ udānesi, ādito paṭṭhāya tassa kāyikacetasikappaṭipattiyā pakāsanatthaṃ saṅgītikārehi saṅgītikāle bhāsitavacanaṃ.
有人会问:难道“此有故彼有”这类话不正是世尊亲口说的吗?除了大师,还有谁能开示缘起呢?这话没错。不过,世尊在菩提树下,是以审察诸法实相的方式在心里作意缘起的;后来,为了度化那些应当被度化的亲族,他在《缘起狮子吼经》等经中宣说了缘起。结集经典的大长老们,是随顺他宣说时的语句和方式,以他对缘起的作意为事由,才结集了世尊所说的这部《自说经》的因缘。所以应当确定:前面所说的那些话,只是结集者的话。此后的诸经,也是同样的道理。巴利
Nanu ca ‘‘imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hotī’’tiādi bhagavato eva vacanaṃ bhavituṃ arahati, na hi satthāraṃ muñcitvā añño paṭiccasamuppādaṃ desetuṃ samattho hotīti? Saccametaṃ, yathā pana bhagavā bodhirukkhamūle dhammasabhāvapaccavekkhaṇavasena paṭiccasamuppādaṃ manasākāsi, tatheva naṃ bodhaneyyabandhavānaṃ bodhanatthaṃ paṭiccasamuppādasīhanādasuttādīsu desitassa ca vacanānaṃ desitākārassa anukaraṇavasena paṭiccasamuppādassa manasikāraṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā bhagavatā bhāsitassa imassa udānassa dhammasaṅgāhakā mahātherā nidānaṃ saṅgāyiṃsūti yathāvuttavacanaṃ saṅgītikārānameva vacananti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ. Ito paresupi suttantesu eseva nayo.
在这里,应当知道经的安立有四种:自意经、他意经、问缘经、事缘经。就像虽然经典可以分为几百几千种,但按杂染分等立足点来看,都不超出十六种;同样,所有这些经典按自意等经的安立来看,也都不超出这四种。不过在这里,自意经和事缘经虽然可能因为意趣相续和问答相续,而与他意经、问缘经产生交错,但自意经和事缘经彼此之间并没有交错,所以不能完全套用无遗余的安立方式。又或者,因为其余几种安立都含摄在这四种之中,所以就根本安立而言,说为四种经的安立。巴利
Ettha ca attajjhāsayo parajjhāsayo pucchāvasiko aṭṭhuppattikoti cattāro suttanikkhepā veditabbā. Yathā hi anekasataanekasahassabhedānipi suttāni saṃkilesabhāgiyādipaṭṭhānanayena soḷasavidhataṃ nātivattanti, evaṃ tāni sabbānipi attajjhāsayādisuttanikkhepavasena catubbidhabhāvaṃ nātivattanti. Kāmañcettha attajjhāsayassa aṭṭhuppattiyā ca parajjhāsayapucchāvasikehi saddhiṃ saṃsaggabhedo sambhavati ajjhāsayānusandhipucchānusandhisambhavato, attajjhāsayaaṭṭhuppattīnaṃ aññamaññaṃ saṃsaggo natthīti niravaseso paṭṭhānanayo na sambhavati. Tadantogadhattā vā sambhavantānaṃ sesanikkhepānaṃ mūlanikkhepavasena cattāro suttanikkhepāti vuttaṃ.
这里解释一下词义:“安放”就是放置;经的安放叫“经安放”,意思是宣说经典。或者说,被安放的东西就叫“安放”,经本身就是安放,所以叫“经安放”。自己的意趣叫“自意趣”,这个意趣是它的原因,所以叫“自意趣经”;也可以说,它以自身的意趣为因,所以叫“自意趣经”。他意趣也是同样的道理。以提问为依据叫“问缘”,它具备这个条件,所以叫“问缘经”。作为宣说经典所依之事的义理生起,叫“义生起”,义生起本身就是“事缘”,它具备这个条件,所以叫“事缘经”。另一种说法是:经依靠它而被安放,所以它就是“安放”,也就是自意趣等本身。不过,在这个义理解释中:自己的意趣是“自意趣”,他人的意趣是“他意趣”。被提问的叫“问”,也就是应当问的义理。依提问而说出的、接受法的人的话语叫“问缘”,为了配合“安放”这个词,所以用阳性形式说成“问缘经”。同样,义生起本身就是“事缘经”。这里的含义应当这样理解。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – nikkhipanaṃ nikkhepo, suttassa nikkhepo suttanikkhepo, suttadesanāti attho. Nikkhipīyatīti vā nikkhepo, suttaṃ eva nikkhepo suttanikkhepo. Attano ajjhāsayo attajjhāsayo, so assa atthi kāraṇabhūtoti attajjhāsayo, attano ajjhāsayo etassāti vā attajjhāsayo. Parajjhāsayepi eseva nayo. Pucchāya vaso pucchāvaso, so etassa atthīti pucchāvasiko. Suttadesanāya vatthubhūtassa atthassa uppatti atthuppatti, atthuppatti eva aṭṭhuppatti, sā etassa atthīti aṭṭhuppattiko. Atha vā nikkhipīyati suttaṃ etenāti nikkhepo, attajjhāsayādi eva. Etasmiṃ pana atthavikappe attano ajjhāsayo attajjhāsayo. Paresaṃ ajjhāsayo parajjhāsayo. Pucchīyatīti pucchā, pucchitabbo attho. Pucchanavasena pavattaṃ dhammappaṭiggāhakānaṃ vacanaṃ pucchāvasaṃ, tadeva nikkhepasaddāpekkhāya pucchāvasikoti pulliṅgavasena vuttaṃ. Tathā atthuppattiyeva aṭṭhuppattikoti evamettha attho veditabbo.
在这里,因为不观待他人根器成熟等因缘,自意经单独安立为一种经是合理的,因为这类说法只是依自己的意趣而发起,目的是为了安立法性。可是,他意经和问缘经是以他人的意趣和提问作为说法生起的因,当它们生起时,为什么不归入事缘经呢?或者,问缘经和事缘经是随顺他人意趣而说的,为什么不归入他意经呢?不应该这样责难。因为除了由他人发愿、反复询问等分别所决定的情况外,说法生起之因被当作事缘来把握,所以他意经和问缘经另外单独列出。就像《梵网经》《法嗣经》等,以称赞、讥毁、利养等事生起作为说法的缘,这称为事缘;没有他人提问,仅以他人的意趣为缘而说的,是他意经;依提问而说的,是问缘经。这个道理很清楚。巴利
Ettha ca paresaṃ indriyaparipākādikāraṇanirapekkhattā attajjhāsayassa visuṃ suttanikkhepabhāvo yutto kevalaṃ attano ajjhāsayeneva dhammatantiṭhapanatthaṃ pavattitadesanattā, parajjhāsayapucchāvasikānaṃ pana paresaṃ ajjhāsayapucchānaṃ desanāpavattihetubhūtānaṃ uppattiyaṃ pavattitānaṃ kathamaṭṭhuppattiyā anavarodho, pucchāvasikaaṭṭhuppattipubbakānaṃ vā parajjhāsayānurodhena pavattitānaṃ kathaṃ parajjhāsaye anavarodhoti? Na codetabbametaṃ. Paresañhi abhinīhāraparipucchādivinicchayādivinimuttasseva suttantadesanākāraṇuppādassa aṭṭhuppattibhāvena gahitattā parajjhāsayapucchāvasikānaṃ visuṃ gahaṇaṃ. Tathā hi brahmajāladhammadāyādasuttādīnaṃ vaṇṇāvaṇṇaāmisuppādādidesanānimittaṃ aṭṭhuppatti vuccati, paresaṃ pucchāya vinā ajjhāsayameva nimittaṃ katvā desito parajjhāsayo, pucchāvasena desito pucchāvasikoti pākaṭoyamatthoti.
其中,最初三部经——《菩提经》——以及《目支邻陀经》《舍寿行经》《审察经》《戏论想经》,这些优陀那的安立方式属于自意趣。《虎虎经》《婆罗门生经》《婆醯经》,这些优陀那的安立方式属于问缘。《王经》《恭敬经》《沐浴经》《行乞食者经》《工匠经》《牧牛经》《孙陀利迦经》《母经》《破僧经》《井经》《如来出现经》《牟尼行经》《巴咤厘村经》,以及两部《达婆经》,这些优陀那的安立方式属于事缘。《巴利雷耶经》《爱经》《龙萨马拉经》《毗舍佉经》,这些优陀那的安立方式属于自意趣与他意趣。其余五十一部经的安立方式属于他意趣。应当这样了知:这些优陀那依照自意趣等,而有安立方式上的差别。巴利
Tattha paṭhamādīni tīṇi bodhisuttāni mucalindasuttaṃ, āyusaṅkhārossajjanasuttaṃ, paccavekkhaṇasuttaṃ, papañcasaññāsuttanti imesaṃ udānānaṃ attajjhāsayo nikkhepo. Huhuṅkasuttaṃ, brāhmaṇajātikasuttaṃ, bāhiyasuttanti imesaṃ udānānaṃ pucchāvasiko nikkhepo. Rājasuttaṃ, sakkārasuttaṃ, ucchādanasuttaṃ, piṇḍapātikasuttaṃ, sippasuttaṃ, gopālasuttaṃ, sundarikasuttaṃ , mātusuttaṃ, saṅghabhedakasuttaṃ, udapānasuttaṃ, tathāgatuppādasuttaṃ, moneyyasuttaṃ, pāṭaligāmiyasuttaṃ, dvepi dabbasuttānīti etesaṃ udānānaṃ aṭṭhuppattiko nikkhepo. Pālileyyasuttaṃ, piyasuttaṃ, nāgasamālasuttaṃ, visākhāsuttañcāti imesaṃ udānānaṃ attajjhāsayo parajjhāsayo ca nikkhepo. Sesānaṃ ekapaññāsāya suttānaṃ parajjhāsayo nikkhepo. Evametesaṃ udānānaṃ attajjhāsayādivasena nikkhepaviseso veditabbo.
在这里,凡是世尊当面对比丘们说过的优陀那,那些比丘就按照所说的经文,用言语记诵、用心思惟,然后告诉法藏者。至于世尊没有当面对比丘们说过的优陀那,后来世尊也会再对法藏者说一遍。这样一来,具寿阿难把所有这些优陀那汇集在一起并持守,也教导比丘们,后来在第一次结集时,就把它们结集起来,统称为《优陀那》。应当这样理解。巴利
Ettha ca yāni udānāni bhagavatā bhikkhūnaṃ sammukhā bhāsitāni, tāni tehi yathābhāsitasuttāni vacasā paricitāni manasānupekkhitāni dhammabhaṇḍāgārikassa kathitāni. Yāni pana bhagavatā bhikkhūnaṃ asammukhā bhāsitāni, tānipi aparabhāge bhagavatā dhammabhaṇḍāgārikassa puna bhāsitāni. Evaṃ sabbānipi tāni āyasmā ānando ekajjhaṃ katvā dhārento bhikkhūnañca vācento aparabhāge paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikāle udānantveva saṅgahaṃ āropesīti veditabbaṃ.
在“那时”等语句中,“那时”是表示处所的具格;“kho pana”是虚词,意思是“在那个时候”。那是在什么时候呢?就是世尊住在优楼频螺,尼连禅河畔,菩提树下,刚刚证得正觉的时候。就在那时。“七日”就是七天,这是表示完全连续关联的宾格。因为世尊在那七天里,毫无间断地完全安住在果定之乐中,所以依完全连续关联而说宾格“七日”。“以单一跏趺坐”:从毗舍佉月满月那天、太阳还未落山时,坐在无败最胜金刚座上之后,一次也没有起身,就以那一个盘腿坐姿一直坐着。巴利
Tena kho pana samayenātiādīsu tena samayenāti ca bhummatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, kho panāti nipāto, tasmiṃ samayeti attho. Kasmiṃ pana samaye? Yaṃ samayaṃ bhagavā uruvelāyaṃ viharati najjā nerañjarāya tīre bodhirukkhamūle paṭhamābhisambuddho. Tasmiṃ samaye. Sattāhanti satta ahāni sattāhaṃ, accantasaṃyogatthe etaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Yasmā bhagavā taṃ sattāhaṃ nirantaratāya accantameva phalasamāpattisukhena vihāsi, tasmā sattāhanti accantasaṃyogavasena upayogavacanaṃ vuttaṃ. Ekapallaṅkenāti visākhāpuṇṇamāya anatthaṅgateyeva sūriye aparājitapallaṅkavare vajirāsane nisinnakālato paṭṭhāya sakimpi anuṭṭhahitvā yathāābhujitena ekeneva pallaṅkena .
“领受解脱之乐”的意思是:他正坐着领受解脱之乐,也就是果等至之乐。这里,“解脱”有五种:彼分解脱、镇伏解脱、正断解脱、止息解脱、出离解脱。在这五种当中,通过布施应施之物等种种功德支分,以及通过名色分别等种种观慧支分,在尚未退失该支分期间,从种种对立面中脱离出来,那种脱离和舍断——比如:靠布施从悭吝、贪等中脱离;靠持戒从杀生等中脱离;靠确定名色从有身见中脱离;靠把握缘从无因见和不平等因见中脱离;再进一步,靠度疑清净从疑惑不定的状态中脱离;靠观察聚的坏灭从“我、我所”的执取中脱离;靠分辨道与非道从把非道误认为道的想中脱离;靠见到生起从断见中脱离;靠见到衰灭从常见中脱离;靠见到怖畏从对可怖畏之事生起无怖畏想中脱离;靠见过患从乐想中脱离;靠厌离随观从喜乐想中脱离;靠欲解脱智从不想解脱的状态中脱离;靠舍智从不能舍的状态中脱离;靠随顺智从与法住和涅槃相违逆的状态中脱离;靠种姓智从以诸行为相的状态中脱离——这就叫彼分解脱。而通过近行定和安止定之分所摄的定,在其尚未退失期间,令欲欲等诸盖以及寻等对立之法不再生起,这种称为“不生”的脱离,就叫镇伏解脱。由于修习四圣道,在具足该道的圣者相续中,按照“为断诸邪见”等《法集论》(277)、《分别论》(628)所说的方式,属于集谛一分的烦恼聚从此永远不再生起,以正断而断除的脱离,这就叫正断解脱。而在果位刹那,诸烦恼止息,这就叫止息解脱。由于出离一切有为法,涅槃就是脱离一切诸行,这就叫出离解脱。不过这里指的是世尊以涅槃为所缘的果解脱。所以说:“领受解脱之乐”的意思是:他正坐着领受解脱之乐,也就是果等至之乐。巴利
Vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedīti vimuttisukhaṃ phalasamāpattisukhaṃ paṭisaṃvediyamāno nisinno hotīti attho. Tattha vimuttīti tadaṅgavimutti, vikkhambhanavimutti, samucchedavimutti, paṭippassaddhivimutti, nissaraṇavimuttīti pañca vimuttiyo. Tāsu yaṃ deyyadhammapariccāgādīhi tehi tehi guṇaṅgehi nāmarūpaparicchedādīhi vipassanaṅgehi ca yāva tassa tassa aṅgassa aparihānivasena pavatti, tāva taṃtaṃpaṭipakkhato vimuccanato vimuccanaṃ pahānaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ ? Dānena macchariyalobhādito, sīlena pāṇātipātādito, nāmarūpavavatthānena sakkāyadiṭṭhito, paccayapariggahena ahetuvisamahetudiṭṭhīhi, tasseva aparabhāgena kaṅkhāvitaraṇena kathaṃkathībhāvato, kalāpasammasanena ‘‘ahaṃ mamā’’ti gāhato, maggāmaggavavatthānena amagge maggasaññāya, udayadassanena ucchedadiṭṭhiyā, vayadassanena sassatadiṭṭhiyā, bhayadassanena sabhaye abhayasaññāya, ādīnavadassanena assādasaññāya, nibbidānupassanena abhiratisaññāya, muccitukamyatāñāṇena amuccitukamyatāya, upekkhāñāṇena anupekkhāya, anulomena dhammaṭṭhitiyaṃ nibbāne ca paṭilomabhāvato, gotrabhunā saṅkhāranimittabhāvato vimuccanaṃ, ayaṃ tadaṅgavimutti nāma. Yaṃ pana upacārappanābhedena samādhinā yāvassa aparihānivasena pavatti, tāva kāmacchandādīnaṃ nīvaraṇānañceva, vitakkādīnañca paccanīkadhammānaṃ, anuppattisaññitaṃ vimuccanaṃ, ayaṃ vikkhambhanavimutti nāma. Yaṃ catunnaṃ ariyamaggānaṃ bhāvitattā taṃtaṃmaggavato ariyassa santāne yathārahaṃ ‘‘diṭṭhigatānaṃ pahānāyā’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 277; vibha. 628) nayena vuttassa samudayapakkhiyassa kilesagaṇassa puna accantaṃ appavattibhāvena samucchedappahānavasena vimuccanaṃ, ayaṃ samucchedavimutti nāma. Yaṃ pana phalakkhaṇe paṭippassaddhattaṃ kilesānaṃ, ayaṃ paṭippassaddhivimutti nāma. Sabbasaṅkhatanissaṭattā pana sabbasaṅkhāravimuttaṃ nibbānaṃ, ayaṃ nissaraṇavimutti nāma. Idha pana bhagavato nibbānārammaṇā phalavimutti adhippetā. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedīti vimuttisukhaṃ phalasamāpattisukhaṃ paṭisaṃvediyamāno nisinno hotīti attho’’ti.
所谓解脱,是指由于随烦恼止息而心得解脱的状态;或者也可以理解为,心本身就是这样解脱的。由这种解脱所生起的乐,或者与这种解脱相应的乐,就是解脱之乐。根据“尊者,世尊所说的那种存在于寂静乐中的舍”这句话,这里的舍也应当理解为就是乐。正如《迷惑冰消》中所说:“然而舍因为寂静的缘故,就被说成就是乐。”因为世尊入的是第四禅的阿拉汉果等至,而不是别的。又或者,像“他们的止息就是乐”等文句中所说的那样,诸行之苦的止息就称为乐;同样地,由于在究竟果中获得了止息一切烦恼之苦的状态,所以这里的止息解脱本身就应该理解为乐。这种解脱之乐,按道心路过程中和异时生起的果心转起的差别,分为两种。因为每一个圣道的无间之后,就会生起作为其各自异熟的、以涅槃为所缘的两个或三个果心,这是因为出世间善心是无间异熟的缘故。在那速行回合中生起圣道时,如果有两个随顺心,那么第三个是种姓心,第四个是道心,此后就有三个果心;如果有三个随顺心,那么第四个是种姓心,第五个是道心,此后就有两个果心。就这样,以第四或第五个速行心作为安止而转起,不会在其后,因为接近有分心。然而有人说:“第六个心也能安止。”这在义注中被驳斥了。如此,应当知道心路中的果。至于异时的果,则是以果等至的方式转起,以及从灭尽定出定时所生起的,也由此包含在内。而这个果等至,从意义上应当视为出世间善心的异熟、以涅槃为所缘的安止。巴利
Vimuttīti ca upakkilesehi paṭippassaddhivasena cittassa vimuttabhāvo, cittameva vā tathā vimuttaṃ veditabbaṃ, tāya vimuttiyā jātaṃ sampayuttaṃ vā sukhaṃ vimuttisukhaṃ. ‘‘Yāyaṃ, bhante, upekkhā sante sukhe vuttā bhagavatā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.88) vacanato upekkhāpi cettha sukhamicceva veditabbā. Tathā ca vuttaṃ sammohavinodaniyaṃ ‘‘upekkhā pana santattā, sukhamicceva bhāsitā’’ti (vibha. aṭṭha. 232). Bhagavā hi catutthajjhānikaṃ arahattasamāpattiṃ samāpajjati, na itaraṃ. Atha vā ‘‘tesaṃ vūpasamo sukho’’tiādīsu yathā saṅkhāradukkhūpasamo sukhoti vuccati, evaṃ sakalakilesadukkhūpasamabhāvato aggaphale labbhamānā paṭippassaddhivimutti eva idha sukhanti veditabbā. Tayidaṃ vimuttisukhaṃ maggavīthiyaṃ kālantareti phalacittassa pavattivibhāgena duvidhaṃ hoti. Ekekassa hi ariyamaggassa anantarā tassa tasseva vipākabhūtāni nibbānārammaṇāni tīṇi dve vā phalacittāni uppajjanti anantaravipākattā lokuttarakusalānaṃ. Yasmiñhi javanavāre ariyamaggo uppajjati, tattha yadā dve anulomāni, tadā tatiyaṃ gotrabhu, catutthaṃ maggacittaṃ, tato paraṃ tīṇi phalacittāni honti. Yadā pana tīṇi anulomāni, tadā catutthaṃ gotrabhu, pañcamaṃ maggacittaṃ, tato paraṃ dve phalacittāni honti. Evaṃ catutthaṃ pañcamaṃ appanāvasena pavattati, na tato paraṃ bhavaṅgassa āsannattā. Keci pana ‘‘chaṭṭhampi cittaṃ appetī’’ti vadanti, taṃ aṭṭhakathāsu (visuddhi. 2.811) paṭikkhittaṃ. Evaṃ maggavīthiyaṃ phalaṃ veditabbaṃ. Kālantare phalaṃ pana phalasamāpattivasena pavattaṃ, nirodhā vuṭṭhahantassa uppajjamānañca eteneva saṅgahitaṃ. Sā panāyaṃ phalasamāpatti atthato lokuttarakusalānaṃ vipākabhūtā nibbānārammaṇā appanāti daṭṭhabbā.
哪些人入这些果等至,哪些人不入呢?一切凡夫都不入,因为他们还没有证得。同样,下位的圣者不入上位的果等至,上位的圣者也不入下位的果等至,因为他们已经转入了另一种人的状态,前一种状态已经止息。那些圣者只入各自对应的果等至。不过有些人说:“入流者和一来者不入果等至,只有上面那两种圣者才入,因为他们在定方面修得圆满。”这种说法没有道理,因为凡夫也能入自己已经获得的世间定。再说,何必在这里推究理由呢?在《无碍解道》中,回答“哪十种行舍观依观而生起”“哪十种种姓法依观而生起”这些问题时,也说了“为入流果等至、为一来果等至”等等,这就说明那些圣者也是入果等至的。所以,在这里应当得出结论:一切圣者都入各自相应的果等至。巴利
Ke taṃ samāpajjanti, ke na samāpajjantīti? Sabbepi puthujjanā na samāpajjanti anadhigatattā. Tathā heṭṭhimā ariyā uparimaṃ, uparimāpi ariyā heṭṭhimaṃ na samāpajjantiyeva puggalantarabhāvūpagamanena paṭippassaddhabhāvato. Attano eva phalaṃ te te ariyā samāpajjanti. Keci pana ‘‘sotāpannasakadāgāmino phalasamāpattiṃ na samāpajjanti, uparimā dveyeva samāpajjanti samādhismiṃ paripūrakāribhāvato’’ti vadanti. Taṃ akāraṇaṃ puthujjanassāpi attanā paṭiladdhalokiyasamādhisamāpajjanato. Kiṃ vā ettha kāraṇacintāya? Vuttañhetaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ ‘‘katamā dasa saṅkhārupekkhā vipassanāvasena uppajjanti (paṭi. ma. 1.57), katame dasa gotrabhudhammā vipassanāvasena uppajjantī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.60) imesaṃ pañhānaṃ vissajjane sotāpattiphalasamāpattatthāya sakadāgāmiphalasamāpattatthāyāti tesampi ariyānaṃ phalasamāpattisamāpajjanaṃ vuttaṃ. Tasmā sabbepi ariyā yathāsakaṃ phalaṃ samāpajjantīti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ.
那么,他们为什么入这些等至呢?是为了现法安乐住。就像国王享受王权之乐、天神享受天界之乐一样,圣者们想着“我们要享受出世间之乐”,于是定好一段时间,在想要入的那个刹那就入果等至。巴利
Kasmā pana te samāpajjantīti? Diṭṭhadhammasukhavihāratthaṃ. Yathā hi rājāno rajjasukhaṃ, devatā dibbasukhaṃ anubhavanti, evaṃ ariyā ‘‘lokuttarasukhaṃ anubhavissāmā’’ti addhānaparicchedaṃ katvā icchitakkhaṇe phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjanti.
那么,它的入定是怎样的?住定是怎样的?出定是怎样的?首先,它的入定通过两种方式发生:不作意涅槃以外的任何所缘,以及作意涅槃。正如所说的:巴利
Kathañcassā samāpajjanaṃ, kathaṃ ṭhānaṃ, kathaṃ vuṭṭhānanti? Dvīhi tāva ākārehi assā samāpajjanaṃ hoti nibbānato aññassa ārammaṇassa amanasikārā, nibbānassa ca manasikārā. Yathāha –
贤友,对于无相心解脱的等至来说,确实有两种缘:不作意一切相,以及作意无相界。巴利
‘‘Dve kho, āvuso, paccayā animittāya cetovimuttiyā samāpattiyā, sabbanimittānañca amanasikāro, animittāya ca dhātuyā manasikāro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.458).
在这里,入果定(果等至)的次第是这样的:想要入果定的圣弟子,应当独自待在僻静处,从观察诸行的生灭等方面来修观。当他这样按顺序逐步修观时,紧接在以诸行为所缘的种姓智之后,心就依果定而安住于灭。因为心倾向于果定,所以即使是有学圣者,这时生起的也只是果,而不是道。至于有人说“入流者为了入自己的果定而增长观慧,就会变成一来者;一来者就会变成不来者”,对这种人应当说:照这样说,不来者就会变成应供,应供就会变成独觉佛,独觉佛就会变成正等觉者了。因此,观是随各人的信解和意愿而达成目的的,所以有学圣者生起的也只是果,而不是道。而且,如果他是依初禅的道证得的,生起的就只是初禅的果;如果他是依第二禅等当中某一种禅那的道证得的,生起的就只是相应于第二禅等当中那一种禅那的果。巴利
Ayaṃ panettha samāpajjanakkamo – phalasamāpattitthikena ariyasāvakena rahogatena paṭisallīnena udayabbayādivasena saṅkhārā vipassitabbā. Tassevaṃ pavattānupubbavipassanasseva saṅkhārārammaṇagotrabhuñāṇānantaraṃ phalasamāpattivasena nirodhe cittamappeti, phalasamāpattininnabhāvena ca sekkhassāpi phalameva uppajjati, na maggo. Ye pana vadanti ‘‘sotāpanno attano phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjissāmīti vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā sakadāgāmī hoti, sakadāgāmī ca anāgāmī’’ti. Te vattabbā – evaṃ sante anāgāmī arahā bhavissati, arahā ca paccekabuddho, paccekabuddho ca sambuddhoti āpajjeyya, tasmā yathābhinivesaṃ yathājjhāsayaṃ vipassanā atthaṃ sādhetīti sekkhassāpi phalameva uppajjati, na maggo. Phalampi tassa sace anena paṭhamajjhāniko maggo adhigato, paṭhamajjhānikameva uppajjati. Sace dutiyādīsu aññatarajjhāniko, dutiyādīsu aññatarajjhānikamevāti.
为什么在这里,种姓智不像道智的前行智那样以涅槃为所缘呢?因为果智不能导向出离。只有圣道之法才能导向出离。经中确实这样说:“哪些法能导向出离?四种无漏的圣道。”因此,道智是绝对能导向出离的,它以从两边出起的方式生起;作为它的无间缘,那个智必须已经从诸行相中出起,所以它以前行智的身份以涅槃为所缘是合理的。然而,果智是修习圣道的异熟果报,它们不能断除烦恼,不能导向出离,本质上没有出起。所以,果智的前行智在任何时候都不可能以涅槃为所缘——因为在两种情况下,随顺智的形态并不相同。在圣道心路中,随顺智以世间智的力量,极其锐利地突破那些从未被突破过的粗重贪蕴等,达到世间智的顶点,顺应道智而生起;但在果等至的心路中,由于那些烦恼早已被各自相应的道断除,随顺智在那里已无事可做,纯粹只是作为圣者们成就果等至之乐的准备工作而生起。因此,它根本不可能有任何出起。也正因为如此,在它之后的智,由于从诸行相中出起,才能够以涅槃为所缘。这样成立之后,那些为了自己受用果等至、而依生灭等方式随观诸行的有学圣者,在观智的次第之后,只生起果,不生起道——这个道理也就说得通了。以上就是关于入果等至的说明。巴利
Kasmā panettha gotrabhuñāṇaṃ maggañāṇapurecārikaṃ viya nibbānārammaṇaṃ na hotīti? Phalañāṇānaṃ aniyyānikabhāvato. Ariyamaggadhammāyeva hi niyyānikā. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘katame dhammā niyyānikā? Cattāro ariyamaggā apariyāpannā’’ti (dha. sa. 1295). Tasmā ekanteneva niyyānikabhāvassa ubhato vuṭṭhānabhāvena pavattamānassa anantarapaccayabhūtena ñāṇena nimittato vuṭṭhiteneva bhavitabbanti tassa nibbānārammaṇatā yuttā, na pana ariyamaggassa bhāvitattā tassa vipākabhāvena pavattamānānaṃ kilesānaṃ asamucchindanato aniyyānikattā avuṭṭhānasabhāvānaṃ phalañāṇānaṃ purecārikañāṇassa kadācipi nibbānārammaṇatā ubhayattha anulomañāṇānaṃ atulyākārato. Ariyamaggavīthiyañhi anulomañāṇāni anibbiddhapubbānaṃ thūlathūlānaṃ lobhakkhandhādīnaṃ sātisayaṃ padālanena lokiyañāṇena ukkaṃsapāramippattāni maggañāṇānukūlāni uppajjanti, phalasamāpattivīthiyaṃ pana tāni tāni tena tena maggena tesaṃ tesaṃ kilesānaṃ samucchinnattā tattha nirussukkāni kevalaṃ ariyānaṃ phalasamāpattisukhasamaṅgibhāvassa parikammamattāni hutvā uppajjantīti na tesaṃ kutoci vuṭṭhānasambhavo, yato tesaṃ pariyosāne ñāṇaṃ saṅkhāranimittaṃ vuṭṭhānato nibbānārammaṇaṃ siyā. Evañca katvā sekkhassa attano phalasamāpattivaḷañjanatthāya udayabbayādivasena saṅkhāre sammasantassa vipassanāñāṇānupubbāya phalameva uppajjati, na maggoti ayañca attho samatthito hoti. Evaṃ tāva phalasamāpattiyā samāpajjanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
贤友,无相心解脱要能安住,有三种缘:不作意一切相,作意无相界,以及事先的预备行。巴利
‘‘Tayo kho, āvuso, paccayā animittāya cetovimuttiyā ṭhitiyā, sabbanimittānaṃ amanasikāro, animittāya ca dhātuyā manasikāro, pubbe ca abhisaṅkhāro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.458) –
从这句话的表述来看,它有三种情况。其中,“事先的造作”是指在入定之前就限定好了时间。因为他已经限定“我要在某个时候出定”,所以只要那个时间还没到,就不会出定。巴利
Vacanato panassā tīhākārehi ṭhānaṃ hoti. Tattha pubbe ca abhisaṅkhāroti samāpattito pubbe kālaparicchedo. ‘‘Asukasmiṃ nāma kāle vuṭṭhahissāmī’’ti paricchinnattā hissā yāva so kālo nāgacchati, tāva vuṭṭhānaṃ na hoti.
贤友,从无相心解脱出定确实有两个缘:作意一切相,以及不作意无相界。巴利
‘‘Dve kho, āvuso, paccayā animittāya cetovimuttiyā vuṭṭhānassa, sabbanimittānañca manasikāro, animittāya ca dhātuyā amanasikāro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.458) –
从言说来看,它的出定有两种方式。其中,“一切相”是指色相、受相、想相、行相、识相。虽然并不是一下子作意所有这些相,但这是从总括一切的角度才这样说。因此,通过作意那作为有分所缘的境,就从果等至出定。应当这样理解它的出定。而这里所说的入定与出定,就是属于阿拉汉果的。巴利
Vacanato panassā dvīhākārehi vuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Tattha sabbanimittānanti rūpanimittavedanāsaññāsaṅkhāraviññāṇanimittānaṃ. Kāmañca na sabbānevetāni ekato manasi karoti, sabbasaṅgāhikavasena panevaṃ vuttaṃ. Tasmā yaṃ bhavaṅgassa ārammaṇaṃ, tassa manasikaraṇena phalasamāpattito vuṭṭhānaṃ hotīti evaṃ assā vuṭṭhānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tayidaṃ evamidha samāpajjanavuṭṭhānaṃ arahattaphalabhūtaṃ –
躁动不安已经平息,以不死为所缘,美好庄严。
已经舍弃了世间欲乐,是寂静的,这是最殊胜的沙门果。巴利
‘‘Paṭippassaddhadarathaṃ, amatārammaṇaṃ subhaṃ; Vantalokāmisaṃ santaṃ, sāmaññaphalamuttamaṃ’’.
像这样说了之后,他感受了解脱之乐与殊胜之乐。因此说:“感受解脱之乐,意思是:他正坐着感受解脱之乐,即果等至之乐。”巴利
Iti vuttaṃ sātātisātaṃ vimuttisukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedesi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedīti vimuttisukhaṃ phalasamāpattisukhaṃ paṭisaṃvediyamāno nisinno hotīti attho’’ti.
那时这个“atha”是表示话题转换的虚词。“kho”是用来补足句子的。在这两者当中,以话题转换的意义来说,“atha”这个词表示:从感受解脱之乐之外,指出了另一个话题。那又是什么呢?就是作意缘起。或者,“atha”是表示“之后”这个意思的虚词,用它来点明接下来要说的“那七天过去之后”这个意思。“那七天”是指结跏趺坐的七天。“过去之后”就是离去之后。从那个定——也就是阿拉汉果定——中出来。不过,有些人在这里立足之后,认为应该依次说明七个七天,就对此作了详细展开。但我们后面会以与《犍度》的经文以及这部《优陀那》圣典不相冲突的方式来说明。“夜晚”一词是属格,表示部分与整体的关系。“第一”一词是宾格,表示与整个时段完全结合的意义。因为世尊在那一整夜里,整个初夜分都专注于同样的作意。巴利
Athāti adhikāratthe nipāto. Khoti padapūraṇe. Tesu adhikāratthena athāti iminā vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedanato aññaṃ adhikāraṃ dasseti. Ko panesoti? Paṭiccasamuppādamanasikāro. Athāti vā pacchāti etasmiṃ atthe nipāto, tena ‘‘tassa sattāhassa accayenā’’ti vakkhamānameva atthaṃ joteti. Tassa sattāhassāti pallaṅkasattāhassa. Accayenāti apagamena. Tamhā samādhimhāti arahattaphalasamādhito. Idha pana ṭhatvā paṭipāṭiyā satta sattāhāni dassetabbānīti keci tāni vitthārayiṃsu. Mayaṃ pana tāni khandhakapāṭhena imissā udānapāḷiyā avirodhadassanamukhena parato vaṇṇayissāma. Rattiyāti avayavasambandhe sāmivacanaṃ. Paṭhamanti accantasaṃyogatthe upayogavacanaṃ. Bhagavā hi tassā rattiyā sakalampi paṭhamaṃ yāmaṃ teneva manasikārena yutto ahosīti.
所谓“缘起”,就是指作为缘的法。因为无明等这些作为缘的法,就是缘起。那怎么知道这一点呢?通过世尊的话来知道。世尊确实说过:“因此,阿难,这正是老死的因、根源、生起、缘,也就是生……乃至……行的缘,也就是无明。”(《长部》2.105等)像这样,无明等被说为因。也就是说,有十二种缘,就有十二种缘起。巴利
Paṭiccasamuppādanti paccayadhammaṃ. Avijjādayo hi paccayadhammā paṭiccasamuppādo. Kathamidaṃ jānitabbanti ce? Bhagavato vacanena. Bhagavatā hi ‘‘tasmātihānanda, eseva hetu, etaṃ nidānaṃ, esa samudayo, esa paccayo jarāmaraṇassa, yadidaṃ jāti…pe… saṅkhārānaṃ, yadidaṃ avijjā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.105 ādayo) evaṃ avijjādayo hetūti vuttā. Yathā dvādasa paccayā dvādasa paṭiccasamuppādāti.
这里,它的词义是这样:互相依靠、彼此相对,不否定诸因缘的聚合,而使共同生起,所以叫缘起。或者也可以说,依靠应当被了知的、值得成为缘的缘,到达那个缘而不离开它,与它相关联地生起,就是缘起。这里说的缘起,应当理解为以“生起”为基脚的词语所应了知的、能生起果的因,是与生起果的能力相应的因,而不是仅仅指“依缘而生起”这件事本身。又或者,智者应当去了知它,所以叫“所应了知”(paṭicco);它自己正确地生起,所以叫“生起”(samuppādo);既是所应了知的,又是生起,所以叫缘起。这里应当这样理解它的含义。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – aññamaññaṃ paṭicca paṭimukhaṃ katvā kāraṇasamavāyaṃ appaṭikkhipitvā sahite uppādetīti paṭiccasamuppādo. Atha vā paṭicca paccetabbaṃ paccayārahataṃ paccayaṃ paṭigantvā na vinā tena sambandhassa uppādo paṭiccasamuppādo . Paṭiccasamuppādoti cettha samuppādapadaṭṭhānavacanaviññeyyo phalassa uppādanasamatthatāyutto hetu, na paṭiccasamuppattimattaṃ veditabbaṃ. Atha vā paccetuṃ arahanti naṃ paṇḍitāti paṭicco, sammā sayameva vā uppādetīti samuppādo, paṭicco ca so samuppādo cāti paṭiccasamuppādoti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
“随顺”是指按“无明缘行”这样的方式所说的无明等缘起支,因为它能完成自身应做的功能,所以叫随顺。或者,从开头一直说到结尾,是依流转的次第而说,因此是顺的,这就是随顺。他好好地在心中作意,意思是恭敬地作意。对于每一个缘法,它如何以因缘等缘的方式,成为每一个缘所生法的缘,他把这一切都以观照的方式,毫无颠倒、毫无遗漏、毫无剩余地放在心里。这就是这段话的意思。为了简要说明世尊怎样在心中随顺缘起,经中接着说:“此有故彼有,此生故彼生。”巴利
Anulomanti ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādinā nayena vutto avijjādiko paccayākāro attanā kattabbakiccakaraṇato anulomoti vuccati. Atha vā ādito paṭṭhāya antaṃ pāpetvā vuttattā pavattiyā vā anulomato anulomo, taṃ anulomaṃ. Sādhukaṃ manasākāsīti sakkaccaṃ manasi akāsi. Yo yo paccayadhammo yassa yassa paccayuppannadhammassa yathā yathā hetupaccayādinā paccayabhāvena paccayo hoti, taṃ sabbaṃ aviparītaṃ aparihāpetvā anavasesato paccavekkhaṇavasena citte akāsīti attho. Yathā pana bhagavā paṭiccasamuppādānulomaṃ manasākāsi, taṃ saṅkhepena tāva dassetuṃ ‘‘iti imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hoti, imassuppādā idaṃ uppajjatī’’ti vuttaṃ.
在这里,“如此”就是“这样”,意思是“以这种方式”。“此有故彼有”,是说当无明等这些条件存在时,行等这些结果就存在。“此生起故彼生起”,是说当无明等这些条件的生起发生时,行等这些结果的生起就发生。“此无故彼无,此灭故彼灭”,则是通过第二经和第三经的说法,说明当无明等不存在时,行等也不存在;当无明等灭尽时,行等也灭尽。这样就显示了这种缘的特相中的确定性:只有此存在时,彼才存在,不是此不存在时彼也存在;只有此生起时,彼才生起,不是此不生起时彼也生起;只有此未灭时,彼才未灭,不是此已灭时彼仍存在。因此应当知道,这里所说的缘起,其特相本身就内含这种确定性。这里所说的“灭”,是指通过证得对无明等的离贪,使它们在将来不再生起、不再运作。正如经中所说:“由无明完全离贪而灭尽,故有行灭”等等。而“以生起之灭的方式所说的灭”,则是说“此灭故彼灭”。巴利
Tattha itīti evaṃ, anena pakārenāti attho. Imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hotīti imasmiṃ avijjādike paccaye sati idaṃ saṅkhārādikaṃ phalaṃ hoti. Imassuppādā idaṃ uppajjatīti imassa avijjādikassa paccayassa uppādā idaṃ saṅkhārādikaṃ phalaṃ uppajjatīti attho. Imasmiṃ asati idaṃ na hoti, imassa nirodhā idaṃ nirujjhatīti avijjādīnaṃ abhāve saṅkhārādīnaṃ abhāvassa avijjādīnaṃ nirodhe saṅkhārādīnaṃ nirodhassa ca dutiyatatiyasuttavacanena etasmiṃ paccayalakkhaṇe niyamo dassito hoti – imasmiṃ sati eva, nāsati. Imassuppādā eva, nānuppādā. Anirodhā eva, na nirodhāti. Tenetaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ antogadhaniyamaṃ idha paṭiccasamuppādassa vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nirodhoti ca avijjādīnaṃ virāgādhigamena āyatiṃ anuppādo appavatti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ – ‘‘avijjāya tveva asesavirāganirodhā saṅkhāranirodho’’tiādi. Nirodhanirodhī ca uppādanirodhībhāvena vutto ‘‘imassa nirodhā idaṃ nirujjhatī’’ti.
他由此说明:所谓“无灭”,就是“生起”,在这里也被称为“存在”。因为“此有故彼有”这一特相,当另一方以另一种方式说“此生起故彼生起”时,前者就被后者加以限定。因此,“此有”并不是仅就持续存在的状态而说,而是指通过道而未被灭的状态,由此可以了知。又因为当解说“此无故彼无,此灭故彼灭”这两种所举出的特相时,说者只以“由无明的完全离贪灭尽,故有行灭”等方式说了灭,所以“不存在”也就是灭,由此显示出与不存在相违的存在就是无灭。他以那称为无灭的存在来限定生起。因此,这里所要表达的意思并不是单纯的存在就是生起,而是那称为无灭的存在,这个道理由此得以阐明。应当知道,这样宣说两种特相,是以互相限定和被限定的关系而具有意义的。巴利
Tenetaṃ dasseti – anirodho uppādo nāma, so cettha atthibhāvotipi vuccatīti. ‘‘Imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hotī’’ti idameva hi lakkhaṇaṃ pariyāyantarena ‘‘imassa uppādā idaṃ uppajjatī’’ti vadantena parena purimaṃ visesitaṃ hoti. Tasmā na dharamānataṃyeva sandhāya ‘‘imasmiṃ satī’’ti vuttaṃ, atha kho maggena aniruddhabhāvañcāti viññāyati. Yasmā ca ‘‘imasmiṃ asati idaṃ na hoti, imassa nirodhā idaṃ nirujjhatī’’ti dvidhāpi uddiṭṭhassa lakkhaṇassa niddesaṃ vadantena ‘‘avijjāya tveva asesavirāganirodhā saṅkhāranirodho’’tiādinā nirodho eva vutto, tasmā natthibhāvopi nirodho evāti natthibhāvaviruddho atthibhāvo anirodhoti dassitaṃ hoti. Tena anirodhasaṅkhātena atthibhāvena uppādaṃ viseseti. Tato na idha atthibhāvamattaṃ uppādoti attho adhippeto, atha kho anirodhasaṅkhāto atthibhāvo cāti ayamattho vibhāvitoti. Evametaṃ lakkhaṇadvayavacanaṃ aññamaññavisesanavisesitabbabhāvena sātthakanti veditabbaṃ.
那么,这个被称为“无灭”的、又被说成“存在”“生起”的,到底是什么呢?它就是:还没有被断除的状态,以及因为还没有断除“未生果的适性”而具备生果能力的状态。也就是说,那些应当被断除的不善法,还没有被圣道彻底根除;而那些不应被断除的善法和无记法,在还没有灭尽烦恼漏的人那里,就是那些结还没有被灭尽。正因为随眠还没有被铲除,有结缚的诸蕴才会继续生起,这就是缘起。正如这样所说的:巴利
Ko panāyaṃ anirodho nāma, yo ‘‘atthibhāvo, uppādo’’ti ca vuccatīti? Appahīnabhāvo ca, anibbattitaphalārahatāpahānehi phalānuppādanārahatā ca. Ye hi pahātabbā akusalā dhammā, tesaṃ ariyamaggena asamugghāṭitabhāvo ca. Ye pana na pahātabbā kusalābyākatā dhammā, yāni tesu saṃyojanāni akhīṇāsavānaṃ tesaṃ aparikkhīṇatā ca. Asamugghāṭitānusayatāya hi sasaṃyojanā khandhappavatti paṭiccasamuppādo. Tathā ca vuttaṃ –
比丘们,愚人被无明遮住,又和渴爱绑在一起,这个身体才这样形成。那个愚人的无明没有断掉,他的渴爱也没有灭尽。这是什么原因呢?比丘们,愚人没有为了彻底灭苦而好好修梵行,所以愚人在身体毁坏之后,还会投生到新的身体;一旦投生到新的身体,他就解脱不了生和老死。巴利
‘‘Yāya ca, bhikkhave, avijjāya nivutassa bālassa yāya ca taṇhāya sampayuttassa ayaṃ kāyo samudāgato, sā ceva avijjā bālassa appahīnā, sā ca taṇhā aparikkhīṇā. Taṃ kissa hetu? Na, bhikkhave, bālo acari brahmacariyaṃ sammā dukkhakkhayāya, tasmā bālo kāyassa bhedā kāyūpago hoti, so kāyūpago samāno na parimuccati jātiyā jarāmaraṇenā’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 2.19).
然而,对于已断尽结缚的人,因为无明不存在的缘故,诸行也就不存在;因为渴爱和取不存在的缘故,取有也不可能生起,因此轮回的断绝就会显现出来。所以他说:巴利
Khīṇasaṃyojanānaṃ pana avijjāya abhāvato saṅkhārānaṃ, taṇhupādānānaṃ abhāvato upādānabhavānaṃ asambhavoti vaṭṭassa upacchedo paññāyissatīti. Tenevāha –
颇求那,当六种触处完全离贪、彻底灭尽时,触就灭尽;触灭尽时,受就灭尽。巴利
‘‘Channaṃ tveva, phagguṇa, phassāyatanānaṃ asesavirāganirodhā phassanirodho, phassanirodhā vedanānirodho’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 2.12).
从证得最上道之后,直到般涅槃,六处等并不是完全不生起。不过,因为“不存在”而成为可被称为“灭”的,因为结缚已尽而成为可被称为“灭”的。再者,即使是很久以前所造的业,由于还没有生出果、由于还没有断除它的食,它仍然是堪能生果的,但它并不是已生果,也不是已断食。对于能生果的诸缘——无明、行等,应当按前面所说的方式理解:它们堪能生果的状态就是“不灭”。正是以这种不灭的状态,如果没有它,果就不可能生起;那个因即使已经过去,也用“此有”这句话表达出来。也正因如此,对于还没有住于梵行的人来说,那种还没有达到不转起法性的缘生,不涉及时间的差别,仅就它不退转这一点,就说为“由此生起”。或者,在其他缘都齐备时,即使因并不现行,也像现行一样;更何况因现行时,那种朝向生果的状态,就说为“由此生起”。因为正是从那种状态生起果,处于那种状态的因以能生果的样态现起,就被称为“生起”;即使因存在,如果不在那种状态,也不称为生起,所以那种朝向生果的状态才称为“生起”。巴利
Na hi aggamaggādhigamato uddhaṃ yāva parinibbānā saḷāyatanādīnaṃ appavatti. Atha kho natthitā nirodhasaddavacanīyatā khīṇasaṃyojanatāti nirodho vutto. Apica cirakatampi kammaṃ anibbattitaphalatāya appahīnāhāratāya ca phalārahaṃ santaṃ eva nāma hoti, na nibbattitaphalaṃ , nāpi pahīnāhāranti. Phaluppattipaccayānaṃ avijjāsaṅkhārādīnaṃ vuttanayeneva phalārahabhāvo anirodhoti veditabbo. Evaṃ aniruddhabhāveneva hi yena vinā phalaṃ na sambhavati, taṃ kāraṇaṃ atītantipi imasmiṃ satīti iminā vacanena vuttaṃ. Tatoyeva ca avusitabrahmacariyassa appavattidhammataṃ anāpanno paccayuppādo kālabhedaṃ anāmasitvā anivattanāya eva imassa uppādāti vutto. Atha vā avasesapaccayasamavāye avijjamānassapi vijjamānassa viya pageva vijjamānassa yā phaluppattiabhimukhatā, sā imassa uppādāti vuttā. Tathā hi tato phalaṃ uppajjatīti tadavatthaṃ kāraṇaṃ phalassa uppādanabhāvena uṭṭhitaṃ uppatitaṃ nāma hoti, na vijjamānampi atadavatthanti tadavatthatā uppādoti veditabbo.
在这里,用“有”这个词,只是就它存在这一点来说它是缘,从而显示缘起没有造作的作用。用“生起”这个词,说明生起的法性、不是一切时候都存在,以及面向果的生起,从而显示缘起的无常。而“有、非无,从生起、非从灭”这些说法,通过处格和从格表达因义,说明缘起具有因、集、生、源的性质。这里处格表达因义,应当理解为:当某法存在时,与它不相离的果就存在,这种转起可以从“穷人的财物不被布施时,贫穷就增长广大”以及“谷物成熟时,食物丰足就产生”这些例子来理解。从格也表达因义,因为果从根源生起,也从本性生起,比如“从羯罗蓝成为阿浮陀,从阿浮陀产生闭尸”,以及“从雪山流出恒河,从狮子口产生湖泊”。当无明等存在时,由于不相离的关系,行等的存在也被了知;又因为行等从无明等生起、被造作,所以无明等是行等的根源和本性。因此,为了说明这个道理,才在因义上用从格和处格来表述:“此有故彼有,由此生起故彼生起”。巴利
Tattha satīti iminā vijjamānatāmattena paccayabhāvaṃ vadanto abyāpārataṃ paṭiccasamuppādassa dasseti. Uppādāti uppattidhammataṃ asabbakālabhāvitaṃ phaluppattiabhimukhatañca dīpento aniccataṃ paṭiccasamuppādassa dasseti. ‘‘Sati, nāsati, uppādā, na nirodhā’’ti pana hetuatthehi bhummanissakkavacanehi samatthitaṃ nidānasamudayajātipabhavabhāvaṃ paṭiccasamuppādassa dasseti. Hetuatthatā cettha bhummavacane yassa bhāve tadavinābhāviphalassa bhāvo lakkhīyati, tattha pavattiyā veditabbā yathā ‘‘adhanānaṃ dhane ananuppadīyamāne dāliddiyaṃ vepullaṃ agamāsī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.91) ca ‘‘nipphannesu sassesu subhikkhaṃ jāyatī’’ti ca. Nissakkavacanassāpi hetuatthatā phalassa pabhave pakatiyañca pavattito yathā ‘‘kalalā hoti abbudaṃ, abbudā jāyatī pesī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.235) ca ‘‘himavatā gaṅgā pabhavanti, siṅgato saro jāyatī’’ti ca. Avijjādibhāve ca tadavinābhāvena saṅkhārādibhāvo lakkhīyati, avijjādīhi ca saṅkhārādayo pabhavanti pakariyanti cāti te tesaṃ pabhavo pakati ca, tasmā tadatthadīpanatthaṃ ‘‘imasmiṃ sati imassa uppādā’’ti hetuatthe bhummanissakkaniddesā katāti.
在这里,因为经中以“此有则彼有,此起则彼起”这样简略的方式标出了缘起,而它的详细解释就是“无明缘行”等等,所以应当知道:上面所说的“存在”和“生起”,就是那些缘所生法的缘性。因为,经中以“只有在存在时,不是在不存在时;只有从生起,不是从灭去”这样具有内在决定性的语句所宣说的、被称为“不灭”的存在,以及被称为“不退转自性”的生起,或者被称为“朝向生起”的状态,离开这些之外,并没有另一种所谓的“缘性”。因此应当知道,上面所说的存在和生起,就是缘性。即使在《发趣论》中提到的因等二十四缘,也应当知道它们只是这种缘性的不同分类。这样,为了显示世尊如何详细地随顺缘起而作意,才说了“即无明缘行”等。巴利
Yasmā cettha ‘‘imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hoti, imassuppādā idaṃ uppajjatī’’ti saṅkhepena uddiṭṭhassa paṭiccasamuppādassa ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādiko niddeso, tasmā yathāvutto atthibhāvo uppādo ca tesaṃ tesaṃ paccayuppannadhammānaṃ paccayabhāvoti viññāyati. Na hi aniruddhatāsaṅkhātaṃ atthibhāvaṃ uppādañca anivattasabhāvatāsaṅkhātaṃ udayāvatthatāsaṅkhātaṃ vā ‘‘sati eva, nāsati, uppādā eva, na nirodhā’’ti antogadhaniyamehi vacanehi abhihitaṃ muñcitvā añño paccayabhāvo nāma atthi, tasmā yathāvutto atthibhāvo uppādo ca paccayabhāvoti veditabbaṃ. Yepi paṭṭhāne āgatā hetuādayo catuvīsati paccayā, tepi etasseva paccayabhāvassa visesāti veditabbā. Iti yathā vitthārena anulomaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṃ manasi akāsi, taṃ dassetuṃ, ‘‘yadidaṃ avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
在这里,“yadidaṃ”是个语助词,它的意思是“那个”。在“无明缘”等语句中:对不该知道的身恶行等,它却去知道,所以叫无明;对应该知道的身善行等,它却不知道,所以叫无明;它使诸法不颠倒的自性变得不被了知,所以叫无明;它在没有边际的轮回、各种存在中驱使众生奔走,所以叫无明;它在不存在的事物上奔走,在存在的事物上却不奔走,所以叫无明;它是明的对立面,所以叫无明。应当知道,这个无明按“对苦无知”等说法分为四种。“缘”的意思是:依靠它,果不会离开它而生起和运转;或者说,缘就是助益的意思。无明本身就是缘,所以叫无明缘,因此说“以无明为缘”。“行”的意思是:它们造作,所以叫行,指世间的善思和不善思,应当知道按福行、非福行、不动行分为三种。“识”的意思是:它了别,所以叫识,按世间异熟识来说有三十二种。“名”的意思是:它朝向,所以叫名,指受等三蕴。“色”的意思是:它变坏,所以叫色,包括大种色以及眼等所造色。“处”的意思是:它扩展,并把扩展的轮回之苦引向众生,所以叫处。“触”的意思是:它接触,所以叫触。“受”的意思是:它感受,所以叫受。这二者按门来说有六种,按异熟来说在执取中有三十六种。“爱”的意思是:它颤抖渴求,所以叫爱,简要地说按欲爱等分为三种,详细地说有一百零八种。“取”的意思是:它执取,所以叫取,按欲取等分为四种。“有”的意思是:它存在,也使它存在,所以叫有,按业和投生分为两种。“生”就是产生。“老”就是衰老。“死”就是因它而死亡。“愁”就是悲伤。“悲”就是哀号。“苦”就是逼迫,按生起和住立两方面来说,它逼迫,所以叫苦。“忧”就是心沮丧的状态。“绝望”就是极度疲惫。“生起”就是产生。而且不只是愁等,应当把“生起”这个词与所有词都连接起来。这样,“以无明为缘,诸行生起”就显示了缘以及缘所生法的确定关系。这个规则适用于一切地方。巴利
Tattha yadidanti nipāto, tassa yo ayanti attho. Avijjāpaccayātiādīsu avindiyaṃ kāyaduccaritādiṃ vindatīti avijjā, vindiyaṃ kāyasucaritādiṃ na vindatīti avijjā, dhammānaṃ aviparītasabhāvaṃ aviditaṃ karotīti avijjā, antavirahite saṃsāre bhavādīsu satte javāpetīti avijjā, avijjamānesu javati vijjamānesu na javatīti avijjā, vijjāya paṭipakkhāti avijjā, sā ‘‘dukkhe aññāṇa’’ntiādinā catubbidhā veditabbā. Paṭicca na vinā phalaṃ eti uppajjati ceva pavattati cāti paccayo, upakārakattho vā paccayo. Avijjā ca sā paccayo cāti avijjāpaccayo, tasmā avijjāpaccayā. Saṅkharontīti saṅkhārā, lokiyakusalākusalacetanā, sā puññāpuññāneñjābhisaṅkhāravasena tividhā veditabbā. Vijānātīti viññāṇaṃ, taṃ lokiyavipākaviññāṇavasena dvattiṃsavidhaṃ. Namatīti nāmaṃ, vedanādikkhandhattayaṃ. Ruppatīti rūpaṃ, bhūtarūpaṃ cakkhādiupādārūpañca. Āyatati āyatañca saṃsāradukkhaṃ nayatīti āyatanaṃ. Phusatīti phasso. Vedayatīti vedanā. Idampi dvayaṃ dvāravasena chabbidhaṃ, vipākavasena gahaṇe chattiṃsavidhaṃ. Paritassatīti taṇhā, sā kāmataṇhādivasena saṅkhepato tividhā, vitthārato aṭṭhuttarasatavidhā ca. Upādīyatīti upādānaṃ, taṃ kāmupādānādivasena catubbidhaṃ. Bhavati bhāvayati cāti bhavo, so kammūpapattibhedato duvidho. Jananaṃ jāti. Jīraṇaṃ jarā. Maranti tenāti maraṇaṃ. Socanaṃ soko. Paridevanaṃ paridevo. Dukkhayatīti dukkhaṃ, uppādaṭṭhitivasena dvedhā khaṇatīti dukkhaṃ. Dumanassa bhāvo domanassaṃ. Bhuso āyāso upāyāso. Sambhavantīti nibbattanti. Na kevalañca sokādīhiyeva, atha kho sabbapadehi ‘‘sambhavantī’’ti padassa yojanā kātabbā. Evañhi ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā sambhavantī’’ti paccayapaccayuppannavavatthānaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. Esa nayo sabbattha.
在这里,无明的特相是不知,作用是迷惑,现起是遮蔽,近因是诸漏。行的特相是造作,作用是努力积聚,现起是策动安排,近因是无明。识的特相是了知,作用是先行,现起是结生,近因是行,或者近因是所依和所缘。名的特相是名为,作用是与相应法结合,现起是不可分离,近因是识。色的特相是被破坏,作用是离散,现起是不偏向的状态,近因是识。六处的特相是作为处所,作用是看等,现起是成为所依和门,近因是名色。触的特相是接触,作用是冲击,现起是根、境、识三者和合,近因是六处。受的特相是领纳体验,作用是享用所缘之味,现起是苦与乐,近因是触。渴爱的特相是作为因,作用是感到欢喜,现起是永不满足,近因是受。取的特相是执取,作用是不放手,现起是与渴爱紧密结合的固执和邪见,近因是渴爱。有的特相是业与业果,作用是令存在、令生起,现起是善、不善、无记,近因是取。生的特相是在种种有中最初出生,作用是令出现,现起是从过去有来到此有,或者现起是种种苦。老的特相是诸蕴成熟,作用是引导趋向死亡,现起是青春消逝。死的特相是死亡,作用是分离,现起是离开趣处。愁的特相是内心燃烧,作用是内心忧悲,现起是追悔。悲的特相是哭号,作用是称说功德过失,现起是慌乱。苦的特相是逼迫身体,作用是使愚者生忧,现起是身体的病痛。忧的特相是逼迫心,作用是伤害意,现起是心的疾病。绝望的特相是心之枯竭,作用是叹息,现起是沮丧。如是,这些无明等也应从特相等来理解。这是此处的略说;若欲得具足一切行相的抉择,则应从《分别论注》的《迷惑除遣》中取。巴利
Tattha aññāṇalakkhaṇā avijjā, sammohanarasā, chādanapaccupaṭṭhānā, āsavapadaṭṭhānā. Abhisaṅkharaṇalakkhaṇā saṅkhārā, āyūhanarasā, saṃvidahanapaccupaṭṭhānā, avijjāpadaṭṭhānā. Vijānanalakkhaṇaṃ viññāṇaṃ, pubbaṅgamarasaṃ, paṭisandhipaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, saṅkhārapadaṭṭhānaṃ, vatthārammaṇapadaṭṭhānaṃ vā. Namanalakkhaṇaṃ nāmaṃ, sampayogarasaṃ, avinibbhogapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, viññāṇapadaṭṭhānaṃ. Ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ rūpaṃ, vikiraṇarasaṃ, appaheyyabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, viññāṇapadaṭṭhānaṃ. Āyatanalakkhaṇaṃ saḷāyatanaṃ, dassanādirasaṃ, vatthudvārabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, nāmarūpapadaṭṭhānaṃ. Phusanalakkhaṇo phasso, saṅghaṭṭanaraso, saṅgatipaccupaṭṭhāno, saḷāyatanapadaṭṭhāno. Anubhavanalakkhaṇā vedanā, visayarasasambhogarasā, sukhadukkhapaccupaṭṭhānā, phassapadaṭṭhānā. Hetubhāvalakkhaṇā taṇhā, abhinandanarasā, atittibhāvapaccupaṭṭhānā, vedanāpadaṭṭhānā. Gahaṇalakkhaṇaṃ upādānaṃ, amuñcanarasaṃ, taṇhādaḷhattadiṭṭhipaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, taṇhāpadaṭṭhānaṃ. Kammakammaphalalakkhaṇo bhavo, bhavanabhāvanaraso, kusalākusalābyākatapaccupaṭṭhāno, upādānapadaṭṭhāno. Tattha tattha bhave paṭhamābhinibbattilakkhaṇā jāti, niyyātanarasā, atītabhavato idhuppannapaccupaṭṭhānā, dukkhavicittatāpaccupaṭṭhānā vā. Khandhaparipākalakkhaṇā jarā, maraṇūpanayanarasā, yobbanavināsapaccupaṭṭhānā. Cutilakkhaṇaṃ maraṇaṃ , visaṃyogarasaṃ, gativippavāsapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ. Antonijjhānalakkhaṇo soko, cetaso nijjhānaraso, anusocanapaccupaṭṭhāno. Lālappanalakkhaṇo paridevo, guṇadosaparikittanaraso, sambhamapaccupaṭṭhāno. Kāyapīḷanalakkhaṇaṃ dukkhaṃ, duppaññānaṃ domanassakaraṇarasaṃ, kāyikābādhapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ. Cittapīḷanalakkhaṇaṃ domanassaṃ, manovighātanarasaṃ, mānasabyādhipaccupaṭṭhānaṃ. Cittaparidahanalakkhaṇo upāyāso, nitthunanaraso, visādapaccupaṭṭhāno. Evamete avijjādayo lakkhaṇāditopi veditabbāti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana sabbākārasampannaṃ vinicchayaṃ icchantena sammohavinodaniyā (vibha. aṭṭha. 225) vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāya gahetabbo.
“如是”这个词,是对已经指出内容的举例说明。它表明:纯粹是以无明等作为原因,而不是以大自在天创造等作为原因。“此”指的是前面所说的那个。“纯”是指没有混杂的,或者指整体的。“苦蕴”是指苦的聚集,不是指有情,也不是指命者,更不是指美好、快乐等。“集起”就是产生、出现。巴利
Evanti niddiṭṭhassa nidassanaṃ, tena avijjādīheva kāraṇehi, na issaranimmānādīhīti dasseti. Etassāti yathāvuttassa. Kevalassāti asammissassa sakalassa vā. Dukkhakkhandhassāti dukkhasamūhassa, na sattassa, nāpi jīvassa, nāpi subhasukhādīnaṃ. Samudayo hotīti nibbatti sambhavati.
了知此义之后:这里说的是,按照以无明等为缘、诸行等纯一苦蕴得以生起这一道理,从一切方面完全了知此义。在那一刻:就是在通达此义的那一刻。说出这段感兴语:因为已经了知此义,并且清楚了因以及因所生之法,为了显示这种通达的威力,便说出了以“当它确实显现”等为开头、与喜悦相应、由智慧所引生的感兴语;也就是说,说出了内心欢喜的话。巴利
Etamatthaṃviditvāti yvāyaṃ avijjādivasena saṅkhārādikassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hotīti vutto, sabbākārena etamatthaṃ viditvā. Tāyaṃ velāyanti tāyaṃ tassa atthassa viditavelāyaṃ. Imaṃ udānaṃ udānesīti imaṃ tasmiṃ atthe vidite hetuno ca hetusamuppannadhammassa ca pajānanāya ānubhāvadīpakaṃ ‘‘yadā have pātubhavantī’’tiādikaṃ somanassasampayuttañāṇasamuṭṭhānaṃ udānaṃ udānesi, attamanavācaṃ nicchāresīti vuttaṃ hoti.
它的意思是:“yadā”(当……时),指某个时候。“have”是虚词,在这里表示“确实”。不过有些人把“have”解释为“在战场、战斗中”,他们依据“应以智慧之武器与魔作战”这句话,认为是指与烦恼魔交战之时,这是他们的主张。“pātubhavanti”(显现),就是生起。“dhammā”(诸法),指能实现顺缘起之理通达的菩提分法。或者,“pātubhavanti”是使明显,即通过现观而变得明确、显著;“dhammā”指四圣谛法。“ātāpo”称为精进,因为它有烧灼烦恼之义。“ātāpino”指具有正勤精进的人。“jhāyato”指以所缘禅那和相禅那而修禅的人。“brāhmaṇassa”指已舍断诸恶、诸漏已尽的漏尽者。“athassa kaṅkhā vapayanti sabbā”:那时,对于这位如此显现法的人,那些疑惑——如“尊者,是谁在触?世尊说:此问不合理”等,以及如“尊者,什么是老死?这老死又是谁的?”世尊说“此问不合理”等——在缘起理上所说的疑惑,还有因为未通达缘起本身而出现的“我过去世是否存在”等十六种疑惑,这一切疑惑都消散、离去、止息。为什么?因为他了知有因之法,因为他以无明等为因,了知、通达、现观这纯粹是苦蕴的有因的诸行等法。巴利
Tassattho – yadāti yasmiṃ kāle. Haveti byattanti imasmiṃ atthe nipāto. Keci pana ‘‘haveti āhave yuddhe’’ti atthaṃ vadanti, ‘‘yodhetha māraṃ paññāvudhenā’’ti (dha. pa. 40) vacanato kilesamārena yujjhanasamayeti tesaṃ adhippāyo. Pātubhavantīti uppajjanti. Dhammāti anulomapaccayākārapaṭivedhasādhakā bodhipakkhiyadhammā. Atha vā pātubhavantīti pakāsenti, abhisamayavasena byattā pākaṭā honti. Dhammāti catuariyasaccadhammā, ātāpo vuccati kilesasantāpanaṭṭhena vīriyaṃ. Ātāpinoti sammappadhānavīriyavato. Jhāyatoti ārammaṇūpanijjhānena lakkhaṇūpanijjhānena jhāyantassa. Brāhmaṇassāti bāhitapāpassa khīṇāsavassa. Athassa kaṅkhā vapayanti sabbāti athassa evaṃ pātubhūtadhammassa yā etā ‘‘ko nu kho, bhante, phusatīti. No kallo pañhoti bhagavā avocā’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 2.12) nayena, ‘‘katamaṃ nu kho, bhante, jarāmaraṇaṃ, kassa ca panidaṃ jarāmaraṇanti. No kallo pañhoti bhagavā avocā’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 2.35) nayena paccayākāre kaṅkhā vuttā, yā ca paccayākārasseva appaṭividdhattā ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho ahaṃ atītamaddhāna’’ntiādinā (ma. ni. 1.18; saṃ. ni. 2.20) soḷasa kaṅkhā āgatā. Tā sabbā vapayanti apagacchanti nirujjhanti. Kasmā? Yato pajānāti sahetudhammaṃ, yasmā avijjādikena hetunā sahetukaṃ imaṃ saṅkhārādikaṃ kevalaṃ dukkhakkhandhadhammaṃ pajānāti aññāsi paṭivijjhīti.
那么,他的菩提分法或四圣谛法,到底在什么时候显现、生起或变得明显呢?是在观智和道智的阶段。其中,与观智相应的念等菩提分法以及观智本身,按照各自对应的所缘境,以彼分断的方式舍断净想等烦恼,通过身随观等门径各自分别生起;而在道刹那,它们则以涅槃为所缘,以正断的方式断除对立之法,为了成就对四圣谛的无痴通达,一时俱起。如此,在这里应当先了解:菩提分法是以生起之义而说为显现。巴利
Kadā panassa bodhipakkhiyadhammā catusaccadhammā vā pātubhavanti uppajjanti pakāsenti vā? Vipassanāmaggañāṇesu . Tattha vipassanāñāṇasampayuttā satiādayo vipassanāñāṇañca yathārahaṃ attano visayesu tadaṅgappahānavasena subhasaññādike pajahantā kāyānupassanādivasena visuṃ visuṃ uppajjanti, maggakkhaṇe pana te nibbānamālambitvā samucchedavasena paṭipakkhe pajahantā catūsupi ariyasaccesu asammohappaṭivedhasādhanavasena sakideva uppajjanti. Evaṃ tāvettha bodhipakkhiyadhammānaṃ uppajjanaṭṭhena pātubhāvo veditabbo.
至于圣谛法,世间圣谛在观刹那,是以成为观智所缘的方式显现;出世间圣谛,是以心倾向于彼的方式显现;在道刹那,灭谛是以所缘现观的方式显现;而一切圣谛,都是以作用现观的方式而变得明显。因此,应当知道“显现”就是“令明显”的意思。巴利
Ariyasaccadhammānaṃ pana lokiyānaṃ vipassanākkhaṇe vipassanāya ārammaṇakaraṇavasena, lokuttarānaṃ tadadhimuttatāvasena, maggakkhaṇe nirodhasaccassa ārammaṇābhisamayavasena, sabbesampi kiccābhisamayavasena pākaṭabhāvato pakāsanaṭṭhena pātubhāvo veditabbo.
世尊虽然能以一切方式让一切法在自己的智慧中清晰显现,但因为他是以缘起为入口来安立观修的,而缘起的行相又极其微细、甚深、极难照见,所以他审察了这缘起的运作方式之后,生起了强烈的欢喜,并连同对敌对法的彻底断除与彰显,就在此处诵出了这首感兴语,用来显示他自己通达缘起的威力。巴利
Iti bhagavā satipi sabbākārena sabbadhammānaṃ attano ñāṇassa pākaṭabhāve paṭiccasamuppādamukhena vipassanābhinivesassa katattā nipuṇagambhīrasududdasatāya paccayākārassa taṃ paccavekkhitvā uppannabalavasomanasso paṭipakkhasamucchedavibhāvanena saddhiṃ attano tadabhisamayānubhāvadīpakamevettha udānaṃ udānesīti.
这段感兴语“Ayampi udāno vutto bhagavatā iti me sutaṃ”(这也是世尊所说的感兴语,如是我闻)只出现在某些写本中。其中,ayampi 里的 pi 字,就像“idampi buddhe ratanaṃ paṇītaṃ”(这也是佛的殊胜宝)、“ayampi pārājiko hotīti”(这也是波罗夷)等用法一样,有总括的作用,用它来总括上文。Vutto(所说)这个词,在“理发”“播种”“整平”“维持生计”“解脱状态”“圣典”等含义中都出现过。比如在“kāpaṭiko māṇavo daharo vuttasiro”(诈伪的年轻婆罗门,剃了头)等句中,就是以“理发”的意思出现的。巴利
Ayampiudāno vutto bhagavatā iti me sutanti ayaṃ pāḷi kesuciyeva potthakesu dissati. Tattha ayampīti pisaddo ‘‘idampi buddhe ratanaṃ paṇītaṃ, ayampi pārājiko hotī’’tiādīsu viya sampiṇḍanattho, tena uparimaṃ sampiṇḍeti. Vuttoti ayaṃ vuttasaddo kesohāraṇavappanavāpasamīkaraṇajīvitavuttipamuttabhāvapāvacanabhāvena pavattana ajjhenakathanādīsu dissati. Tathā hesa ‘‘kāpaṭiko māṇavo daharo vuttasiro’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.426) kesohāraṇe āgato.
他的牛群繁衍,田里播下的种子生长;
他享受所播种的果实,因为他从不伤害朋友。巴利
‘‘Gāvo tassa pajāyanti, khette vuttaṃ virūhati; Vuttānaṃ phalamasnāti, yo mittānaṃ na dubbhatī’’ti. –
在“Ādīsu”(《本生》2.22.19)等句子中,是“播种”的意思。在“No ca kho paṭivutta”(《波罗夷》289)等句子中,是用八杖等工具“平整”的意思。在“Pannalomo paradattavutto migabhūtena cetasā viharāmī”(《小品》332)等句子中,是指“生活方式、谋生方式”。在“Paṇḍupalāso bandhanā pavutto abhabbo haritattāyā”(《波罗夷》92)等句子中,是指“从束缚中解脱出来的状态”。在“Gītaṃ vuttaṃ samīhitaṃ”(《长部》1.285)等句子中,是指“以圣典言教的方式流传”。在“Vutto pārāyaṇo”等句子中,是“诵习、学习”的意思。在“Vuttaṃ kho panetaṃ bhagavatā ‘dhammadāyādā me, bhikkhave, bhavatha, mā āmisadāyādā’”(《中部》1.30)等句子中,是“言说、讲述”的意思。这里也应该理解为“言说”,因此这句话的意思是:这个优陀那也是被说出来的。“Iti”就是“这样”的意思。“Me sutaṃ”这两个词的含义,在《因缘注》中已经全面解释过了。前面从因缘的角度已经说过“evaṃ me sutaṃ”的意思,这里再从总结的角度说一次“iti me sutaṃ”。把已经说过的意思再说一遍,就叫总结。“iti”这个词所表达的含义,和“evaṃ”这个词含义相同,所以这里的“evaṃ me sutaṃ”和前面一样;至于文义的搭配,我们在《如是语注》中已经说明过了,因此应该按照那里所说的方式来理解。巴利
Ādīsu (jā. 2.22.19) vappane. ‘‘No ca kho paṭivutta’’ntiādīsu (pārā. 289) aṭṭhadaṇḍakādīhi vāpasamīkaraṇe. ‘‘Pannalomo paradattavutto migabhūtena cetasā viharāmī’’tiādīsu (cūḷava. 332) jīvitavuttiyaṃ. ‘‘Paṇḍupalāso bandhanā pavutto abhabbo haritattāyā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 92) bandhanato pamuttabhāve. ‘‘Gītaṃ vuttaṃ samīhita’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.285) pāvacanabhāvena pavattite. ‘‘Vutto pārāyaṇo’’tiādīsu ajjhene. ‘‘Vuttaṃ kho panetaṃ bhagavatā ‘dhammadāyādā me, bhikkhave, bhavatha, mā āmisadāyādā’’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.30) kathane. Idhāpi kathane eva daṭṭhabbo, tena ayampi udāno bhāsitoti attho. Itīti evaṃ. Me sutanti padadvayassa attho nidānavaṇṇanāyaṃ sabbākārato vuttoyeva. Pubbe ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’nti nidānavasena vuttoyeva hi attho idha nigamanavasena ‘‘iti me suta’’nti puna vutto. Vuttasseva hi atthassa puna vacanaṃ nigamananti. Itisaddassa atthuddhāro evaṃ-saddena samānatthatāya ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’nti ettha viya, atthayojanā ca itivuttakavaṇṇanāya amhehi pakāsitāyevāti tattha vuttanayeneva veditabboti.
第二菩提经的注释巴利
2. Dutiyabodhisuttavaṇṇanā
2 第二经中的“逆”:像“无明灭则行灭”这样按一定方式所说的,以无明等为条件的缘起理路本身,当它以不再生起的灭而息灭时,因为不再有它自己应做的作用,所以称为“逆”。或者,因为逆于运转,所以是“逆”。但这里并不是从末端或中间开始、一直追溯到开头,所以不能用别的意思来理解这里的“逆”性。而“逆”这个词,也像“日月运行错乱”等说法一样,是中性抽象名词的表达方式。“此无时,彼则无”:当这无明等条件不存在时——被圣道断除时——这行等果就不存在,不会运转。“此灭故彼灭”:当这无明等条件息灭时——因为圣道使它达到了不再生起的法性——这行等果就息灭,不会运转。这里也像“此有故彼有,此生故彼生”那样,显示了“只有此有而非无,只有此生而非灭”的内在必然性;同样,这里也显示了“只有此无而非有,只有此灭而非生”的内在必然性特征,应当这样理解。这里其余应当说明的,依照第一菩提经注释所说的方法来理解即可。巴利
2. Dutiye paṭilomanti ‘‘avijjānirodhā saṅkhāranirodho’’tiādinā nayena vutto avijjādikoyeva paccayākāro anuppādanirodhena nirujjhamāno attano kattabbakiccassa akaraṇato paṭilomoti vuccati. Pavattiyā vā vilomanato paṭilomo, antato pana majjhato vā paṭṭhāya ādiṃ pāpetvā avuttattā ito aññenatthenettha paṭilomatā na yujjati. Paṭilomanti ca ‘‘visamaṃ candasūriyā parivattantī’’tiādīsu viya bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso. Imasmiṃ asati idaṃ na hotīti imasmiṃ avijjādike paccaye asati maggena pahīne idaṃ saṅkhārādikaṃ phalaṃ na hoti nappavattati. Imassa nirodhā idaṃ nirujjhatīti imassa avijjādikassa paccayassa nirodhā maggena anuppattidhammataṃ āpāditattā idaṃ saṅkhārādikaṃ phalaṃ nirujjhati, nappavattatīti attho. Idhāpi yathā ‘‘imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hoti, imassuppādā idaṃ uppajjatī’’ti ettha ‘‘imasmiṃ satiyeva, nāsati, imassa uppādā eva, na nirodhā’’ti antogadhaniyamatā dassitā. Evaṃ imasmiṃ asatiyeva, na sati, imassa nirodhā eva, na uppādāti antogadhaniyamatālakkhaṇā dassitāti veditabbaṃ. Sesamettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ paṭhamabodhisuttavaṇṇanāya vuttanayānusārena veditabbaṃ.
世尊这样以逆序的方式作意缘起之后,先用简略的方式把它显示出来,现在为了详细显示,所以说了“无明灭则行灭”等。其中,“无明灭”是指通过圣道使无明彻底灭尽,也就是以阿拉汉道断除随眠的方式,将无明完全根除的意思。虽然在下分道断除无明时,也是以彻底根除的方式断除的,但并不是毫无剩余地断尽。因为导向恶趣的无明是由初道断除的;同样,只在这世间一生中以及一切非圣者地界中成为投生之因的那部分无明,依次由第二道、第三道断除,其余部分则不是。只有阿拉汉道才能将无明毫无剩余地断尽。“行灭”是指诸行不再生起的灭。然而,为了显示当诸行这样灭尽之后,行灭则识灭,识等灭则名色等也随之灭尽,所以在说了“行灭则识灭”等之后,总结说“如此,这整个苦蕴便灭尽”。这里应当说明的内容,与前面所说的方法一致。巴利
Evaṃ yathā bhagavā paṭilomapaṭiccasamuppādaṃ manasi akāsi, taṃ saṅkhepena dassetvā idāni vitthārena dassetuṃ ‘‘avijjānirodhā saṅkhāranirodho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha avijjānirodhāti ariyamaggena avijjāya anavasesanirodhā, anusayappahānavasena aggamaggena avijjāya accantasamugghāṭatoti attho. Yadipi heṭṭhimamaggehi pahīyamānā avijjā accantasamugghāṭavaseneva pahīyati, tathāpi na anavasesato pahīyati. Apāyagāminiyā hi avijjā paṭhamamaggena pahīyati. Tathā sakideva imasmiṃ loke sabbattha ca anariyabhūmiyaṃ upapattipaccayabhūtā avijjā yathākkamaṃ dutiyatatiyamaggehi pahīyati, na itarāti. Arahattamaggeneva hi sā anavasesaṃ pahīyatīti. Saṅkhāranirodhoti saṅkhārānaṃ anuppādanirodho hoti. Evaṃ niruddhānaṃ pana saṅkhārānaṃ nirodhā viññāṇaṃ, viññāṇādīnañca nirodhā nāmarūpādīni niruddhāni eva hontīti dassetuṃ ‘‘saṅkhāranirodhā viññāṇanirodho’’tiādiṃ vatvā ‘‘evametassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa nirodho hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.
另外,在这里,虽然仅仅通过“无明灭则行灭,行灭则识灭”这句话,就已经说出了整个苦蕴毫无剩余地灭尽,但为了显示在顺观中“因为某个缘法存在,某个缘所生的法就不灭而持续生起”这一含义,所以才说“以无明为缘,行生起……乃至……苦蕴集起”。同样地,在这里,为了从相反的方面显示“当某个缘法不存在时,那个缘所生的法就灭去、不再持续生起”,才说“无明灭则行灭,行灭则识灭……乃至……苦蕴灭”。这并不是像顺观那样,为了显示涵盖过去、现在、未来三时的苦蕴之灭。因为这里要表达的是:未来本应生起的苦蕴,在尚未修习圣道时就会生起,而通过修习圣道则使其灭尽。这个差别也应当了解。巴利
Apicettha kiñcāpi ‘‘avijjānirodhā saṅkhāranirodho, saṅkhāranirodhā viññāṇanirodho’’ti ettāvatāpi sakalassa dukkhakkhandhassa anavasesato nirodho vutto hoti, tathāpi yathā anulome yassa yassa paccayadhammassa atthitāya yo yo paccayuppannadhammo na nirujjhati pavattati evāti imassa atthassa dassanatthaṃ ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā…pe… samudayo hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ tappaṭipakkhato tassa tassa paccayadhammassa abhāve so so paccayuppannadhammo nirujjhati nappavattatīti dassanatthaṃ idha ‘‘avijjānirodhā saṅkhāranirodho, saṅkhāranirodhā viññāṇanirodho…pe… dukkhakkhandhassa nirodho hotī’’ti vuttaṃ, na pana anulome viya kālattayapariyāpannassa dukkhakkhandhassa nirodhadassanatthaṃ. Anāgatasseva hi ariyamaggabhāvanāya asati uppajjanārahassa dukkhakkhandhassa ariyamaggabhāvanāya nirodho icchitoti ayampi viseso veditabbo.
了知此义:前面已经说过“由于无明灭等,诸行等苦蕴便灭”,这里是指以一切方式了知这个义理。宣说此优陀那:在已经了知这个义理时,宣说了这首优陀那,意思是宣说一首优陀那,用来显示对无明等诸缘灭尽的觉悟之力,即对“无明灭则行灭”这样开示的无明等诸缘之灭尽的觉悟之力。巴利
Etamatthaṃ viditvāti yvāyaṃ ‘‘avijjānirodhādivasena saṅkhārādikassa dukkhakkhandhassa nirodho hotī’’ti vutto, sabbākārena etamatthaṃ viditvā. Imaṃ udānaṃ udānesīti imasmiṃ atthe vidite ‘‘avijjānirodhā saṅkhāranirodho’’ti evaṃ pakāsitassa avijjādīnaṃ paccayānaṃ khayassa avabodhānubhāvadīpakaṃ udānaṃ udānesīti attho.
这里简要的含义是:因为他已经觉知、了知、彻见了无明等诸缘的灭尽,也就是所谓的不再生起的灭尽,所以,按照前面所说的方式,对于这样精勤禅修的婆罗门,前面所说的那些菩提分法或四谛法就会显现、生起,或者变得明了。再者,由于过去没有如实了知诸缘的灭尽而可能生起的、前面所说的各种疑惑,它们也全都消散、灭尽了。其余部分和前面所说的一样。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – yasmā avijjādīnaṃ paccayānaṃ anuppādanirodhasaṅkhātaṃ khayaṃ avedi aññāsi paṭivijjhi, tasmā etassa vuttanayena ātāpino jhāyato brāhmaṇassa vuttappakārā bodhipakkhiyadhammā catusaccadhammā vā pātubhavanti uppajjanti pakāsenti vā. Atha yā paccayanirodhassa sammā aviditattā uppajjeyyuṃ pubbe vuttappabhedā kaṅkhā, tā sabbāpi vapayanti nirujjhantīti. Sesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva.
第三部菩提经的注释巴利
3. Tatiyabodhisuttavaṇṇanā
3 在第三经中,“顺逆”就是指顺和逆,意思是按照前面所说的顺的方式以及逆的方式。前面两部经里不是也已经说过,以顺的方式和逆的方式来作意缘起吗?那这里为什么又再次说以这两种方式来作意呢?因为在这里是第三次以这两种方式来作意。那么,怎样才是以这两种方式来作意呢?难道可以不分先后、同时作意缘起的顺与逆吗?不应该这样理解,以为“他把两者合在一起作意”,而是按次第进行的。世尊首先以顺的方式作意缘起,然后宣说了与它相应的第一首优陀那;第二次又以逆的方式作意缘起,然后宣说了与它相应的优陀那;到了第三次,则有时顺、有时逆地作意,以这种方式完成了顺逆的作意。因此说:“顺逆,就是顺和逆,按照前面所说的顺的方式以及逆的方式。”这就显示出作意已经纯熟、有力,并且达到了自在。在这里,应当依照“我要顺作意”“我要逆作意”“我要顺逆作意”这三种意欲的前行,来区分这三次作意。巴利
3. Tatiye anulomapaṭilomanti anulomañca paṭilomañca, yathāvuttaanulomavasena ceva paṭilomavasena cāti attho. Nanu ca pubbepi anulomavasena paṭilomavasena ca paṭiccasamuppāde manasikārappavatti suttadvaye vuttā, idha kasmā punapi tadubhayavasena manasikārappavatti vuccatīti? Tadubhayavasena tatiyavāraṃ tattha manasikārassa pavattitattā. Kathaṃ pana tadubhayavasena manasikāro pavattito? Na hi sakkā apubbaṃ acarimaṃ anulomapaṭilomaṃ paṭiccasamuppādassa manasikāraṃ pavattetunti? Na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ ‘‘tadubhayaṃ ekajjhaṃ manasākāsī’’ti, atha kho vārena. Bhagavā hi paṭhamaṃ anulomavasena paṭiccasamuppādaṃ manasi karitvā tadanurūpaṃ paṭhamaṃ udānaṃ udānesi. Dutiyampi paṭilomavasena taṃ manasi karitvā tadanurūpameva udānaṃ udānesi. Tatiyavāre pana kālena anulomaṃ kālena paṭilomaṃ manasikaraṇavasena anulomapaṭilomaṃ manasi akāsi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘anulomapaṭilomanti anulomañca paṭilomañca, yathāvuttaanulomavasena ceva paṭilomavasena cā’’ti. Iminā manasikārassa paguṇabalavabhāvo ca vasībhāvo ca pakāsito hoti. Ettha ca ‘‘anulomaṃ manasi karissāmi, paṭilomaṃ manasi karissāmi, anulomapaṭilomaṃ manasi karissāmī’’ti evaṃ pavattānaṃ pubbābhogānaṃ vasena nesaṃ vibhāgo veditabbo.
在这里,“只是无明”就是指无明本身。“从离贪灭尽无余”:通过被称为离贪的圣道,也就是最上的圣道,彻底灭尽,意思是毫无剩余、不再生起地断除。“行灭”:就是一切行毫无剩余、不再生起地灭尽。因为靠前面那三道圣道,有些行灭尽,有些行还没有灭尽,这是因为无明只被部分灭尽;而靠最上的圣道,由于无明被彻底灭尽、毫无剩余,所以没有任何行不灭尽。巴利
Tattha avijjāya tvevāti avijjāya tu eva. Asesavirāganirodhāti virāgasaṅkhātena maggena asesanirodhā, aggamaggena anavasesaanuppādappahānāti attho. Saṅkhāranirodhoti sabbesaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ anavasesaṃ anuppādanirodho. Heṭṭhimena hi maggattayena keci saṅkhārā nirujjhanti, keci na nirujjhanti avijjāya sāvasesanirodhā. Aggamaggena panassā anavasesanirodhā na keci saṅkhārā na nirujjhantīti.
了知此义之后:前面说过,以无明等为条件,才有行等苦蕴的生起,以及由于无明等的灭尽而有苦蕴的灭尽——他从一切方面了知了这个义理。宣说此优陀那:意思是,他宣说了这样一番优陀那,用来彰显圣道的威力;正是通过圣道,以它的作用和所缘作用,了知了那称为苦蕴之集与灭的义理。巴利
Etamatthaṃviditvāti yvāyaṃ avijjādivasena saṅkhārādikassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo nirodho ca avijjādīnaṃ samudayā nirodhā ca hotīti vutto, sabbākārena etamatthaṃ viditvā. Imaṃ udānaṃ udānesīti idaṃ yena maggena yo dukkhakkhandhassa samudayanirodhasaṅkhāto attho kiccavasena ārammaṇakiriyāya ca vidito, tassa ariyamaggassa ānubhāvadīpakaṃ vuttappakāraṃ udānaṃ udānesīti attho.
这里简要说明其含义:当诸法真正显现于精勤禅修的婆罗门面前时,那位婆罗门就以那些已经生起的菩提分法,或者以已经显现四谛法的圣道,凭借此圣道驱散魔军而安住。他如此驱散、摧毁、粉碎魔军——就像经中按“贪欲是你的第一军……”这种方式所说的那样。怎样呢?就像太阳照亮虚空:正如太阳升起后,以自己的光芒照亮虚空,同时驱散黑暗而安住;同样,那位漏尽婆罗门也以那些法,或以圣道,在现观诸谛的同时驱散魔军而安住。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – yadā have pātubhavanti dhammā ātāpino jhāyato brāhmaṇassa, tadā so brāhmaṇo tehi uppannehi bodhipakkhiyadhammehi yassa vā ariyamaggassa catusaccadhammā pātubhūtā , tena ariyamaggena vidhūpayaṃ tiṭṭhati mārasenaṃ, ‘‘kāmā te paṭhamā senā’’tiādinā (su. ni. 438; mahāni. 28; cūḷani. nandamāṇavapucchāniddesa 47) nayena vuttappakāraṃ mārasenaṃ vidhūpayanto vidhamento viddhaṃsento tiṭṭhati. Kathaṃ? Sūriyova obhāsayamantalikkhaṃ, yathā sūriyo abbhuggato attano pabhāya antalikkhaṃ obhāsentova andhakāraṃ vidhamento tiṭṭhati, evaṃ sopi khīṇāsavabrāhmaṇo tehi dhammehi tena vā ariyamaggena saccāni paṭivijjhantova mārasenaṃ vidhūpayanto tiṭṭhatīti.
世尊在三个时分里说了这三首优陀那:第一首是让人了知缘起的运作方式,第二首是让人证得缘起的灭尽,第三首是显示圣道的威力。是在哪一夜说的呢?是在成正觉之后的第七夜。世尊在毗舍佉月月圆之夜,初夜分回忆起了过去世的生活,中夜分清净了天眼,后夜分把智慧投向缘起,用种种方式观察三界的一切造作,当他想到“现在黎明就要升起了”,就证得了正等觉——就在获得一切知智的同时,黎明升起了。从那以后,他就以那个盘腿坐姿在菩提树下度过了七天。到了第七夜,在三个时分里,像前面说的那样作意缘起,然后依次说出了这些优陀那。巴利
Evaṃ bhagavatā paṭhamaṃ paccayākārapajānanassa, dutiyaṃ paccayakkhayādhigamassa, tatiyaṃ ariyamaggassa ānubhāvappakāsanāni imāni tīṇi udānāni tīsu yāmesu bhāsitāni. Katarāya rattiyā? Abhisambodhito sattamāya rattiyā. Bhagavā hi visākhapuṇṇamāya rattiyā paṭhamayāme pubbenivāsaṃ anussaritvā majjhimayāme dibbacakkhuṃ visodhetvā pacchimayāme paṭiccasamuppāde ñāṇaṃ otāretvā nānānayehi tebhūmakasaṅkhāre sammasitvā ‘‘idāni aruṇo uggamissatī’’ti sammāsambodhiṃ pāpuṇi, sabbaññutappattisamanantarameva ca aruṇo uggacchīti. Tato teneva pallaṅkena bodhirukkhamūle sattāhaṃ vītināmento sampattāya pāṭipadarattiyā tīsu yāmesu vuttanayena paṭiccasamuppādaṃ manasi karitvā yathākkamaṃ imāni udānāni udānesi.
不过在《犍度》的三个部分里,都提到“他作意了顺逆的缘起”(《大品》1),所以《犍度注》里说:“在三个时分中这样作意之后,第一首优陀那是以观察缘起的方式,第二首是以观察涅槃的方式,第三首是以观察道的方式——世尊就是这样宣说了这些优陀那。”这也不矛盾。因为世尊除了在宝屋的那七日之外,在其余六个七日里,时不时地观察法,大部分时间都安住在体验解脱之乐中;而在宝屋的七日里,他则是纯粹安住在熟悉阿毗达摩上。巴利
Khandhake pana tīsupi vāresu ‘‘paṭiccasamuppādaṃ anulomapaṭilomaṃ manasākāsī’’ti (mahāva. 1) āgatattā khandhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘tīsupi yāmesu evaṃ manasi katvā paṭhamaṃ udānaṃ paccayākārapaccavekkhaṇavasena, dutiyaṃ nibbānapaccavekkhaṇavasena, tatiyaṃ maggapaccavekkhaṇavasenāti evaṃ imāni bhagavā udānāni udānesī’’ti vuttaṃ, tampi na virujjhati. Bhagavā hi ṭhapetvā ratanagharasattāhaṃ sesesu chasu sattāhesu antarantarā dhammaṃ paccavekkhitvā yebhuyyena vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedī vihāsi, ratanagharasattāhe pana abhidhammaparicayavaseneva vihāsīti.
《吽声经》的注释巴利
4. Huṃhuṅkasuttavaṇṇanā
4 第四项,“在牧羊人尼拘律树”这里:据说牧羊人走到那棵树的树荫里坐下,这棵树因此就得名“牧羊人尼拘律树”。不过也有人说:“因为有些年老的婆罗门没法在那里诵读吠陀,就建了带围墙的住处,全都住在那里,所以就有了‘牧羊人尼拘律树’这个名字。”这里的词义是:不念诵的人就叫“不诵者”,意思是不读诵咒语的人;这些不诵者在这里取用住处,所以叫“不诵者住处”。还有一种说法:因为正午时分羊群走进树荫里,这棵树就保护、守护羊群,所以习惯上称它为“牧羊人”。不管按哪种说法,这个名字指的都是那棵树。而“在牧羊人尼拘律树”是处格,表示在树的附近,也就是“在靠近那里”的意思。巴利
4. Catutthe ajapālanigrodheti tassa kira chāyāyaṃ ajapālā gantvā nisīdanti, tenassa ‘‘ajapālanigrodho’’tveva nāmaṃ udapādi. Keci pana ‘‘yasmā tattha vede sajjhāyituṃ asamatthā mahallakabrāhmaṇā pākāraparikkhepayuttāni nivesanāni katvā sabbe vasiṃsu, tasmā ajapālanigrodhoti nāmaṃ jāta’’nti vadanti. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – na japantīti ajapā, mantānaṃ anajjhāyakāti attho, ajapā lanti ādiyanti nivāsaṃ etthāti ajapāloti. Yasmā vā majjhanhike samaye anto paviṭṭhe aje attano chāyāya pāleti rakkhati, tasmā ‘ajapālo’tissa nāmaṃ rūḷhanti apare. Sabbathāpi nāmametaṃ tassa rukkhassa, tassa samīpe. Samīpatthe hi etaṃ bhummaṃ ‘‘ajapālanigrodhe’’ti.
感受解脱之乐:他在那里一边审察法,一边感受着解脱之乐,就这样坐着。这棵树在菩提树的东边。所谓“七日”,并不是紧接结跏趺坐七日之后的那个七日。因为世尊在结跏趺坐七日之后,又在菩提树附近度过了另外三个七日。巴利
Vimuttisukhapaṭisaṃvedīti tatrapi dhammaṃ vicinanto vimuttisukhañca paṭisaṃvedento nisīdi. Bodhirukkhato puratthimadisābhāge esa rukkho hoti. Sattāhanti ca idaṃ na pallaṅkasattāhato anantarasattāhaṃ. Bhagavā hi pallaṅkasattāhato aparānipi tīṇi sattāhāni bodhisamīpeyeva vītināmesi.
这里按顺序讲一段经过:据说,世尊证得正等觉以后,以同一个盘腿坐姿连续坐了七天。有些天神心里起了疑惑:“世尊一直不起来,难道还有别的成佛之法吗?”到了第八天,世尊从定中起来,知道那些天神的疑惑,为了消除他们的疑惑,就升到空中示现双神变,把他们的疑惑打消。然后,世尊从盘腿处稍微移到偏东的北边站着,用不闭的眼睛注视着那个盘腿处和菩提树——那是他在四大阿僧祇劫又十万劫中积累的波罗蜜达到力量成就的地方——这样过了七天,那个地方就叫“不眨眼塔”。接着,在盘腿处和站立处之间,有一条东西向延伸的宝石经行道,世尊在那里经行了七天,那个地方就叫“宝石经行塔”。之后,天神们在西边化出一座宝屋,世尊在宝屋里盘腿坐下,详细思择阿毗达摩藏,特别是具有无量理趣的《发趣论》,过了七天,那个地方就叫“宝屋塔”。就这样,世尊在菩提树附近过了四个七天,到第五个七天时,从菩提树走到阿阇波罗尼拘律树,在那棵树下盘腿坐下。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ anupubbikathā – bhagavati kira sammāsambodhiṃ patvā sattāhaṃ ekapallaṅkena nisinne ‘‘na bhagavā vuṭṭhāti, kinnu kho aññepi buddhattakarā dhammā atthī’’ti ekaccānaṃ devatānaṃ kaṅkhā udapādi. Atha bhagavā aṭṭhame divase samāpattito vuṭṭhāya devatānaṃ kaṅkhaṃ ñatvā kaṅkhāvidhamanatthaṃ ākāse uppatitvā yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ dassetvā tāsaṃ kaṅkhaṃ vidhametvā pallaṅkato īsakaṃ pācīnanissite uttaradisābhāge ṭhatvā cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni kappasatasahassañca upacitānaṃ pāramīnaṃ balādhigamaṭṭhānaṃ pallaṅkaṃ bodhirukkhañca animisehi cakkhūhi olokayamāno sattāhaṃ vītināmesi, taṃ ṭhānaṃ animisacetiyaṃ nāma jātaṃ. Atha pallaṅkassa ca ṭhitaṭṭhānassa ca antarā puratthimato ca pacchimato ca āyate ratanacaṅkame caṅkamanto sattāhaṃ vītināmesi, taṃ ratanacaṅkamacetiyaṃ nāma jātaṃ. Tato pacchimadisābhāge devatā ratanagharaṃ māpayiṃsu , tattha pallaṅkena nisīditvā abhidhammapiṭakaṃ visesato anantanayaṃ samantapaṭṭhānaṃ vicinanto sattāhaṃ vītināmesi, taṃ ṭhānaṃ ratanagharacetiyaṃ nāma jātaṃ. Evaṃ bodhisamīpeyeva cattāri sattāhāni vītināmetvā pañcame sattāhe bodhirukkhato ajapālanigrodhaṃ upasaṅkamitvā tassa mūle pallaṅkena nisīdi.
世尊从那个定中起来,意思是:他按预定的时间从果等至定中出定。出定之后,世尊还那样坐着的时候,有一个婆罗门走到世尊面前,问了一个问题。所以经文里说“那时,有一位……”等等。其中,“有一位”是指不知道姓名、不为人知的一位。“有哼声习性者”:据说这个人喜欢吉兆,我慢很重,因为傲慢和嗔怒,看到任何不合意的东西就厌恶地发出“哼、哼”的声音走来走去,所以叫“有哼声习性者”,也有读作“huhukkajātika”的。“婆罗门”是指从种姓上说属于婆罗门。巴利
Tamhā samādhimhā vuṭṭhāsīti tato phalasamāpattisamādhito yathākālaparicchedaṃ vuṭṭhahi, vuṭṭhahitvā ca pana tattha evaṃ nisinne bhagavati eko brāhmaṇo taṃ gantvā pañhaṃ pucchi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘atha kho aññataro’’tiādi. Tattha aññataroti nāmagottavasena anabhiññāto apākaṭo eko. Huṃhuṅkajātikoti so kira diṭṭhamaṅgaliko mānathaddho mānavasena kodhavasena ca sabbaṃ avokkhajātikaṃ passitvā jigucchanto ‘‘huṃhu’’nti karonto vicarati, tasmā ‘‘huṃhuṅkajātiko’’ti vuccati, ‘‘huhukkajātiko’’tipi pāṭho. Brāhmaṇoti jātiyā brāhmaṇo.
“到世尊那里”是指世尊坐在哪个方向。这里的具格是表示处所。或者,是指应该从哪个方向去接近世尊,他就从那个方向去接近。另外,这里的具格是表示原因,意思是:天神和人们因为什么原因应该去接近世尊,他就因为那个原因去接近。那么,是什么原因应该去接近世尊呢?就像一位有大神力的医生,为了治疗被种种病苦逼迫的身体患病的大众一样,被种种烦恼病逼迫、心灵患病的天神和人们,为了治疗烦恼病,以听法、提问等因缘去接近世尊。因此,这位婆罗门也是想断除自己的疑惑才去接近的。巴利
Yena bhagavāti yassaṃ disāyaṃ bhagavā nisinno. Bhummatthe hi etaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ . Yena vā disābhāgena bhagavā upasaṅkamitabbo, tena disābhāgena upasaṅkami. Atha vā yenāti hetuatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, yena kāraṇena bhagavā devamanussehi upasaṅkamitabbo, tena kāraṇena upasaṅkamīti attho. Kena ca kāraṇena bhagavā upasaṅkamitabbo? Nānappakārarogadukkhābhipīḷitattā āturakāyehi mahājanehi mahānubhāvo bhisakko viya rogatikicchanatthaṃ, nānāvidhakilesabyādhipīḷitattā āturacittehi devamanussehi kilesabyādhitikicchanatthaṃ dhammassavanapañhapucchanādikāraṇehi bhagavā upasaṅkamitabbo. Tena ayampi brāhmaṇo attano kaṅkhaṃ chinditukāmo upasaṅkami.
走近之后:这是说明接近这个动作已经完成。或者也可以理解为,他到了那个地方之后,又到了比那里更靠近世尊的地方。欣然交谈:意思是平等地、正确地感到喜悦。世尊和他彼此之间,以“尊者身体还安好吗?还能维持生活吗?”这类话互相问候招待,因此产生了正当的喜悦。值得互相问候的:意思是值得欢喜、能够引发欢喜的。谈论:就是交谈对话。值得忆念的:意思是应当被记住、应当被善人们提起,或者日后应当回想的。交谈完毕之后:意思是把话说完之后。在一面:这是中性名词的表达方式,意思是在一个地方,也就是避开了正对面太近等六种坐处的过失之后,坐在一处。说了这话:说的是现在要说的“到底怎样才算”等这些话。巴利
Upasaṅkamitvāti upasaṅkamanapariyosānadīpanaṃ. Atha vā yaṃ ṭhānaṃ upasaṅkami, tatopi bhagavato samīpabhūtaṃ āsannataraṃ ṭhānaṃ upagantvāti attho. Sammodīti samaṃ sammā vā modi, bhagavā cānena, sopi bhagavatā ‘‘kacci bhoto khamanīyaṃ kacci yāpanīya’’ntiādinā paṭisanthārakaraṇavasena samappavattamodo ahosi. Sammodanīyanti sammodanārahaṃ sammodajananayoggaṃ. Kathanti kathāsallāpaṃ. Sāraṇīyanti saritabbayuttaṃ sādhujanehi pavattetabbaṃ, kālantare vā cintetabbaṃ. Vītisāretvāti niṭṭhāpetvā. Ekamantanti bhāvanapuṃsakaniddeso. Ekasmiṃ ṭhāne, atisammukhādike cha nisajjadose vajjetvā ekasmiṃ padeseti attho. Etadavocāti etaṃ idāni vattabbaṃ ‘‘kittāvatā nu kho’’tiādivacanaṃ avoca.
这里,“怎样才算”是问以什么为标准。“nu”是表示疑问的语气词。“kho”是用来补足音节的虚词。“尊”是婆罗门从种姓出身而来的称呼。正如经中所说:“若还有执取,就被叫作‘尊’的称呼者。”“乔达摩”是以姓氏来称呼世尊。可是,这位刚刚相逢的婆罗门,怎么知道世尊的姓氏呢?他并不是刚见面的。世尊在六年苦行期间,由随侍的五比丘陪伴着游行时,以及后来舍弃那种苦行,在优楼频螺的将军村独自一人托钵游行时,这位婆罗门都曾经见过世尊,也曾经和世尊交谈过。所以他回忆起以前五比丘称呼世尊的姓氏,就以“乔达摩尊者”用姓氏来称呼世尊。或者,从世尊出家、在阿诺摩河畔出家那时起,“沙门乔达摩”就像月亮和太阳一样广为人知,所以关于他如何知道世尊的姓氏,不必再去寻找理由。巴利
Tattha kittāvatāti kittakena pamāṇena. Nūti saṃsayatthe nipāto. Khoti padapūraṇe. Bhoti brāhmaṇānaṃ jātisamudāgataṃ ālapanaṃ. Tathā hi vuttaṃ – ‘‘bhovādi nāma so hoti, sace hoti sakiñcano’’ti (ma. ni. 2.457; dha. pa. 396). Gotamāti bhagavantaṃ gottena ālapati. Kathaṃ panāyaṃ brāhmaṇo sampatisamāgato bhagavato gottaṃ jānātīti? Nāyaṃ sampatisamāgato, chabbassāni padhānakaraṇakāle upaṭṭhahantehi pañcavaggiyehi saddhiṃ caramānopi, aparabhāge taṃ vataṃ chaḍḍetvā uruvelāyaṃ senanigame eko adutiyo hutvā piṇḍāya caramānopi tena brāhmaṇena diṭṭhapubbo ceva sallapitapubbo ca. Tena so pubbe pañcavaggiyehi gayhamānaṃ bhagavato gottaṃ anussaranto, ‘‘bho gotamā’’ti bhagavantaṃ gottena ālapati. Yato paṭṭhāya vā bhagavā mahābhinikkhamanaṃ nikkhamanto anomanadītīre pabbajito, tato pabhuti ‘‘samaṇo gotamo’’ti cando viya sūriyo viya ca pākaṭo paññāto, na tassa gottajānane kāraṇaṃ gavesitabbaṃ.
“能使人成为婆罗门的”是指那些使人成为婆罗门的法,意思是能造成婆罗门身份的法。在这里,“怎样才算”是问:以哪些法成为婆罗门,这些法的量是多少;“而哪些又是”则是问这些法本身的具体样貌。巴利
Brāhmaṇakaraṇāti brāhmaṇaṃ karontīti brāhmaṇakaraṇā, brāhmaṇabhāvakarāti attho. Ettha ca kittāvatāti etena yehi dhammehi brāhmaṇo hoti, tesaṃ dhammānaṃ parimāṇaṃ pucchati. Katame ca panāti iminā tesaṃ sarūpaṃ pucchati.
世尊了知他所问之义的究竟含义后,就在那时说出了这首优陀那偈,但并没有为那位婆罗门说法。为什么呢?因为那位婆罗门不是能接受教法的根器。事实正是如此:那位婆罗门听了这首偈颂之后,并没有生起对真理的现观。就像对这位婆罗门一样,对邪命外道优波迦宣说佛陀功德时也是如此。因为在转法轮之前,世尊所说的话,即使有别人听到,也只不过成为习行分而已,既不是有学分,也不是抉择分,就像为提谓和波利两位商人授皈依时那样。这就是法性。巴利
Etamatthaṃ viditvāti etaṃ tena puṭṭhassa pañhassa sikhāpattaṃ atthaṃ viditvā tāyaṃ velāyaṃ imaṃ udānaṃ udānesi, na pana tassa brāhmaṇassa dhammaṃ desesi. Kasmā? Dhammadesanāya abhājanabhāvato. Tathā hi tassa brāhmaṇassa imaṃ gāthaṃ sutvā na saccābhisamayo ahosi. Yathā ca imassa, evaṃ upakassa ājīvakassa buddhaguṇappakāsanaṃ. Dhammacakkappavattanato hi pubbabhāge bhagavatā bhāsitaṃ paresaṃ suṇantānampi tapussabhallikānaṃ saraṇadānaṃ viya vāsanābhāgiyameva jātaṃ, na sekkhabhāgiyaṃ, na nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ. Esā hi dhammatāti.
这里说的“真正的婆罗门”,是指因为舍断了恶法而成为婆罗门的人,而不是那种信奉吉兆、带着“哼”声等污秽恶法、仅仅因为出身就自称是婆罗门的人。这样的婆罗门,因为舍断了恶法、去除了“哼”声,所以叫“无哼声者”;因为没有贪等污垢,所以叫“无垢者”;因为心专注于修习,所以叫“调御者”,或者也可以说,因为以戒律约束自己、心得调伏,所以叫“调御者”;因为以四种道智这些“明”达到了行蕴的尽头——涅槃,或者说已经到达了诸明的终极,所以叫“明达终极者”;因为道的梵行已经圆满,所以叫“已住梵行者”。他可以如法地宣说梵论,也就是可以依法依理地说“我是婆罗门”。对于这样的人,在整个众生居住的世间,无论在任何地方、任何所缘上,都没有贪欲增盛、瞋恨增盛、愚痴增盛、我慢增盛、邪见增盛这些增盛,意思是说,这些已经被彻底断除,毫无剩余。巴利
Tattha yo brāhmaṇoti yo bāhitapāpadhammatāya brāhmaṇo, na diṭṭhamaṅgalikatāya huṃhuṅkārakasāvādipāpadhammayutto hutvā kevalaṃ jātimattakena brahmaññaṃ paṭijānāti. So brāhmaṇo bāhitapāpadhammattā huṃhuṅkārappahānena nihuṃhuṅko, rāgādikasāvābhāvena nikkasāvo, bhāvanānuyogayuttacittatāya yatatto, sīlasaṃyamena vā saṃyatacittatāya yatatto, catumaggañāṇasaṅkhātehi vedehi antaṃ saṅkhārapariyosānaṃ nibbānaṃ, vedānaṃ vā antaṃ gatattā vedantagū. Maggabrahmacariyassa vusitattā vusitabrahmacariyo, dhammena so brahmavādaṃ vadeyya ‘‘brāhmaṇo aha’’nti etaṃ vādaṃ dhammena ñāyena vadeyya. Yassa sakalalokasannivāsepi kuhiñci ekārammaṇepi rāgussado, dosussado, mohussado, mānussado, diṭṭhussadoti ime ussadā natthi, anavasesaṃ pahīnāti attho.
《婆罗门经》的注释巴利
5. Brāhmaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
5 第五,在舍卫城:就是在一座这样得名的城市里。这座城因为建在一位名叫萨婆咤的仙人居住过的地方,所以称为舍卫城,就像迦甘迪、摩甘迪那样得名。这是文字考据者的说法。不过注疏师们说:人们所受用、享用的一切,这里都有,所以叫舍卫城。又说,当商队聚集时,有人问这里有什么货物,回答说什么都有,根据这种说法,也叫舍卫城。巴利
5. Pañcame sāvatthiyanti evaṃnāmake nagare. Tañhi savatthassa nāma isino nivāsaṭṭhāne māpitattā sāvatthīti vuccati, yathā kākandī, mākandīti. Evaṃ tāva akkharacintakā. Aṭṭhakathācariyā pana bhaṇanti – yaṃkiñci manussānaṃ upabhogaparibhogaṃ sabbamettha atthīti sāvatthi. Satthasamāyoge ca kimettha bhaṇḍamatthīti pucchite sabbamatthītipi vacanaṃ upādāya sāvatthīti.
任何时候,一切生活用品都聚集在舍卫城;
因此,把一切资具都聚集起来,所以称为舍卫城。巴利
‘‘Sabbadā sabbūpakaraṇaṃ, sāvatthiyaṃ samohitaṃ; Tasmā sabbamupādāya, sāvatthīti pavuccatī’’ti. (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.14);
在舍卫城里,这是表示邻近的处所格。关于“祇园”:因为他战胜了自己的敌人,所以叫“祇多”;或者因为国王战胜敌人之后他才出生,所以叫“祇多”;又或者只是为了求吉祥,就给他取了这个名字,所以叫“祇多”。“能让人生起喜爱,所以叫园”,意思是:他凭自己的成就,让众生对他生起敬爱。或者,“园”是“乞求”的意思:园中各种花香令人陶醉,杜鹃等鸟类的鸣叫声声悦耳,微风吹动树枝和嫩叶,像在招手一样,仿佛在对众生说:“来吧,请享用我吧。”祇多的园,就是祇园。因为这座园是祇多王子种下、培育和守护的,他就是园主,所以称为祇园。在那祇园中。巴利
Tassaṃ sāvatthiyaṃ, samīpatthe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ. Jetavaneti attano paccatthike jinātīti jeto, raññā vā paccatthikajane jite jātoti jeto, maṅgalakamyatāya vā tassa evaṃ nāmameva katanti jeto. Vanayatīti vanaṃ, attano sampattiyā sattānaṃ attani bhattiṃ karoti uppādetīti attho. Vanuke iti vā vanaṃ, nānāvidhakusumagandhasammodamattakokilādivihaṅgavirutālāpehi mandamārutacalitarukkhasākhāpallavahatthehi ca ‘‘etha maṃ paribhuñjathā’’ti pāṇino yācati viyāti attho. Jetassa vanaṃ jetavanaṃ. Tañhi jetena kumārena ropitaṃ saṃvaddhitaṃ paripālitaṃ. Sova tassa sāmī ahosi, tasmā jetavananti vuccati, tasmiṃ jetavane.
在给孤独长者的园中:按父母给他取的名字,这位大长者叫须达多;不过,因为他一切欲乐都圆满,没有污垢和悭吝,又具备悲悯等功德,并且时时刻刻都布施食物给无依无靠的人,所以被称为给孤独。有情众生,尤其是出家修行的人,在这里得到特别的欢喜快乐,所以叫“园”;又因为花果等景致优美,以及具备不太远、不太近等五种住处条件的圆满,人们从各处来到这里,欢喜、非常欢喜,毫无厌倦地住下来,这就是“园”的意思。或者,因为这座园有这样的成就,即使人们到处走动,它也能把他们吸引到自己内部,让他们欢喜,所以叫“园”。这座园是给孤独居士从祇多王子手中,用一亿八千万金币铺满地面买下来的,又用一亿八千万金币建造住处,再用一亿八千万金币完成寺院大典,这样总共以五亿四千万金币的布施,奉献给以佛陀为首的僧团,所以被称为“给孤独长者的园”。在给孤独长者的那座园中。巴利
Anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāmeti mātāpitūhi gahitanāmavasena sudatto nāma so mahāseṭṭhi, sabbakāmasamiddhitāya pana vigatamalamaccheratāya karuṇādiguṇasamaṅgitāya ca niccakālaṃ anāthānaṃ piṇḍaṃ deti, tasmā anāthapiṇḍikoti vuccati. Āramanti ettha pāṇino visesena pabbajitāti ārāmo, pupphaphalādisobhāya nātidūranāccāsannatādipañcavidhasenāsanaṅgasampattiyā ca tato tato āgamma ramanti abhiramanti anukkaṇṭhitā hutvā vasantīti attho. Vuttappakārāya vā sampattiyā tattha tattha gatepi attano abbhantaraṃyeva ānetvā rametīti ārāmo. So hi anāthapiṇḍikena gahapatinā jetassa rājakumārassa hatthato aṭṭhārasahi hiraññakoṭīhi koṭisanthārena kiṇitvā aṭṭhārasahi hiraññakoṭīhi senāsanāni kārāpetvā aṭṭhārasahi hiraññakoṭīhi vihāramahaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā evaṃ catupaññāsahiraññakoṭipariccāgena buddhappamukhassa saṅghassa niyyātito, tasmā ‘‘anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāmo’’ti vuccati. Tasmiṃ anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme.
在这里,“在祇园”这个说法,是称扬先前的主人;“在给孤独长者的园中”这个说法,是称扬后来的主人。这两者都是通过说明两人布施的殊胜,来让想要积功德的人在将来效仿他们的做法。其中,祇多把卖地得到的一亿八千万金币,以及价值无数亿的树木,以建造门楼、殿堂等方式布施出去;给孤独长者则布施了五亿四千万金币。这样称述他们的布施,就是在表明“想积功德的人就是这样积功德的”,而说法者也是借此鼓励其他想积功德的人也去效仿他们。巴利
Ettha ca ‘‘jetavane’’ti vacanaṃ purimasāmiparikittanaṃ, ‘‘anāthapiṇḍikassa ārāme’’ti pacchimasāmiparikittanaṃ. Ubhayampi dvinnaṃ pariccāgavisesaparidīpanena puññakāmānaṃ āyatiṃ diṭṭhānugatiāpajjanatthaṃ. Tattha hi dvārakoṭṭhakapāsādakaraṇavasena bhūmivikkayaladdhā aṭṭhārasa hiraññakoṭiyo anekakoṭiagghanakā rukkhā ca jetassa pariccāgo, catupaññāsa koṭiyo anāthapiṇḍikassa. Iti tesaṃ pariccāgaparikittanena ‘‘evaṃ puññakāmā puññāni karontī’’ti dassento dhammabhaṇḍāgāriko aññepi puññakāme tesaṃ diṭṭhānugatiāpajjane niyojetīti.
这里可能会有人提出疑问:如果世尊住在舍卫城,那就不该说“在祇园”;如果住在祇园,那就不该说“在舍卫城”,因为一个人不可能同时住在两个地方。但不能这样看,我们不是已经说过“这是表示近处的处所格”吗?所以,祇园就在舍卫城附近,世尊住在那里时,就被说成“住在舍卫城,在祇园”。说“舍卫城”是为了指出托钵的村落,其余的话则是为了指出适合出家人居住的地方。巴利
Tattha siyā – yadi tāva bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ viharati, ‘‘jetavane’’ti na vattabbaṃ. Atha jetavane viharati, ‘‘sāvatthiya’’nti na vattabbaṃ. Na hi sakkā ubhayattha ekaṃ samayaṃ viharitunti. Na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, nanu avocumhā ‘‘samīpatthe etaṃ bhummavacana’’nti. Tasmā yadidaṃ sāvatthiyā samīpe jetavanaṃ, tattha viharanto ‘‘sāvatthiyaṃ viharati jetavane’’ti vutto. Gocaragāmanidassanatthaṃ hissa sāvatthivacanaṃ, pabbajitānurūpanivāsaṭṭhānadassanatthaṃ sesavacananti.
在“具寿舍利弗”等语句中,“具寿”是亲切的称呼。“ca”这个词表示集合。因为他是名叫色舍利的婆罗门女之子,所以叫舍利弗。“大目犍连”是表示敬意的称呼。因为他在种种殊胜功德上极为卓越,所以这位目犍连就叫大目犍连。“离婆多”是指住在枳树林的离婆多,不是疑离婆多。有一天,世尊坐在四众弟子中间说法,就像被红布环绕的金柱,像被珊瑚旗围绕的金山,像被九万只天鹅簇拥的持国天鹅王,又像被七宝闪耀的四部军队围绕的转轮王,被大比丘僧团所围绕,仿佛把月亮托举到天空正中。那时,这些上首弟子和大弟子们为了顶礼世尊的双足,前来接近。巴利
Āyasmā ca sāriputtotiādīsu āyasmāti piyavacanaṃ. Casaddo samuccayattho. Rūpasāriyā nāma brāhmaṇiyā puttoti sāriputto. Mahāmoggallānoti pūjāvacanaṃ. Guṇavisesehi mahanto moggallānoti hi mahāmoggallāno. Revatoti khadiravanikarevato, na kaṅkhārevato. Ekasmiñhi divase bhagavā rattasāṇiparikkhitto viya suvaṇṇayūpo, pavāḷadhajaparivārito viya suvaṇṇapabbato, navutihaṃsasahassaparivārito viya dhataraṭṭho haṃsarājā, sattaratanasamujjalāya caturaṅginiyā senāya parivārito viya cakkavatti rājā, mahābhikkhusaṅghaparivuto gaganamajjhe candaṃ uṭṭhāpento viya catunnaṃ parisānaṃ majjhe dhammaṃ desento nisinno hoti. Tasmiṃ samaye ime aggasāvakā mahāsāvakā ca bhagavato pāde vandanatthāya upasaṅkamiṃsu.
世尊召唤比丘们,意思是:世尊让围坐在自己身边的比丘们看见那些正走过来的尊者,然后开口说话。因为世尊看见这些具足戒、定、慧等功德,达到最上寂止,具备最上威仪的尊者走近时,内心充满欢喜,为了赞扬他们殊胜的功德,就对比丘们说:“比丘们,这些婆罗门来了;比丘们,这些婆罗门来了。”这是出于欢喜而重复,也可以理解为出于称赞。这样说是合理的。所谓“这样说”,就是指世尊这样称那些尊者为“婆罗门”的时候。有一位比丘,名字和姓氏都不为人所知,就坐在那个集会中。他出生于婆罗门家庭——确实是从拥有广大财富的大婆罗门家出家的。据说他心里这样想:“世间人说,只有父母双方家系都清净,并且完成了婆罗门的学习,才算是婆罗门,不是靠别的;可是世尊却称这些尊者为婆罗门。那我就去问世尊,婆罗门到底有什么特征。”世尊当时称那些长老为“婆罗门”,正是为了这个目的。因为“婆罗门”这个词,从词源上说,就是“诵习梵咒、赞颂梵天者”,这是种姓婆罗门的字源解释。而圣者们因为已经除掉了恶,所以是婆罗门。这确实已经说过:“除掉了恶,就是婆罗门;行平等行,就称为沙门。”后面还会说:“已经除掉了种种恶法。”巴利
Bhikkhū āmantesīti attānaṃ parivāretvā nisinnabhikkhū te āgacchante dassetvā abhāsi. Bhagavā hi te āyasmante sīlasamādhipaññādiguṇasampanne paramena upasamena samannāgate paramāya ākappasampattiyā yutte upasaṅkamante passitvā pasannamānaso tesaṃ guṇavisesaparikittanatthaṃ bhikkhū āmantesi ‘‘ete, bhikkhave, brāhmaṇā āgacchanti, ete, bhikkhave, brāhmaṇā āgacchantī’’ti. Pasādavasena etaṃ āmeḍitaṃ, pasaṃsāvasenātipi vattuṃ yuttaṃ. Evaṃ vutteti evaṃ bhagavatā te āyasmante ‘‘brāhmaṇā’’ti vutte. Aññataroti nāmagottena apākaṭo, tassaṃ parisāyaṃ nisinno eko bhikkhu. Brāhmaṇajātikoti brāhmaṇakule jāto. So hi uḷārabhogā brāhmaṇamahāsālakulā pabbajito. Tassa kira evaṃ ahosi ‘‘ime lokiyā ubhatosujātiyā brāhmaṇasikkhānipphattiyā ca brāhmaṇo hoti, na aññathāti vadanti, bhagavā ca ete āyasmante brāhmaṇāti vadati, handāhaṃ bhagavantaṃ brāhmaṇalakkhaṇaṃ puccheyya’’nti etadatthameva hi bhagavā tadā te there ‘‘brāhmaṇā’’ti abhāsi. Brahmaṃ aṇatīti brāhmaṇoti hi jātibrāhmaṇānaṃ nibbacanaṃ. Ariyā pana bāhitapāpatāya brāhmaṇā. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘bāhitapāpoti brāhmaṇo, samacariyā samaṇoti vuccatī’’ti (dha. pa. 388). Vakkhati ca ‘‘bāhitvā pāpake dhamme’’ti.
了知此义,是指从究竟意义上认清“婆罗门”一词的顶点即发髻的含义。诵出这首优陀那,是指他诵出了这首揭示究竟婆罗门本性的优陀那。巴利
Etamatthaṃ viditvāti etaṃ brāhmaṇasaddassa paramatthato sikhāpattamatthaṃ jānitvā. Imaṃ udānanti imaṃ paramatthabrāhmaṇabhāvadīpakaṃ udānaṃ udānesi.
在这里,“消除了”的意思是:把它放到外面去,从自己的心相续中移除,以彻底断除、舍弃的方式弃掉。“诸恶法”是指低劣的法:从恶行来说,是三种恶行的法;从心生起来说,是十二种不善心的生起;从业道来说,是十种不善业道;从生起的种种差别来说,是一切种类繁多、各不相同的不善法。“那些恒常具念而行者”是指:因为念力已经达到强盛圆满,所以在一切时中,对色等六种所缘都以持续安住于念的方式,成为具念的人,以四种威仪而行。这里因为提到了“念”,就应当知道也同时包含了正知。“已尽诸结者”是指:以四种圣道彻底断除了十种结,所以诸结已经灭尽。“佛陀”是指:以对四谛的觉悟而成为佛陀。而这种佛陀又分为三种:声闻佛陀、独觉佛、正自觉者;其中这里指的是声闻佛陀。“他们就是这世间的婆罗门”是指:他们以最胜的意义被称为婆罗门,是从圣洁的种姓而生,或者是已成就婆罗门身份的世尊的亲生子——在这有情世间中,从究竟意义上才叫婆罗门,并不是仅凭种姓家族,也不是仅凭蓄发等外表。这样,在这两部经中,宣说了能使人成为婆罗门的诸法,并使其达到阿罗汉果。不过,由于众生意乐不同,随着说法方式的善巧,名称上也各有差别,应当知道这就是说法上的不同。巴利
Tattha bāhitvāti bahi katvā, attano santānato nīharitvā samucchedappahānavasena pajahitvāti attho. Pāpake dhammeti lāmake dhamme, duccaritavasena tividhaduccaritadhamme, cittuppādavasena dvādasākusalacittuppāde, kammapathavasena dasākusalakammapathe, pavattibhedavasena anekabhedabhinne sabbepi akusaladhammeti attho. Ye caranti sadā satāti ye sativepullappattatāya sabbakālaṃ rūpādīsu chasupi ārammaṇesu satatavihāravasena satā satimanto hutvā catūhi iriyāpathehi caranti. Satiggahaṇeneva cettha sampajaññampi gahitanti veditabbaṃ. Khīṇasaṃyojanāti catūhipi ariyamaggehi dasavidhassa saṃyojanassa samucchinnattā parikkhīṇasaṃyojanā. Buddhāti catusaccasambodhena buddhā. Te ca pana sāvakabuddhā, paccekabuddhā , sammāsambuddhāti tividhā, tesu idha sāvakabuddhā adhippetā. Teve lokasmi brāhmaṇāti te seṭṭhatthena brāhmaṇasaṅkhāte dhamme ariyāya jātiyā jātā, brāhmaṇabhūtassa vā bhagavato orasaputtāti imasmiṃ sattaloke paramatthato brāhmaṇā nāma, na jātigottamattehi, na jaṭādhāraṇādimattena vāti attho. Evaṃ imesu dvīsu suttesu brāhmaṇakarā dhammā arahattaṃ pāpetvā kathitā, nānajjhāsayatāya pana sattānaṃ desanāvilāsena abhilāpanānattena desanānānattaṃ veditabbaṃ.
第六部 大迦叶经的注疏巴利
6. Mahākassapasuttavaṇṇanā
6 第六,“在王舍城”:就是在一座这样命名的城市里。那座城因为曾被大曼陀多王、大典尊等人占据,所以称为“王舍城”。也有人用别的说法来解释,比如“因为敌对诸王难以攻克,而成为坚固的居所,所以叫王舍城”等等。那些解释又怎样呢?这是那座城市的名字。不过,这座城在佛陀时代和转轮王时代是城市,在其他时候则是空废的,被夜叉占据,成为他们的住处。“在竹林栗鼠饲养处”:竹林是那座精舍的名字。据说,那座精舍周围有十八肘高的围墙,里面有适合佛陀居住的大香房,还有其他殿堂、楼阁、洞窟、讲堂、经行道、门屋等装饰,外面被竹林环绕,泛着青光,令人心旷神怡,因此称为“竹林”。又因为那里曾给栗鼠投放食物,所以称为“栗鼠饲养处”。传说过去有一位国王进入那座园林游玩,喝醉了酒,白天躺下睡着了。他的随从们以为“国王睡着了”,就被花果等吸引,四散走开了。这时,因为酒的气味,一条黑蛇从一棵树的树洞里爬出来,朝国王过来。树神看到后,心想“我要救国王的命”,就化作栗鼠的样子过去,在国王耳边发出声音。国王醒了过来,黑蛇就退回去了。国王看到后,知道“是这只栗鼠救了我的命”,便在那里设置了给栗鼠投放食物的地方,并宣布了安全保护令。因此,从那时起,那里就被称为“栗鼠饲养处”。所谓“栗鼠”,就是黑蛇的名称。就在那片竹林里的栗鼠饲养处。巴利
6. Chaṭṭhe rājagaheti evaṃnāmake nagare. Tañhi mahāmandhātumahāgovindādīhi pariggahitattā ‘‘rājagaha’’nti vuccati. ‘‘Durabhibhavanīyattā paṭirājūnaṃ gahabhūtanti rājagaha’’ntiādinā aññenettha pakārena vaṇṇayanti. Kintehi? Nāmametaṃ tassa nagarassa. Taṃ panetaṃ buddhakāle cakkavattikāle ca nagaraṃ hoti, sesakāle suññaṃ yakkhapariggahitaṃ tesaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhati. Veḷuvane kalandakanivāpeti veḷuvananti tassa vihārassa nāmaṃ. Taṃ kira aṭṭhārasahatthubbedhena pākārena parikkhittaṃ buddhassa bhagavato vasanānucchavikāya mahatiyā gandhakuṭiyā aññehi ca pāsādakuṭileṇamaṇḍapacaṅkamadvārakoṭṭhakādīhi paṭimaṇḍitaṃ bahi veḷūhi parikkhittaṃ ahosi nīlobhāsaṃ manoramaṃ, tena ‘‘veḷuvana’’nti vuccati. Kalandakānañcettha nivāpaṃ adaṃsu, tasmā ‘‘kalandakanivāpo’’ti vuccati. Pubbe kira aññataro rājā taṃ uyyānaṃ kīḷanatthaṃ paviṭṭho surāmadamatto divāseyyaṃ upagato supi, parijanopissa ‘‘sutto rājā’’ti pupphaphalādīhi palobhiyamāno ito cito ca pakkāmi. Atha surāgandhena aññatarasmā rukkhasusirā kaṇhasappo nikkhamitvā rañño abhimukho āgacchati. Taṃ disvā rukkhadevatā ‘‘rañño jīvitaṃ dassāmī’’ti kalandakavesena gantvā kaṇṇamūle saddamakāsi. Rājā paṭibujjhi, kaṇhasappo nivatto. So taṃ disvā ‘‘imāya kāḷakāya mama jīvitaṃ dinna’’nti kāḷakānaṃ nivāpaṃ tattha paṭṭhapesi, abhayaghosañca ghosāpesi. Tasmā tato paṭṭhāya taṃ ‘‘kalandakanivāpa’’nti saṅkhaṃ gataṃ. Kalandakāti hi kāḷakānaṃ nāmaṃ, tasmiṃ veḷuvane kalandakanivāpe.
大迦叶:因为具足了广大戒蕴等功德,所以是伟大的迦叶,称为大迦叶;另外,相对于童子迦叶长老,这位大长老才被称为“大迦叶”。在毕钵离窟中:据说那个洞窟门口附近有一棵毕钵离树,因此那个洞窟就被叫作“毕钵离窟”。在那毕钵离窟中。患病者:他有病,所以是患病者,意思就是生病者。痛苦者:与身体相关的苦已生起于他,所以是痛苦者,意思是已到达苦。重病者:就是病得很严重,但他以正念正知忍受了那场病。那时,世尊知道了这件事,就来到那里,诵说了觉支护卫经,长老的病就因此止息了。这件事在《觉支相应》中也有记载。巴利
Mahākassapoti mahantehi sīlakkhandhādīhi samannāgatattā mahanto kassapoti mahākassapo, apica kumārakassapattheraṃ upādāya ayaṃ mahāthero ‘‘mahākassapo’’ti vuccati. Pippaliguhāyanti tassā kira guhāya dvārasamīpe eko pippalirukkho ahosi, tena sā ‘‘pippaliguhā’’ti paññāyittha. Tassaṃ pippaliguhāyaṃ. Ābādhikoti ābādho assa atthīti ābādhiko, byādhikoti attho. Dukkhitoti kāyasannissitaṃ dukkhaṃ sañjātaṃ assāti dukkhito, dukkhappattoti attho. Bāḷhagilānoti adhimattagelañño, taṃ pana gelaññaṃ sato sampajāno hutvā adhivāsesi. Athassa bhagavā taṃ pavattiṃ ñatvā tattha gantvā bojjhaṅgaparittaṃ abhāsi, teneva therassa so ābādho vūpasami. Vuttañhetaṃ bojjhaṅgasaṃyutte –
那时,尊者大迦叶住在毕钵罗窟,正生病,痛苦,病得很重。傍晚时分,世尊从独处静坐中起来,前往尊者大迦叶那里,到了以后,在准备好的座位上坐下。坐下后,世尊对尊者大迦叶说:“迦叶,你还能忍受吗?还能撑得住吗?那些苦受在消退,而不是在加重吗?看得出在消退,而不是在加重吗?” “世尊,我忍受不了,也撑不住了。世尊,我的苦受非常强烈,在加重,没有消退;看得出在加重,没有消退。”巴利
‘‘Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā mahākassapo pippaliguhāyaṃ viharati ābādhiko dukkhito bāḷhagilāno. Atha kho bhagavā sāyanhasamayaṃ paṭisallānā vuṭṭhito yenāyasmā mahākassapo tenupasaṅkami, upasaṅkamitvā paññatte āsane nisīdi. Nisajja kho bhagavā…pe… etadavoca – ‘kacci te, kassapa, khamanīyaṃ, kacci yāpanīyaṃ, kacci dukkhā vedanā paṭikkamanti, no abhikkamanti, paṭikkamosānaṃ paññāyati no abhikkamo’ti? ‘Na me, bhante, khamanīyaṃ, na yāpanīyaṃ, bāḷhā me bhante, dukkhā vedanā abhikkamanti no paṭikkamanti, abhikkamosānaṃ paññāyati no paṭikkamo’ti.
迦叶,有这七种觉支,是我正确宣说的。它们被修习、被反复修习之后,能导向证智、正觉和涅槃。是哪七种呢?迦叶,念觉支是我正确宣说的,被修习、被反复修习之后,能导向证智、正觉和涅槃……迦叶,舍觉支是我正确宣说的,被修习、被反复修习之后,能导向证智、正觉和涅槃。迦叶,这七种觉支就是我正确宣说的,被修习、被反复修习之后,能导向证智、正觉和涅槃。世尊,确实是觉支!善逝,确实是觉支!巴利
‘‘‘Sattime, kassapa, bojjhaṅgā mayā sammadakkhātā bhāvitā bahulīkatā abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṃvattanti. Katame satta? Satisambojjhaṅgo kho, kassapa, mayā sammadakkhāto bhāvito bahulīkato abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṃvattati…pe… upekkhāsambojjhaṅgo kho, kassapa, mayā sammadakkhāto bhāvito bahulīkato abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṃvattati. Ime kho, kassapa, satta bojjhaṅgā mayā sammadakkhātā bhāvitā bahūlīkatā abhiññāya sambodhāya nibbānāya saṃvattantī’ti. ‘Taggha bhagavā bojjhaṅgā, taggha, sugata, bojjhaṅgā’’’ti.
世尊说了这番话。具寿大迦叶很满意,对世尊所说的话深感欢喜。具寿大迦叶就从那场病中起来了,具寿大迦叶的那场病就这样被断除了。巴利
‘‘Idamavoca bhagavā. Attamano āyasmā mahākassapo bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinandi. Vuṭṭhahi cāyasmā mahākassapo tamhā ābādhā, tathā pahīno cāyasmato mahākassapassa so ābādho ahosī’’ti.
因此,经中这样说:那时,具寿大迦叶过了一段时间,就从那场病中痊愈了。巴利
Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho āyasmā mahākassapo aparena samayena tamhā ābādhā vuṭṭhāsī’’ti.
“他那时就住在精舍里”:先前生病那几天,他吃了同住比丘们送来的钵食,就一直待在精舍里。后来病好了,他心里想:“我何不进王舍城去乞食呢?” “约五百位天女”:就是帝释天王身边的五百名侍女,都是鸡脚天女。“她们一心想要”:她们想着“我们要把钵食供养给长老”,于是备好了五百份钵食,用金钵盛着,站在半路上,说:“尊者,请收下这份钵食,请摄受我们吧!”就这样一心一意地忙着供养钵食。所以经文说:“为了让尊者大迦叶得到钵食。”巴利
Etadahosīti pubbe gelaññadivasesu saddhivihārikehi upanītaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñjitvā vihāre eva ahosi. Athassa tamhā ābādhā vuṭṭhitassa etaṃ ‘‘yaṃnūnāhaṃ rājagahaṃ piṇḍāya paviseyya’’nti parivitakko ahosi. Pañcamattāni devatāsatānīti sakkassa devarañño paricārikā pañcasatā kakuṭapādiniyo accharāyo. Ussukkaṃ āpannāni hontīti therassa piṇḍapātaṃ dassāmāti pañcapiṇḍapātasatāni sajjetvā suvaṇṇabhājanehi ādāya antarāmagge ṭhatvā, ‘‘bhante, imaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ gaṇhatha, saṅgahaṃ no karothā’’ti vadamānā piṇḍapātadāne yuttappayuttāni honti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘āyasmato mahākassapassa piṇḍapātappaṭilābhāyā’’ti.
帝释天王知道了长老的心念,就派那些天女去,说:你们去给大迦叶长老供养团食,为自己建立一个依靠吧。他这样想:如果这些天女都去了,也许长老会接受其中某一位手里的团食,那对她就会带来长远的利益和安乐。长老拒绝了她们。她们说:尊者,请接受我的团食,请接受我的团食吧!长老说:你们走吧,你们是造过福、有大受用的,我要摄受那些贫苦的人。她们又说:尊者,请不要舍弃我们,请摄受我们吧!长老再次拒绝,她们还是不肯离开,继续恳求。长老说:你们不知道自己是谁吗?走开!说完弹了个响指。那些天女听到长老的响指声,吓得站都站不住,逃回天界去了。因此经文说:拒绝了约五百位天女之后。巴利
Sakko kira devarājā therassa cittappavattiṃ ñatvā tā accharāyo uyyojesi ‘‘gacchatha tumhe ayyassa mahākassapattherassa piṇḍapātaṃ datvā attano patiṭṭhaṃ karothā’’ti. Evaṃ hissa ahosi ‘‘imāsu sabbāsu gatāsu kadāci ekissāpi hatthato piṇḍapātaṃ thero paṭiggaṇheyya, taṃ tassā bhavissati dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāyā’’ti. Paṭikkhipi thero, ‘‘bhante , mayhaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ gaṇhatha, mayhaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti vadantiyo ‘‘gacchatha tumhe katapuññā mahābhogā, ahaṃ duggatānaṃ saṅgahaṃ karissāmī’’ti vatvā, ‘‘bhante, mā no nāsetha, saṅgahaṃ no karothā’’ti vadantiyo punapi paṭikkhipitvā punapi apagantuṃ anicchamānā yācantiyo ‘‘na attano pamāṇaṃ jānātha, apagacchathā’’ti vatvā accharaṃ pahari. Tā therassa accharāsaddaṃ sutvā santajjitā ṭhātuṃ asakkontiyo palāyitvā devalokameva gatā. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘pañcamattāni devatāsatāni paṭikkhipitvā’’ti.
午前时分,指的是上午的某一个时刻,某一段时间。穿好下衣,是按照在寺院里换衣的方式,把下衣牢牢穿好。拿了钵和衣,就是披好袈裟,用手拿起钵。为了乞食而进入,就是为了托钵乞食而走进城中。贫民巷,是穷苦人居住的地方。穷巷,是因为财富耗尽而变得可怜的人住的地方。织工巷,是织布工匠住的地方。世尊看见了,是怎么看见的呢?世尊坐在竹林精舍里,以天眼观察,心想:“我的法子迦叶已经从病中痊愈了,现在在做什么呢?”就这样看见了。巴利
Pubbaṇhasamayanti pubbaṇhe ekaṃ samayaṃ, ekasmiṃ kāle. Nivāsetvāti vihāranivāsanaparivattanavasena nivāsanaṃ daḷhaṃ nivāsetvā. Pattacīvaramādāyāti cīvaraṃ pārupitvā pattaṃ hatthena gahetvā. Piṇḍāya pāvisīti piṇḍapātatthāya pāvisi. Daliddavisikhāti duggatamanussānaṃ vasanokāso. Kapaṇavisikhāti bhogapārijuññappattiyā dīnamanussānaṃ vāso. Pesakāravisikhāti tantavāyavāso. Addasā kho bhagavāti kathaṃ addasa? ‘‘Ābādhā vuṭṭhito mama putto kassapo kinnu kho karotī’’ti āvajjento veḷuvane nisinno eva bhagavā dibbacakkhunā addasa.
了知此义:这里说的是,大迦叶尊者拒绝了五百位天女送来的天界团食——那团食有种种羹汤、种种菜肴——而奉行护持贫苦人的修行;他了知了这一义理。宣说此优陀那:他宣说了这首优陀那,这首优陀那通过开显最上少欲,彰显了漏尽者如如之威德。巴利
Etamatthaṃviditvāti yāyaṃ āyasmato mahākassapassa pañcahi accharāsatehi upanītaṃ anekasūpaṃ anekabyañjanaṃ dibbapiṇḍapātaṃ paṭikkhipitvā kapaṇajanānuggahappaṭipatti vuttā, etamatthaṃ jānitvā. Imaṃ udānanti imaṃ paramappicchatādassanamukhena khīṇāsavassa tādībhāvānubhāvadīpakaṃ udānaṃ udānesi.
在这里,“不养他人”的意思是:养活他人者就是“养他人”,不是这样则是“不养他人”;由于没有另一个需要自己养活的别人,所以他没有同伴,是独一的意思。这显示出这位长老容易养活。长老确实只靠用来遮身的衣服和填肚子的团食养活自己,成为最上少欲而住,不养活亲戚朋友等任何人,因为他在任何地方都不执著。或者也可以说,由于不需要由别人来养活,所以是“不养他人”。一个人如果只依止同一位施主而得到四种资具,那就只是专一受用,并不叫“不养他人”。而这位长老按照《法句经》“如蜂从花”偈所说的方式,只凭脚力去乞食,在诸家中常如新来,以混合的食物维持生活。因此,世尊以月喻之道称赞他。“被了知”:即被充分了知,因真实功德而声名远播;或者正因为这种不养他人的状态,以少欲知足而为人所知。又或者说,“不被知”是因为彻底断除了渴爱,没有为了利养、恭敬、名声而让人知道自己,所以不为人知。未离渴爱的恶欲者,则会以欺诈、希求敬重的方式显露自己。“已调御”:由于以六支舍调伏诸根,达到最上的调御,所以是已调御。“住立于坚实中”:安住于解脱的坚实,或者说安住于无学戒蕴等戒等坚实之中。“漏尽者、已吐弃过失者”:由于完全断尽了欲漏等四种漏,所以是漏尽者。正因如此,由于彻底吐弃了贪等过失,所以是已吐弃过失者。“我说他是婆罗门”:对于具备如上所说功德的究竟婆罗门,我说他是婆罗门。这里也应当依照前面所说的方式,理解教说的种种不同。巴利
Tattha anaññaposinti aññaṃ posetīti aññaposī, na aññaposī anaññaposī, attanā posetabbassa aññassa abhāvena adutiyo, ekakoti attho. Tena therassa subharataṃ dasseti. Thero hi kāyaparihārikena cīvarena kucchiparihārikena ca piṇḍapātena attānameva posento paramappiccho hutvā viharati, aññaṃ ñātimittādīsu kañci na poseti katthaci alaggabhāvato. Atha vā aññena aññatarena posetabbatāya abhāvato anaññaposī. Yo hi ekasmiṃyeva paccayadāyake paṭibaddhacatupaccayo so anaññaposī nāma na hoti ekāyattavuttito . Thero pana ‘‘yathāpi bhamaro puppha’’nti (dha. pa. 49) gāthāya vuttanayena jaṅghābalaṃ nissāya piṇḍāya caranto kulesu niccanavo hutvā missakabhattena yāpeti. Tathā hi naṃ bhagavā candūpamappaṭipadāya thomesi. Aññātanti abhiññātaṃ, yathābhuccaguṇehi patthaṭayasaṃ, teneva vā anaññaposibhāvena appicchatāsantuṭṭhitāhi ñātaṃ. Atha vā aññātanti sabbaso pahīnataṇhatāya lābhasakkārasilokanikāmanahetu attānaṃ jānāpanavasena na ñātaṃ. Avītataṇho hi pāpiccho kuhakatāya sambhāvanādhippāyena attānaṃ jānāpeti. Dantanti chaḷaṅgupekkhāvasena indriyesu uttamadamanena dantaṃ. Sāre patiṭṭhitanti vimuttisāre avaṭṭhitaṃ, asekkhasīlakkhandhādike vā sīlādisāre patiṭṭhitaṃ. Khīṇāsavaṃ vantadosanti kāmāsavādīnaṃ catunnaṃ āsavānaṃ anavasesaṃ pahīnattā khīṇāsavaṃ. Tato eva rāgādidosānaṃ sabbaso vantattā vantadosaṃ. Tamahaṃ brūmi brāhmaṇanti taṃ yathāvuttaguṇaṃ paramatthabrāhmaṇaṃ ahaṃ brāhmaṇanti vadāmīti. Idhāpi heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva desanānānattaṃ veditabbaṃ.
7. 《阿迦迦罗波迦经》的注释巴利
7. Ajakalāpakasuttavaṇṇanā
7 第七,在名叫波婆的力士王城中。在阿迦罗婆迦支提:因为那个地方被名叫阿迦罗婆迦的亚卡占据,所以成了人们敬奉的地方,因此得了“阿迦罗婆迦”这个名字。据说,那个亚卡是把山羊捆成束,连同成束的山羊一起接受祭品,不用别的方式,所以被称为“阿迦罗婆迦”。也有人说:他像引诱山羊一样引诱众生,所以叫“阿迦罗婆迦”。据说众生把祭品送去,当他发出羊叫声时献上祭品,他就满意,因此被称为“阿迦罗婆迦”。那个亚卡有大威神力,粗暴凶恶,又常住在那里,所以人们敬奉那个地方,时常献上祭品。因此说“在阿迦罗婆迦支提”。在阿迦罗婆迦亚卡的住所:指那个亚卡的宫殿。巴利
7. Sattame pāvāyanti evaṃnāmake mallarājūnaṃ nagare. Ajakalāpake cetiyeti ajakalāpakena nāma yakkhena pariggahitattā ‘‘ajakalāpaka’’nti laddhanāme manussānaṃ cittīkataṭṭhāne . So kira yakkho aje kalāpe katvā bandhanena ajakoṭṭhāsena saddhiṃ baliṃ paṭicchati, na aññathā, tasmā ‘‘ajakalāpako’’ti paññāyittha. Keci panāhu – ajake viya satte lāpetīti ajakalāpakoti. Tassa kira sattā baliṃ upanetvā yadā ajasaddaṃ katvā baliṃ upaharanti, tadā so tussati, tasmā ‘‘ajakalāpako’’ti vuccatīti. So pana yakkho ānubhāvasampanno kakkhaḷo pharuso tattha ca sannihito, tasmā taṃ ṭhānaṃ manussā cittiṃ karonti, kālena kālaṃ baliṃ upaharanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ajakalāpake cetiye’’ti. Ajakalāpakassa yakkhassa bhavaneti tassa yakkhassa vimāne.
那时,据说导师为了调伏那个夜叉,傍晚时分独自一人,没有同伴,拿着衣钵来到阿迦罗婆迦夜叉的住所门口,向他的守门人请求进去。守门人说:尊者,阿迦罗婆迦夜叉很凶暴,对沙门或婆罗门都不恭敬,所以您自己看着办吧,但我不向他通报是不妥当的。说完,他立刻像风一样迅速地赶到正在参加夜叉集会的阿迦罗婆迦那里。导师进入住所,在阿迦罗婆迦的凉亭里已经铺好的座位上坐下。夜叉的妃嫔们来到导师面前,顶礼后站在一旁。导师为她们作了应时的法义开示。因此经文说:在波婆,住在阿迦罗婆迦支提的阿迦罗婆迦夜叉的住所中。巴利
Tadā kira satthā taṃ yakkhaṃ dametukāmo sāyanhasamaye eko adutiyo pattacīvaraṃ ādāya ajakalāpakassa yakkhassa bhavanadvāraṃ gantvā tassa dovārikaṃ bhavanapavisanatthāya yāci. So ‘‘kakkhaḷo, bhante, ajakalāpako yakkho, samaṇoti vā brāhmaṇoti vā gāravaṃ na karoti, tasmā tumhe eva jānātha, mayhaṃ pana tassa anārocanaṃ na yutta’’nti tāvadeva yakkhasamāgamaṃ gatassa ajakalāpakassa santikaṃ vātavegena agamāsi. Satthā antobhavanaṃ pavisitvā ajakalāpakassa nisīdanamaṇḍape paññattāsane nisīdi. Yakkhassa orodhā satthāraṃ upasaṅkamitvā vanditvā ekamantaṃ aṭṭhaṃsu. Satthā tāsaṃ kālayuttaṃ dhammiṃ kathaṃ kathesi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘pāvāyaṃ viharati ajakalāpake cetiye ajakalāpakassa yakkhassa bhavane’’ti.
那时,萨陀山夜叉和雪山夜叉正从阿迦罗婆迦住所的上方经过,要去参加夜叉集会。他们发现自己走不过去,就琢磨:“这到底是什么原因?”他们看见世尊正坐在阿迦罗婆迦的住所里,于是就到那里去,顶礼世尊,请求说:“尊者,我们要去参加夜叉集会了。”然后右绕世尊,离开了。到了夜叉集会,他们见到阿迦罗婆迦,高兴地对他说:“贤友阿迦罗婆迦,你真有福气!在你的住所里,坐着这位包括天界在内的世间最上之人——世尊。你快去亲近世尊,侍奉他,听他说法吧!”阿迦罗婆迦听了他们的话,心想:“这些家伙在说那个秃头沙门坐在我住所里。”他被怒火冲昏了头,想:“今天我要跟这个沙门打一架。”于是从夜叉集会中站起来,抬起右脚,一脚踩向那座约六十由旬大的山顶,山顶顿时裂成两半。这里其余该说的内容,应当按照《阿罗婆迦经注释》里所讲的方式来理解。巴利
Tasmiṃ samaye sātāgirahemavatā ajakalāpakassa bhavanamatthakena yakkhasamāgamaṃ gacchantā attano gamane asampajjamāne ‘‘kiṃ nu kho kāraṇa’’nti āvajjentā satthāraṃ ajakalāpakassa bhavane nisinnaṃ disvā tattha gantvā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā ‘‘mayaṃ, bhante, yakkhasamāgamaṃ gamissāmā’’ti āpucchitvā padakkhiṇaṃ katvā gatā yakkhasannipāte ajakalāpakaṃ disvā tuṭṭhiṃ pavedayiṃsu ‘‘lābhā te, āvuso, ajakalāpaka, yassa te bhavane sadevake loke aggapuggalo bhagavā nisinno, upasaṅkamitvā bhagavantaṃ payirupāsassu, dhammañca suṇāhī’’ti. So tesaṃ kathaṃ sutvā ‘‘ime tassa muṇḍakassa samaṇakassa mama bhavane nisinnabhāvaṃ kathentī’’ti kodhābhibhūto hutvā ‘‘ajja mayhaṃ tena samaṇena saddhiṃ saṅgāmo bhavissatī’’ti cintetvā yakkhasannipātato uṭṭhahitvā dakkhiṇaṃ pādaṃ ukkhipitvā saṭṭhiyojanamattaṃ pabbatakūṭaṃ akkami, taṃ bhijjitvā dvidhā ahosi. Sesaṃ ettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ āḷavakasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.246) āgatanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
阿迦罗婆迦的集会确实和阿罗婆迦的集会相似,只是没有问难和解答,以及从住处三次出去又进来这些情节。因为阿迦罗婆迦夜叉一来就想着:“我要用这些手段把这个沙门赶走!”于是他兴起旋风等九种暴雨,却根本没法让世尊动上分毫。他又变出各种手持兵器、极其恐怖的鬼众,带着这些鬼众走近世尊,整夜不停地来回走动,施加种种骚扰,可还是没法让世尊从坐的地方移动一根毫毛。他仅仅因为“这个沙门没跟我打招呼就进我住处坐下”这一点,就气得浑身冒火。那时,世尊知道他心里的想法,心想:“就像捅破一条恶狗的鼻子里的胆汁,只会让它更凶;同样,这个夜叉对我坐在这里心生嗔恼。我干脆出去吧。”于是世尊自己从住处出来,坐在露天的地方。所以经文说:“那时,世尊在黑夜的暗冥中,坐在露天处。”巴利
Ajakalāpakassa samāgamo hi āḷavakasamāgamasadisova ṭhapetvā pañhakaraṇaṃ vissajjanaṃ bhavanato tikkhattuṃ nikkhamanaṃ pavesanañca. Ajakalāpako hi āgacchantoyeva ‘‘etehiyeva taṃ samaṇaṃ palāpessāmī’’ti vātamaṇḍalādike navavasse samuṭṭhāpetvā tehi bhagavato calanamattampi kātuṃ asakkonto nānāvidhappaharaṇahatthe ativiya bhayānakarūpe bhūtagaṇe nimminitvā tehi saddhiṃ bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā antanteneva caranto sabbarattiṃ nānappakāraṃ vippakāraṃ katvāpi bhagavato kiñci kesaggamattampi nisinnaṭṭhānato calanaṃ kātuṃ nāsakkhi. Kevalaṃ pana ‘‘ayaṃ samaṇo maṃ anāpucchā mayhaṃ bhavanaṃ pavisitvā nisīdatī’’ti kodhavasena pajjali. Athassa bhagavā cittappavattiṃ ñatvā ‘‘seyyathāpi nāma caṇḍassa kukkurassa nāsāya pittaṃ bhindeyya, evaṃ so bhiyyosomattāya caṇḍataro assa, evamevāyaṃ yakkho mayi idha nisinne cittaṃ padūseti, yaṃnūnāhaṃ bahi nikkhameyya’’nti sayameva bhavanato nikkhamitvā abbhokāse nisīdi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘tena kho pana samayena bhagavā rattandhakāratimisāyaṃ abbhokāse nisinno hotī’’ti.
其中,“黑夜的暗冥”是指夜间的黑暗与昏昧,也就是眼识无法生起的浓重黑暗。据说,那时正有具足四支的黑暗笼罩。“云神”则洒落着点点滴滴的细雨。这时,亚卡心想:“我要用这声音来威吓这位沙门,把他赶走。”于是来到世尊近前,发出“akkulo”等声音来恐吓他。因此经文说:“尔时,阿迦罗婆迦……”等。其中,“怖畏”是指心被惊慑;“惊悚”是指大腿僵直、身体战栗的状态;“毛发竖立”是指汗毛倒竖的状态。这三个词都是在显示怖畏的生起。“走近”:为什么这个亚卡怀着这样的意图走近呢?难道他之前没有制造过自己能制造的扰害吗?确实制造过。但他这样想:“在精舍中,当那位沙门处于安稳、坚固的地方时,我丝毫奈何不了他;现在他到了外面,我这样威吓之后就能把他赶走。”因为此亚卡把自己的住处误认为“坚固之地”,以为“那位沙门只是因为待在那里才不害怕的”。巴利
Tattha rattandhakāratimisāyanti rattiyaṃ andhakaraṇatamasi, cakkhuviññāṇuppattivirahite bahalandhakāreti attho. Caturaṅgasamannāgato kira tadā andhakāro pavattīti. Devoti megho ekamekaṃ phusitakaṃ udakabinduṃ pāteti. Atha yakkho ‘‘iminā saddena tāsetvā imaṃ samaṇaṃ palāpessāmī’’ti bhagavato samīpaṃ gantvā ‘‘akkulo’’tiādinā taṃ bhiṃsanaṃ akāsi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘atha kho ajakalāpako’’tiādi. Tattha bhayanti cittutrāsaṃ, chambhitattanti ūrutthambhakasarīrassa chambhitabhāvaṃ. Lomahaṃsanti lomānaṃ pahaṭṭhabhāvaṃ, tīhipi padehi bhayuppattimeva dasseti. Upasaṅkamīti kasmā panāyaṃ evamadhippāyo upasaṅkami, nanu pubbe attanā kātabbaṃ vippakāraṃ akāsīti? Saccamakāsi, taṃ panesa ‘‘antobhavane khemaṭṭhāne thirabhūmiyaṃ ṭhitassa na kiñci kātuṃ asakkhi, idāni bahi ṭhitaṃ evaṃ bhiṃsāpetvā palāpetuṃ sakkā’’ti maññamāno upasaṅkami. Ayañhi yakkho attano bhavanaṃ ‘‘thirabhūmī’’ti maññati, ‘‘tattha ṭhitattā ayaṃ samaṇo na bhāyatī’’ti ca.
他连着三次发出“akkulo pakkulo”的声音,做出“akkulapakkulika”这种吼叫——也就是说,他为了吓唬人,三次发出“akkulo pakkulo”这样的声音。这其实是一种模仿声音的词。那时,那个夜叉像是要把须弥山掀起来、把大地翻过来一样,用极大的气势吼叫,那声音就像上百道霹雳同时炸响在一处,又像各地大象的吼声、鬃毛狮子的狮吼、夜叉的嘶吼、鬼怪的狂笑、阿修罗的拍掌声、天王帝释的金刚霹雳声。因为他的声音深沉、扩散得广、又极其恐怖,仿佛在嘲笑并压过其他一切声音,像坏劫时大风轮发出的巨响,像要把凡人的心脏撕裂一样,是一种极其可怕的咆哮,音节含混不清。他心想:“用这个把这沙门吓跑。”就这样三次发出自己的夜叉吼声。他每发出一次声音,群山就崩落崖石;从大林之王以下,所有树木、藤蔓、灌木丛的叶、花、果都凋落;纵广三千由旬的雪山王也震动、剧烈震动、不停震动;从地居天开始,大多数天神都生起了恐惧、惊骇、毛发竖立,更不用说人类了。其余无足、二足、四足的众生,也像大地裂开时那样,出现了极大的惊恐,整个阎浮提大地爆发出一片巨大的喧哗。可是世尊连那声音“是什么”都不去理会,一动不动地坐着,并决意:“不要让任何人因为这个受到障碍。”巴利
Tikkhattuṃ ‘‘akkulo pakkulo’’ti akkulapakkulikaṃ akāsīti tayo vāre ‘‘akkulo pakkulo’’ti bhiṃsāpetukāmatāya evarūpaṃ saddaṃ akāsi. Anukaraṇasaddo hi ayaṃ. Tadā hi so yakkho sineruṃ ukkhipanto viya mahāpathaviṃ parivattento viya ca mahatā ussāhena asanisatasaddasaṅghāṭaṃ viya ekasmiṃ ṭhāne puñjīkataṃ hutvā viniccharantaṃ disāgajānaṃ hatthigajjitaṃ, kesarasīhānaṃ sīhaninnādaṃ , yakkhānaṃ hiṃkārasaddaṃ, bhūtānaṃ aṭṭahāsaṃ, asurānaṃ apphoṭanaghosaṃ , indassa devarañño vajiranigghātanigghosaṃ, attano gambhīratāya vipphārikatāya bhayānakatāya ca avasesasaddaṃ avahasantamiva abhibhavantamiva ca kappavuṭṭhānamahāvātamaṇḍalikāya vinigghosaṃ puthujjanānaṃ hadayaṃ phālentaṃ viya mahantaṃ paṭibhayanigghosaṃ abyattakkharaṃ tikkhattuṃ attano yakkhagajjitaṃ gajji ‘‘etena imaṃ samaṇaṃ bhiṃsāpetvā palāpessāmī’’ti. Yaṃ yaṃ niccharati, tena tena pabbatā papaṭikaṃ muñciṃsu, vanappatijeṭṭhake upādāya sabbesu rukkhalatāgumbesu pattaphalapupphāni sīdayiṃsu, tiyojanasahassavitthatopi himavantapabbatarājā saṅkampi sampakampi sampavedhi, bhummadevatā ādiṃ katvā yebhuyyena devatānampi ahudeva bhayaṃ chambhitattaṃ lomahaṃso, pageva manussānaṃ. Aññesañca apadadvipadacatuppadānaṃ mahāpathaviyā undriyanakālo viya mahatī vibhiṃsanakā ahosi, sakalasmiṃ jambudīpatale mahantaṃ kolāhalaṃ udapādi. Bhagavā pana taṃ saddaṃ ‘‘kimī’’ti amaññamāno niccalo nisīdi, ‘‘mā kassaci iminā antarāyo hotū’’ti adhiṭṭhāsi.
不过,因为那个声音是以“akkula pakkula”这样的方式传到众生耳朵里的,所以就按模仿它的方式说成“akkulo pakkulo”;又因为那个夜叉在发出这种吼声时,有做出“akkulapakkula”这种行为,于是便概括成“作了akkulapakkulika”。有些论师则说:“由于‘ākulabyākula’这两个词是以同义词的方式来表达,所以这个声音被说成‘akkulo bakkulo’,就像用‘ekaṃ ekaka’来表示‘一个一个’那样。”因为第一次出生时,仅以最初生起的形态产生,所以叫“ākula”,有“混乱”等意思;给它加上ka音,再把元音缩短,就成了“akkula”。而第二次出生时,则叫“bakkula”。这里的“kula”一词,是“种类”的意思,就像在“kolaṃkola”等词里那样。按照前面所说的意图来用词,第一个词指的是胎生、狮子、老虎等,第二个词指的是卵生、毒蛇、黑蛇等。因此,夜叉用这两个词表达的意思是:像狮子等那样,或者像毒蛇等那样,“我是来取你性命的”。这是另一种说法。还有一些论师则读作“akkhulo bhakkhulo”,并解释说:“能让人‘akkhetuṃ’,也就是耗尽、灭尽、破坏,并令之‘ulati’,也就是运转、持续,所以叫‘akkhulo’;能让人‘bhakkhituṃ’,也就是吃、啖,并令之‘ulati’,所以叫‘bhakkhulo’。那这又是谁呢?是夜叉、罗刹、毕舍遮、狮子、老虎等当中任何一个给人带来祸害的。”这里也应当按照前面所说的方式去理解其意图的衔接。巴利
Yasmā pana so saddo ‘‘akkula pakkula’’ iti iminā ākārena sattānaṃ sotapathaṃ agamāsi, tasmā tassa anukaraṇavasena ‘‘akkulo pakkulo’’ti, yakkhassa ca tassaṃ nigghosanicchāraṇāyaṃ akkulapakkulakaraṇaṃ atthīti katvā ‘‘akkulapakkulikaṃ akāsī’’ti saṅgahaṃ āropayiṃsu. Keci pana ‘‘ākulabyākula iti padadvayassa pariyāyābhidhānavasena akkulo bakkuloti ayaṃ saddo vutto’’ti vadanti yathā ‘‘ekaṃ ekaka’’nti. Yasmā ekavāraṃ jāto paṭhamuppattivaseneva nibbattattā ākuloti ādiattho ākāro, tassa ca kakārāgamaṃ katvā rassattaṃ katanti. Dve vāre pana jāto bakkulo, kulasaddo cettha jātipariyāyo kolaṃkolotiādīsu viya. Vuttaadhippāyānuvidhāyī ca saddappayogoti paṭhamena padena jalābujasīhabyagghādayo, dutiyena aṇḍajaāsīvisakaṇhasappādayo vuccanti, tasmā sīhādiko viya āsīvisādiko viya ca ‘‘ahaṃ te jīvitahārako’’ti imaṃ atthaṃ yakkho padadvayena dassetīti aññe. Apare pana ‘‘akkhulo bhakkhulo’’ti pāḷiṃ vatvā ‘‘akkhetuṃ khepetuṃ vināsetuṃ ulati pavattetīti akkhulo, bhakkhituṃ khādituṃ ulatīti bhakkhulo. Ko paneso? Yakkharakkhasapisācasīhabyagghādīsu aññataro yo koci manussānaṃ anatthāvaho’’ti tassa atthaṃ vadanti. Idhāpi pubbe vuttanayeneva adhippāyayojanā veditabbā.
沙门,这是你的鬼。夜叉变出一个巨大可怕的身形,站在世尊面前,针对自己说:喂,沙门,那个吃你肉的鬼就在你跟前呢。巴利
Esote, samaṇa, pisācoti ‘‘ambho, samaṇa, tava pisitāsano pisāco upaṭṭhito’’ti mahantaṃ bheravarūpaṃ abhinimminitvā bhagavato purato ṭhatvā attānaṃ sandhāya yakkho vadati.
世尊彻底看透了这件事:那夜叉正用身体和言语制造种种混乱。他也由此完全明白,自己在世间法上无烦恼染污,而这正是他不可能被战胜的原因。就在那个当下,也就是夜叉正在制造混乱的时候,世尊不把混乱当回事,为了显示法的威力——也就是他不计较混乱的根本原因——说出了这段优陀那。巴利
Etamatthaṃviditvāti etaṃ tena yakkhena kāyavācāhi pavattiyamānaṃ vippakāraṃ. Tena ca attano anabhibhavanīyassa hetubhūtaṃ lokadhammesu nirupakkilesataṃ sabbākārato viditvā. Tāyaṃ velāyanti tassaṃ vippakārakaraṇavelāyaṃ. Imaṃ udānanti taṃ vippakāraṃ agaṇetvā assa agaṇanahetubhūtaṃ dhammānubhāvadīpakaṃ imaṃ udānaṃ udānesi.
在这里,“当在自己的诸法中”是指在某个时候,在被称为自身生命体的五取蕴诸法中。“到彼岸者”是指因为遍知通达的圆满而到达彼岸;也正是因此,对于作为它们原因的集,对于以不再生起为特征的灭,以及对于导向灭的道,因为断、证、修的三种通达圆满而到达彼岸。“成为婆罗门”是指像这样因为彻底舍弃了恶,所以名为婆罗门;也就是在彻底了知自身生命体时,也就通达了四圣谛。经中也这样说:“我就在这带有想、带有心、只有一寻大的身体里,安立世间和世间集……”等等。或者另一种解释,“当在自己的诸法中”是指在自己的法中。所谓自己的法,就是一个希望得到利益的人所具有的戒等法。因为戒、定、慧、解脱等清净法能带来纯粹的安乐和利益,所以是人的自己的法;它们不像那些带来祸害的杂染法那样是非自己的法。“到彼岸者”是指因为那些戒等法圆满成就,所以到达了彼岸、达到了终点。巴利
Tattha yadā sakesu dhammesūti yasmiṃ kāle sakaattabhāvasaṅkhātesu pañcasu upādānakkhandhadhammesu. Pāragūti pariññābhisamayapāripūrivasena pāraṅgato, tatoyeva tesaṃ hetubhūte samudaye, tadappavattilakkhaṇe nirodhe, nirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāya ca pahānasacchikiriyābhāvanābhisamayapāripūrivasena pāragato. Hoti brāhmaṇoti evaṃ sabbaso bāhitapāpattā brāhmaṇo nāma hoti, sabbaso sakaattabhāvāvabodhanepi catusaccābhisamayo hoti. Vuttañcetaṃ – ‘‘imasmiṃyeva byāmamatte kaḷevare sasaññimhi samanake lokañca lokasamudayañca paññapemī’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 1.107; a. ni. 4.45). Atha vā sakesu dhammesūti attano dhammesu, attano dhammā nāma atthakāmassa puggalassa sīlādidhammā. Sīlasamādhipaññāvimuttiādayo hi vodānadhammā ekantahitasukhasampādanena purisassa attano dhammā nāma, na anatthāvahā saṃkilesadhammā viya asakadhammā. Pāragūti tesaṃ sīlādīnaṃ pāripūriyā pāraṃ pariyantaṃ gato.
在这里,先讲戒。戒分两种:世间戒和出世间戒。其中,世间戒是前行阶段的戒。简要来说,按巴帝摩卡防护等来分有四种;详细来说则有无数的种类。出世间戒按道和果来分有两种,从实质上说,就是正语、正业、正命。定和慧也和戒一样,分世间和出世间两种。其中,世间定是包括近行定在内的八种等至;出世间定属于道的一部分。世间慧是闻所成慧、思所成慧、修所成慧,这三种都是有漏的;出世间慧则是与道相应、与果相应的。所谓解脱,指的是果解脱和涅槃,所以它纯粹是出世间的。解脱智见则是世间的,因为它有十九种,属于省察智。这样,在自己的相续中,通过证得阿拉汉果,这些戒等诸法无余地达到了圆满,到达了彼岸、达到了终点,所以说,对于自己的诸法,他成了度彼岸者。巴利
Tattha sīlaṃ tāva lokiyalokuttaravasena duvidhaṃ. Tesu lokiyaṃ pubbabhāgasīlaṃ. Taṃ saṅkhepato pātimokkhasaṃvarādivasena catubbidhaṃ, vitthārato pana anekappabhedaṃ. Lokuttaraṃ maggaphalavasena duvidhaṃ, atthato sammāvācāsammākammantasammāājīvā. Yathā ca sīlaṃ, tathā samādhipaññā ca lokiyalokuttaravasena duvidhā. Tattha lokiyasamādhi saha upacārena aṭṭha samāpattiyo, lokuttarasamādhi maggapariyāpanno . Paññāpi lokiyā sutamayā, cintāmayā, bhāvanāmayā ca sāsavā, lokuttarā pana maggasampayuttā phalasampayuttā ca. Vimutti nāma phalavimutti nibbānañca, tasmā sā lokuttarāva. Vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ lokiyameva, taṃ ekūnavīsatividhaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇabhāvato. Evaṃ etesaṃ sīlādidhammānaṃ attano santāne arahattaphalādhigamena anavasesato nibbattapāripūriyā pāraṃ pariyantaṃ gatoti sakesu dhammesu pāragū.
或者也可以这样理解:通过证得入流果,他在戒上到达了彼岸。因为他被称为“在戒上圆满行持的人”,而这里用“入流者”来统摄,连一来者也一并包括了。通过证得不来果,他在定上到达了彼岸。因为他被称为“在定上圆满行持的人”。通过证得阿罗汉果,他在其余三项上到达了彼岸。因为阿罗汉的慧已经达到最广大的境地,证得了不动的心解脱,而且他的省察智也达到了终点,所以在慧、心解脱、解脱智见这三方面,他被称为到达彼岸的人。这样一来,从一切方面来说,对于四圣谛,依照四种道,通过遍知等十六种行相的功用成就,如前所说,在相应的那些时刻,他在各自对应的法上到达了彼岸。巴利
Atha vā sotāpattiphalādhigamena sīlasmiṃ pāragū. So hi ‘‘sīlesu paripūrakārī’’ti vutto, sotāpannaggahaṇeneva cettha sakadāgāmīpi gahito hoti. Anāgāmiphalādhigamena samādhismiṃ pāragū. So hi ‘‘samādhismiṃ paripūrakārī’’ti vutto. Arahattaphalādhigamena itaresu tīsu pāragū. Arahā hi paññāvepullappattiyā aggabhūtāya akuppāya cetovimuttiyā adhigatattā paccavekkhaṇañāṇassa ca pariyosānagamanato paññāvimuttivimuttiñāṇadassanesu pāragū nāma hoti. Evaṃ sabbathāpi catūsu ariyasaccesu catumaggavasena pariññādisoḷasavidhāya kiccanipphattiyā yathāvuttesu tasmiṃ tasmiṃ kāle sakesu dhammesu pāragato.
“成为婆罗门”是说,那时他因为已经排除了恶法,所以是究竟意义上的婆罗门。然后,他超越了那毗舍遮和纷乱惊恐。意思是:像前面说的那样到达彼岸之后,阿迦罗婆迦,他后来超越、越过、战胜了你所显示的那个为吃人肉而来的毗舍遮,以及为了制造恐惧而弄出来的纷乱惊恐,不再怕它。这就是这段话的意思。巴利
Hoti brāhmaṇoti tadā so bāhitapāpadhammatāya paramatthabrāhmaṇo hoti. Atha etaṃ pisācañca, pakkulañcātivattatīti tato yathāvuttapāragamanato atha pacchā, ajakalāpaka, etaṃ tayā dassitaṃ pisitāsanatthamāgataṃ pisācaṃ bhayajananatthaṃ samuṭṭhāpitaṃ akkulapakkulikañca ativattati, atikkamati, abhibhavati, taṃ na bhāyatīti attho.
这首偈颂也是以阿拉汉果为最终归趣而说的。那时,阿迦罗婆迦看见自己用那样可怖的形象来恐吓,竟然丝毫不能动摇世尊,了知世尊那种如如不动的境界,心里想:“啊,真是不可思议的人!”于是生起欢喜心,以凡夫的信仰表明自己内心已经确立的归依,在世尊面前宣告自己成为近事男。巴利
Ayampi gāthā arahattameva ullapitvā kathitā. Atha ajakalāpako attanā katena tathārūpenapi paṭibhayarūpena vibhiṃsanena akampanīyassa bhagavato taṃ tādibhāvaṃ disvā ‘‘aho acchariyamanussovatāya’’nti pasannamānaso pothujjanikāya saddhāya attani niviṭṭhabhāvaṃ vibhāvento satthu sammukhā upāsakattaṃ pavedesi.
第八《战胜经》注疏巴利
8. Saṅgāmajisuttavaṇṇanā
8 第八经中,“僧伽摩吉”是他的名字。这位具寿是舍卫城一位大富豪长者的儿子。到了成年的时候,父母为他娶了门当户对的妻子,把家产交给他,他就被家室束缚住了。有一天,他看见舍卫城的近事男们上午行布施、受持戒法,傍晚穿着洁净的下衣和上衣,手里拿着香花等物,朝祇园精舍方向走去听法,就问他们:“你们要去哪里?”他们回答说:“去祇园精舍世尊那里听法。”他说:“那我也去。”就和他们一起去了祇园。那时,世尊像金窟中发出狮子吼的狮子王一样,坐在正法堂中铺设的殊胜佛座上,在四众弟子中间宣说法要。巴利
8. Aṭṭhame saṅgāmajīti evaṃnāmo. Ayañhi āyasmā sāvatthiyaṃ aññatarassa mahāvibhavassa seṭṭhino putto, vayappattakāle mātāpitūhi patirūpena dārena niyojetvā sāpateyyaṃ niyyātetvā gharabandhanena baddho hoti. So ekadivasaṃ sāvatthivāsino upāsake pubbaṇhasamayaṃ dānaṃ datvā sīlaṃ samādiyitvā sāyanhasamaye suddhavatthe suddhuttarāsaṅge gandhamālādihatthe dhammassavanatthaṃ jetavanābhimukhe gacchante disvā ‘‘kattha tumhe gacchathā’’ti pucchitvā ‘‘dhammassavanatthaṃ jetavane satthu santika’’nti vutte ‘‘tena hi ahampi gamissāmī’’ti tehi saddhiṃ jetavanaṃ agamāsi. Tena ca samayena bhagavā kañcanaguhāyaṃ sīhanādaṃ nadanto kesarasīho viya saddhammamaṇḍape paññattavarabuddhāsane nisīditvā catuparisamajjhe dhammaṃ deseti.
那时,那些近事男顶礼世尊后,坐在一边。良家子僧伽摩吉也坐在大众的外围听法。世尊依次说法,开示了四圣谛。四圣谛讲完时,有无数千位有情现证了法。良家子僧伽摩吉也证得了入流果。大众散去后,他来到世尊面前,顶礼之后请求出家:“请世尊让我出家。”世尊问:“那你得到父母允许了吗?”他回答:“没有,尊者,我还没得到允许。”世尊说:“僧伽摩吉,如来不会让没有得到父母允许的儿子出家。”他说:“尊者,我会照办,让父母允许我出家。”于是他顶礼世尊,右绕之后,来到父母面前说:“父亲、母亲,请允许我出家。”此后的经过,应按《赖吒和罗经》中的方式来了知。巴利
Atha kho te upāsakā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā ekamantaṃ nisīdiṃsu, saṅgāmajipi kulaputto tassā parisāya pariyante dhammaṃ suṇanto nisīdi. Bhagavā anupubbikathaṃ kathetvā cattāri saccāni pakāsesi, saccapariyosāne anekesaṃ pāṇasahassānaṃ dhammābhisamayo ahosi. Saṅgāmajipi kulaputto sotāpattiphalaṃ patvā parisāya vuṭṭhitāya bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā vanditvā pabbajjaṃ yāci ‘‘pabbājetha maṃ bhagavā’’ti. ‘‘Anuññātosi pana tvaṃ mātāpitūhi pabbajjāyā’’ti? ‘‘Nāhaṃ, bhante, anuññāto’’ti. ‘‘Na kho, saṅgāmaji, tathāgatā mātāpitūhi ananuññātaṃ puttaṃ pabbājentī’’ti. ‘‘Sohaṃ, bhante, tathā karissāmi, yathā maṃ mātāpitaro pabbajituṃ anujānantī’’ti. So bhagavantaṃ vanditvā padakkhiṇaṃ katvā mātāpitaro upasaṅkamitvā, ‘‘ammatātā, anujānātha maṃ pabbajitu’’nti āha. Tato paraṃ raṭṭhapālasutte (ma. ni. 2.293 ādayo) āgatanayena veditabbaṃ.
那时,他答应父母说“出家以后我会让你们见到我”,得到父母同意后,就去到世尊那里请求出家。他在世尊身边得到了出家与具足戒。受具足戒不久,他为了证得更高的道果而精勤努力,在某个林间住处结夏安居,证得了六神通。安居结束后,为了拜见世尊,也为了兑现对父母的承诺,他前往舍卫城。因此经中说:“那时,具寿僧伽摩吉来到了舍卫城。”巴利
Atha so ‘‘pabbajitvā attānaṃ dassessāmī’’ti paṭiññaṃ datvā anuññāto mātāpitūhi bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā pabbajjaṃ yāci. Alattha kho ca bhagavato santike pabbajjaṃ upasampadañca, acirūpasampanno ca pana so uparimaggatthāya ghaṭento vāyamanto aññatarasmiṃ araññāvāse vassaṃ vasitvā chaḷabhiñño hutvā vutthavasso bhagavantaṃ dassanāya mātāpitūnañca paṭissavamocanatthaṃ sāvatthiṃ agamāsi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘tena kho pana samayena āyasmā saṅgāmaji sāvatthiṃ anuppatto hotī’’ti.
这位具寿在城门村托钵乞食,饭后从乞食处回来,进入祇园精舍,来到世尊面前,与世尊互相问候之后,宣示了阿罗汉果究竟智,然后再次顶礼世尊,右绕行礼,离开后坐在一棵树下度过白天。那时,他的父母和亲友听说他回来了,高兴欢喜,急急忙忙赶到精舍,四处寻找,看见他坐在那里,就走上前去问候,然后恳求说:“别让没有儿子的家产被国王没收,或者落到不喜欢的继承人手里;出家对你也不合适。来吧,孩子,还俗吧。”长老听了心想:“这些人不知道我对欲乐已经没有兴趣,就像挑粪的人执着粪团一样,他们只想让我黏在欲乐上。跟他们是没法用说法来说服的。”于是他就像没听见一样坐着。他们用各种方式恳求,见他始终不接受他们的话,就回到家里,安排他的妻子带着随从,对她说:“我们用各种办法求他,都打动不了他的心。你去吧,好女人,用让孩子出现在他面前的办法去求你的丈夫,让他回心转意。”据说,这位具寿出家时,她正怀着身孕。她答应说“好”,便抱着孩子,带着一大群随从前往祇园精舍。经中就是针对这件事说的:“具寿僧伽摩吉听到……”等等。巴利
So hāyasmā dhuragāme piṇḍāya caritvā pacchābhattaṃ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto jetavanaṃ pavisitvā bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā bhagavatā saddhiṃ katapaṭisanthāro aññaṃ byākaritvā puna bhagavantaṃ vanditvā padakkhiṇaṃ katvā nikkhamitvā aññatarasmiṃ rukkhamūle divāvihāraṃ nisīdi. Athassa mātāpitaro ñātimittā cassa āgamanaṃ sutvā, ‘‘saṅgāmaji, kira idhāgato’’ti haṭṭhatuṭṭhā turitaturitā vihāraṃ gantvā pariyesantā naṃ tattha nisinnaṃ disvā upasaṅkamitvā paṭisanthāraṃ katvā ‘‘mā aputtakaṃ sāpateyyaṃ rājāno hareyyuṃ, appiyā dāyādā vā gaṇheyyuṃ, nālaṃ pabbajjāya, ehi, tāta, vibbhamā’’ti yāciṃsu. Taṃ sutvā thero ‘‘ime mayhaṃ kāmehi anatthikabhāvaṃ na jānanti, gūthadhārī viya gūthapiṇḍe kāmesuyeva allīyanaṃ icchanti, nayime sakkā dhammakathāya saññāpetu’’nti assuṇanto viya nisīdi. Te nānappakāraṃ yācitvā attano vacanaṃ aggaṇhantaṃ disvā gharaṃ pavisitvā puttena saddhiṃ tassa bhariyaṃ saparivāraṃ uyyojesuṃ ‘‘mayaṃ nānappakāraṃ taṃ yācantāpi tassa manaṃ alabhitvā āgatā, gaccha tvaṃ, bhadde, tava bhattāraṃ puttasandassanena yācitvā saññāpehī’’ti. Tāya kira āpannasattāya ayamāyasmā pabbajito. Sā ‘‘sādhū’’ti sampaṭicchitvā dārakamādāya mahatā parivārena jetavanaṃ agamāsi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘assosi kho āyasmato saṅgāmajissā’’tiādi.
这里,“前妻”是指过去在家时,因为照顾服侍而成为伴侣的人,也就是妻子。“阿耶”本来该说“阿耶子”,这里是按出家人惯用的称呼来说。“据说”是表示传闻的虚词,要理解为和“据说他已经来了”相连。意思是:沙门啊,你抛下怀着孩子的我就出家了,如今我带着幼子,你抛下这样的我只管去修行沙门之法,这是不合适的。所以,沙门,请你用衣食等来养活我和儿子。然而具寿僧伽摩吉收摄诸根,既不看也不搭话。因此经中说:“这样说时,具寿僧伽摩吉默然。”巴利
Tattha purāṇadutiyikāti pubbe gihikāle pādaparicaraṇavasena dutiyikā, bhariyāti attho. Ayyoti ‘‘ayyaputto’’ti vattabbe pabbajitānaṃ anucchavikavohārena vadati. Kirāti anussavanatthe nipāto, tassa anuppatto kirāti sambandho veditabbo. Khuddaputtañhi samaṇa, posa manti āpannasattameva maṃ chaḍḍetvā pabbajito, sāhaṃ etarahi khuddaputtā, tādisaṃ maṃ chaḍḍetvāva tava samaṇadhammakaraṇaṃ ayuttaṃ, tasmā, samaṇa, puttadutiyaṃ maṃ ghāsacchādanādīhi bharassūti. Āyasmā pana, saṅgāmaji, indriyāni ukkhipitvā taṃ neva oloketi, nāpi ālapati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘evaṃ vutte āyasmā saṅgāmaji tuṇhī ahosī’’ti.
她这样说了三遍,见长老还是默不作声,心里想:“男人就算对妻子没什么牵挂,对儿子总还是有牵挂的。父亲对儿子的爱是深入骨髓的,所以也许能靠这份爱子之情让他听我的话。”于是她把孩子放在长老的膝上,退到一边,说:“沙门,这是你的儿子,你养他吧。”说完就走开了一点。据说,因为沙门的威德,她没法在他面前站住。长老对那孩子既不看一眼,也不说一句话。那女人站在不远处,转过头来看,见长老这副样子,就明白了,转身抱起孩子,心想:“这沙门连儿子都不在乎。”随即离开了。因此经中说:“那时,具寿僧伽玛吉的前妻……”等等。巴利
Sā tikkhattuṃ tatheva vatvā tuṇhībhūtameva taṃ disvā ‘‘purisā nāma bhariyāsu nirapekkhāpi puttesu sāpekkhā honti, puttasineho pitu aṭṭhimiñjaṃ āhacca tiṭṭhati, tasmā puttapemenāpi mayhaṃ vase vatteyyā’’ti maññamānā puttaṃ therassa aṅke nikkhipitvā ekamantaṃ apakkamma ‘‘eso te, samaṇa, putto, posa na’’nti vatvā thokaṃ agamāsi. Sā kira samaṇatejenassa sammukhe ṭhātuṃ nāsakkhi. Thero dārakampi neva oloketi nāpi ālapati. Atha sā itthī avidūre ṭhatvā mukhaṃ parivattetvā olokentī therassa ākāraṃ ñatvā paṭinivattitvā ‘‘puttenapi ayaṃ samaṇo anatthiko’’ti dārakaṃ gahetvā pakkāmi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho āyasmato saṅgāmajissa purāṇadutiyikā’’tiādi.
这里,“连儿子也不在意”的意思是:这位沙门连自己的亲生儿子都不想要,更不用说别人了。关于“天眼”:因为跟天人的眼相似,所以叫“天眼”。天人的眼是善行所生的果报,不被胆汁、痰、血等阻碍,即使很远也能接收所缘,是清净的根门之眼。而这里说的也是由第四禅定所生的神通之眼,跟那种眼一样,所以叫“天眼”;或者因为依止天住而获得,所以叫“天眼”;又或者因为光明广大、境界广大,所以叫“天眼”。以这样的天眼。“清净”——因远离诸盖等杂染而极为清净;“超越人间的”——超越人的境界。“这种丑态”——这种丑态,即如前所说的不适于出家人的、把儿子放在膝上的丑陋行为。巴利
Tattha puttenapīti ayaṃ samaṇo attano orasaputtenapi anatthiko, pageva aññehīti adhippāyo. Dibbenāti ettha dibbasadisattā dibbaṃ. Devatānañhi sucaritakammanibbattaṃ pittasemharuhirādīhi apalibuddhaṃ dūrepi ārammaṇasampaṭicchanasamatthaṃ dibbaṃ pasādacakkhu hoti. Idampi catutthajjhānasamādhinibbattaṃ abhiññācakkhuṃ tādisanti dibbaṃ viyāti dibbaṃ, dibbavihārasannissayena laddhattā vā dibbaṃ, mahājutikattā mahāgatikattā vā dibbaṃ, tena dibbena. Visuddhenāti nīvaraṇādisaṃkilesavigamena suparisuddhena. Atikkantamānusakenāti manussānaṃ visayātītena. Imaṃ evarūpaṃ vippakāranti imaṃ evaṃ vippakāraṃ yathāvuttaṃ pabbajitesu asāruppaṃ aṅke puttaṭṭhapanasaṅkhātaṃ virūpakiriyaṃ.
他完全地了知了这个意义,也就是僧伽摩吉尊者在妻子、儿女等一切方面都无所牵挂的这个意义。说出这首优陀那,就是说出这首表明僧伽摩吉尊者在可意与不可意等境中都能保持如如不动的优陀那。巴利
Etamatthanti etaṃ āyasmato saṅgāmajissa puttadārādīsu sabbattha nirapekkhabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ sabbākārato viditvā. Imaṃ udānanti imaṃ tassa iṭṭhāniṭṭhādīsu tādibhāvadīpakaṃ udānaṃ udānesi.
这里,“来的”指正走过来的,意思是前妻。“不欣喜”是说:她来见我,他却不欢喜、不满足。“离去的”是说:她没跟我打招呼就走,正在离开。“不忧愁”是说:内心不生热恼。那么,是什么原因让长老这样既不欣喜也不忧愁呢?为了说明这个原因,所以说“从诸执着中解脱的战斗胜利者”。其中,“执着”有五种:欲染执着、嗔恚执着、愚痴执着、慢执着、见执着。这位比丘通过断除、止息和解脱,从这些执着中解脱出来,是战斗胜利者。“我称彼为婆罗门”:那位已达到如此不动摇之境、成为漏尽者,因为他已完全舍断一切恶法,所以我称他为婆罗门。巴利
Tattha āyantinti āgacchantiṃ, purāṇadutiyikanti adhippāyo. Nābhinandatīti daṭṭhuṃ maṃ āgatāti na nandati na tussati. Pakkamantinti sā ayaṃ mayā asammoditāva gacchatīti gacchantiṃ. Na socatīti na cittasantāpamāpajjati. Yena pana kāraṇena thero evaṃ nābhinandati na socati, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘saṅgā saṅgāmajiṃ mutta’’nti vuttaṃ. Tattha saṅgāti rāgasaṅgo dosamohamānadiṭṭhisaṅgoti pañcavidhāpi saṅgā samucchedappaṭipassaddhivimuttīhi vimuttaṃ saṅgāmajiṃ bhikkhuṃ. Tamahaṃbrūmi brāhmaṇanti taṃ tādibhāvappattaṃ khīṇāsavaṃ ahaṃ sabbaso bāhitapāpattā brāhmaṇanti vadāmīti.
第九 结发者经的注释巴利
9. Jaṭilasuttavaṇṇanā
9 第九,“伽耶”在这里既指一个村子,也指一个渡口。世尊住在离伽耶村不远的地方,所以就说他“住在伽耶”;同样,住在伽耶渡口附近也是这样。所谓伽耶渡口,就是伽耶村附近有一个莲池,还有一条河,世间大众把这两处都叫作“除罪渡口”。“伽耶顶”是指:那里有一座山,山顶形状像象头,名叫伽耶顶山;山上有一块岩石,形状像大象额上的瓶状隆起,能容纳一千位比丘,世尊就住在那里。因此说:“住在伽耶,在伽耶顶。”巴利
9. Navame gayāyanti ettha gayāti gāmopi titthampi vuccati. Gayāgāmassa hi avidūre viharanto bhagavā ‘‘gayāyaṃ viharatī’’ti vuccati, tathā gayātitthassa. Gayātitthanti hi gayāgāmassa avidūre ekā pokkharaṇī atthi nadīpi, tadubhayaṃ ‘‘pāpapavāhanatittha’’nti lokiyamahājano samudācarati. Gayāsīseti gajasīsasadisasikharo tattha eko pabbato gayāsīsanāmako, yattha hatthikumbhasadiso piṭṭhipāsāṇo bhikkhusahassassa okāso pahoti, tatra bhagavā viharati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘gayāyaṃ viharati gayāsīse’’ti.
“结发者”就是指苦行僧。他们因为留着结发的缘故,在这里被称为“结发者”。“中间八日降雪之时”是指:在冬季当中,摩伽月末尾四天加上帕古纳月开头四天,这总共八天的降雪时节。“在伽耶浮出水面”是说:有些人在那个被大家公认的渡口水中,先把整个身体沉下去,然后再浮上来、冒出来、漂起来。“沉入水中”是指连头一起没入水里。“又浮又沉”是指:一次又一次地做浮出和沉入的动作。巴利
Jaṭilāti tāpasā. Te hi jaṭādhāritāya idha ‘‘jaṭilā’’ti vuttā. Antaraṭṭhake himapātasamayeti hemantassa utuno abbhantarabhūte māghamāsassa avasāne cattāro phagguṇamāsassa ādimhi cattāroti aṭṭhadivasaparimāṇe himassa patanakāle. Gayāyaṃ ummujjantīti keci tasmiṃ titthasammate udake paṭhamaṃ nimuggasakalasarīrā tato ummujjanti vuṭṭhahanti uppilavanti. Nimujjantīti sasīsaṃ udake osīdanti. Ummujjanimujjampi karontīti punappunaṃ ummujjananimujjanānipi karonti.
在这里,有些人持这样的见解:“只要浮出水面一次,罪业就能清净。”他们只做浮出水面就走了。可是,没有沉入水中就不可能有浮出水面,因为这两者不可分离,所以他们其实也做了沉入水中。还有些人持这样的见解:“只要沉入水中一次,罪业就能清净。”他们也只沉入一次,然后按前面说的道理,因为两者不可分离,也做了浮出水面才离开。另一些人持这样的见解:“只有在那处渡口沉入水中,罪业才能清净。”他们就在那里沉入水中,屏住呼吸,像从悬崖上掉下来的人一样,当场就断了命。还有一些人持这样的见解:“反复浮出水面、沉入水中,沐浴之后罪业才能清净。”他们就时不时地浮出水面、沉入水中。正是针对所有这些人,才说“有浮出水面的,有沉入水中的,也有既浮出又沉入的”。在这里,虽然浮出水面要以沉入水中为前提,但只做沉入水中的人只是少数,做浮出水面以及两者都做的人很多;为了显示他们中多数人的情况,才把浮出水面放在前面说。同样,“众多结发者”也是因为结发者占多数才这么说,不过当时也有剃发留髻的人,那些以水为清净的婆罗门在那时也在那里这样做。巴利
Tattha hi keci ‘‘ekummujjaneneva pāpasuddhi hotī’’ti evaṃdiṭṭhikā, te ummujjanameva katvā gacchanti. Ummujjanaṃ pana nimujjanamantarena natthīti avinābhāvato nimujjanampi te karontiyeva. Yepi ‘‘ekanimujjaneneva pāpasuddhi hotī’’ti evaṃdiṭṭhikā, tepi ekavārameva nimujjitvā vuttanayena avinābhāvato ummujjanampi katvā pakkamanti. Ye pana ‘‘tasmiṃ titthe nimujjaneneva pāpasuddhi hotī’’ti evaṃdiṭṭhikā, te tattha nimujjitvā assāse sannirumbhitvā maruppapātapatitā viya tattheva jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpuṇanti . Apare ‘‘punappunaṃ ummujjananimujjanāni katvā nhāte pāpasuddhi hotī’’ti evaṃdiṭṭhikā, te kālena kālaṃ ummujjananimujjanāni karonti. Te sabbepi sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘ummujjantipi nimujjantipi ummujjanimujjampi karontī’’ti. Ettha ca kiñcāpi nimujjanapubbakaṃ ummujjanaṃ, nimujjanameva pana karontā katipayā, ummujjanaṃ tadubhayañca karontā bahūti tesaṃ yebhuyyabhāvadassanatthaṃ ummujjanaṃ paṭhamaṃ vuttaṃ. Tathā sambahulā jaṭilāti jaṭilānaṃ yebhuyyatāya vuttaṃ, muṇḍasikhaṇḍinopi ca brāhmaṇā udakasuddhikā tasmiṃ kāle tattha tathā karonti.
有些人用手从伽耶河取水,浇在自己头上和身上,这叫做“泼洒”。另一些人则用瓶子取水,站在岸边也这样做。“供奉火”是说:有些人在伽耶河岸边搭好祭坛,把烟薪、供品等用具摆上,然后向火献供、侍奉火供。“依此而得清净”是说:他们认为靠在这伽耶河里浮出水面等动作,以及侍奉火,就能从罪垢中清净、消除罪恶,甚至得到轮回的清净——他们就是执持这种见解的人。这就是这段话的意思。巴利
Osiñcantīti keci gayāya udakaṃ hatthena gahetvā attano sīse ca sarīre ca osiñcanti, apare ghaṭehi udakaṃ gahetvā tīre ṭhatvā tathā karonti. Aggiṃ juhantīti keci gayātīre vediṃ sajjetvā dhūmadabbhipūjādike upakaraṇe upanetvā aggihutaṃ juhanti aggihutaṃ paricaranti. Iminā suddhīti iminā gayāyaṃ ummujjanādinā aggiparicaraṇena ca pāpamalato suddhi pāpapavāhanā saṃsārasuddhi eva vā hotīti evaṃdiṭṭhikā hutvāti attho.
这里说的“浮出水面”等等,应当看作只是举例说明。因为在这些人当中,有些人住在水里,有些人用水献礼,有些人站在那水中随着日月转绕,有些人成千上万遍地念诵萨维蒂等咒语,有些人用“因陀罗,来吧”之类的话召请明咒,有些人大行供养礼敬。他们这样做的时候,有些人下水,有些人上岸,有些人上岸后做清净漱口,有些人站在水中弹弦、弹琵琶,示现种种不同的行为。又因为即使他们做出这类奇特的行为,也都是在水中先沉入、再浮出之后才做的,所以把这一切都归入沉入和浮出之中,而说“浮出水面”等等。正当那里一片喧闹嘈杂的时候,世尊站在上方的山上,听到他们的喧哗,便观察“这到底是什么”,看见了他们那些举动,于是针对这件事说道:“世尊看见……依此而得清净。”这话的意思就是前面所解释的那样。巴利
Ummujjanādi cettha nidassanamattaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tesu hi keci udakavāsaṃ vasanti, keci udakassañjaliṃ denti, keci tasmiṃ udake ṭhatvā candimasūriye anuparivattanti, keci anekasahassavāraṃ sāvittiādike japanti, keci ‘‘inda āgacchā’’tiādinā vijjājapaṃ avhāyanti, keci mahatupaṭṭhānaṃ karonti, evañca karontā keci otaranti, keci uttaranti keci uttaritvā suddhikaācamanaṃ karonti, keci antoudake ṭhitā tantī vādenti, vīṇaṃ vādentīti evamādikā nānappakārakiriyā dassenti. Yasmā vā te evarūpā vikārakiriyā karontāpi tasmiṃ udake nimujjanaummujjanapubbakameva karonti, tasmā taṃ sabbaṃ nimujjanummujjanantogadhameva katvā ‘‘ummujjantī’’tipiādi vuttaṃ. Evaṃ tattha ākulabyākule vattamāne uparipabbate ṭhito bhagavā tesaṃ taṃ kolāhalaṃ sutvā ‘‘kinnu kho eta’’nti olokento taṃ kiriyavikāraṃ addasa, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘addasā kho bhagavā…pe… iminā suddhī’’ti, taṃ vuttatthameva.
他明白了这个道理:他从各个方面明白了这个道理——既明白他们把入水等当作清净之道的那种执取,也明白真实等法才是清净之道,对此自己有了不颠倒的了悟。这首优陀那:他宣说了这首优陀那,它阐明以水为净并非清净之道,而真实等法如实才是清净之道。巴利
Etamatthaṃviditvāti etaṃ atthaṃ udakorohanādiasuddhimagge tesaṃ suddhimaggaparāmasanaṃ saccādike ca suddhimagge attano aviparītāvabodhaṃ sabbākārato viditvā. Imaṃ udānanti imaṃ udakasuddhiyā asuddhimaggabhāvadīpakaṃ saccādidhammānañca yāthāvato suddhimaggabhāvadīpakaṃ udānaṃ udānesi.
这里,“不能靠水变得清净”这句话里的“水”,指的是沉入水中等做法。因为沉入水中这类行为,在这里省略了后面的词,就直接叫“水”,就像把“色有”说成“色”一样。或者也可以说,“靠水”是指以沉入水中等动作所依靠的水,对众生来说,并不存在所谓靠它得到清净这回事,意思就是根本没有。又或者说,“清净”:就是靠上面所说的那种水,众生并不能从罪垢中变得清净,所以说不能成为清净的人。为什么?因为在这里洗澡的人很多。如果靠入水等做法真能清净罪业,那么在这里水中洗澡的众人——那些杀母等造恶业的人,还有牛、水牛之类,甚至鱼和鳖,这一切都应该能清净罪业,但事实并不是这样。为什么?因为洗澡并不是罪业之因的对治。要知道,能破坏某样东西的,才是它的对治,就像光明是黑暗的对治,明是对无明的对治,而洗澡并不是罪的对治。所以,这里应当得出结论:“不能靠水变得清净。”巴利
Tattha na udakena sucī hotīti ettha udakenāti udakummujjanādinā. Udakummujjanādi hi idha uttarapadalopena ‘‘udaka’’nti vuttaṃ yathā rūpabhavo rūpanti. Atha vā udakenāti ummujjanādikiriyāya sādhanabhūtena udakena suci sattassa suddhi nāma na hoti, natthīti attho. Atha vā sucīti tena yathāvuttena udakena suci pāpamalato suddho nāma satto na hoti. Kasmā? Bahvettha nhāyatī jano. Yadi hi udakorohanādinā yathāvuttena pāpasuddhi nāma siyā, bahu ettha udake jano nhāyati, mātughātādipāpakammakārī añño ca gomahiṃsādiko antamaso macchakacchape upādāya, tassa sabbassāpi pāpasuddhi siyā, na panevaṃ hoti. Kasmā? Nhānassa pāpahetūnaṃ appaṭipakkhabhāvato. Yañhi yaṃ vināseti, so tassa paṭipakkho yathā āloko andhakārassa, vijjā ca avijjāya, na evaṃ nhānaṃ pāpassa. Tasmā niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ ‘‘na udakena suci hotī’’ti.
为了说明靠什么才能让人清净,接着说了“若人具足真实……”等偈颂。其中,“若人”是指在什么样的人身上。“真实”既指言语上的真实,也指离妄语的戒真实。另一种说法是,“真实”既指智慧的真实,也指究竟义的真实。“法”指圣道之法与圣果之法。这一切法无论在谁身上存在,他就是清净的,他就是婆罗门。也就是说,这位圣者,特别是漏已尽的人,因为究竟的清净,所以是清净者,也是婆罗门。那么,为什么这里把真实从法中单独提出来说呢?因为真实有大利益。正如在许多经典段落中宣说了真实的功德,例如“真实确实是甘露之语”“真实在一切味道中最甜美”“善者安立于真实、利益与法中”“沙门婆罗门安立于真实”等等。而违背真实的过患也同样被宣说,例如“违犯了一法的妄语者……”“说不实语的人堕入地狱”等等。巴利
Yena pana suci hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yamhi saccañcā’’tiādimāha. Tattha yamhīti yasmiṃ puggale . Saccanti vacīsaccañceva viratisaccañca. Atha vā saccanti ñāṇasaccañceva paramatthasaccañca. Dhammoti ariyamaggadhammo, phaladhammo ca, so sabbopi yasmiṃ puggale upalabbhati, so sucī so ca brāhmaṇoti so ariyapuggalo visesato khīṇāsavo accantasuddhiyā suci ca brāhmaṇo cāti. Kasmā panettha saccaṃ dhammato visuṃ katvā gahitaṃ? Saccassa bahūpakārattā. Tathā hi ‘‘saccaṃ ve amatā vācā (su. ni. 455), saccaṃ have sādutaraṃ rasānaṃ (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. 184), sacce atthe ca dhamme ca, āhu santo patiṭṭhitā (su. ni. 455), sacce ṭhitā samaṇabrāhmaṇā cā’’tiādinā (jā. 2.21.433) anekesu suttapadesu saccaguṇā pakāsitā. Saccavipariyassa ca ‘‘ekaṃ dhammaṃ atītassa, musāvādissa jantuno (dha. pa. 176), abhūtavādī nirayaṃ upetī’’ti (dha. pa. 306) ca ādinā pakāsitāti.
10. 婆醯经注释巴利
10. Bāhiyasuttavaṇṇanā
10 第十经里说的“婆醯”是他的名字。“持木衣者”就是穿木制衣服的人。“苏帕拉卡”是说,他住在名叫苏帕拉卡的港口。那么,这位婆醯到底是谁?他又是怎么成了持木衣者,为什么住在苏帕拉卡港呢?巴利
10. Dasame bāhiyoti tassa nāmaṃ. Dārucīriyoti dārumayacīro. Suppāraketi evaṃnāmake paṭṭane vasati. Ko panāyaṃ bāhiyo, kathañca dārucīriyo ahosi, kathaṃ suppārake paṭṭane paṭivasatīti?
关于这件事,有一个前后经过的讲述:据说,从这往前十万劫之前,在莲华上正自觉者出世的时候,天鹅城里有一位良家子,正在听十力者说法。他看见导师把一位比丘列为“速证胜智第一”,心里就想:“这位比丘真了不起,竟能被导师列为第一。但愿我将来也能在某位正自觉者的教法里出家,像这位比丘一样,被导师列在那样第一的位置上。”他发愿要得到那个位置,又做了与这个愿相应的事业,一辈子修福,死后生到天界,在天和人之间流转。后来,他在迦叶十力者的教法里出家,戒行圆满,修沙门法,直到命终,又生到天界。他在一佛期间住在天界。到了现在这位佛出世时,他投生在婆醯国的一户人家里。因为生在婆醯国,大家就叫他“婆醯”。他长大以后,过着在家生活,为了经商,把许多货物装满船,出海航行,来来去去,有七次都带着随从回到自己的城里。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ anupubbīkathā – ito kira kappasatasahassamatthake padumuttarasammāsambuddhakāle eko kulaputto haṃsavatīnagare dasabalassa dhammadesanaṃ suṇanto satthāraṃ ekaṃ bhikkhuṃ khippābhiññānaṃ etadagge ṭhapentaṃ disvā ‘‘mahā vatāyaṃ bhikkhu, yo satthārā evaṃ etadagge ṭhapīyati, aho vatāhampi anāgate evarūpassa sammāsambuddhassa sāsane pabbajitvā satthārā edise ṭhāne etadagge ṭhapetabbo bhaveyyaṃ yathāyaṃ bhikkhū’’ti taṃ ṭhānantaraṃ patthetvā tadanurūpaṃ adhikārakammaṃ katvā yāvajīvaṃ puññaṃ katvā saggaparāyaṇo hutvā devamanussesu saṃsaranto kassapadasabalassa sāsane pabbajitvā paripuṇṇasīlo samaṇadhammaṃ karontova jīvitakkhayaṃ patvā devaloke nibbatti. So ekaṃ buddhantaraṃ devaloke vasitvā imasmiṃ buddhuppāde bāhiyaraṭṭhe kulagehe paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhi, taṃ bāhiyaraṭṭhe jātattā bāhiyoti sañjāniṃsu. So vayappatto gharāvāsaṃ vasanto vaṇijjatthāya bahūnaṃ bhaṇḍānaṃ nāvaṃ pūretvā samuddaṃ pavisitvā aparāparaṃ sañcaranto satta vāre saddhiṃyeva parisāya attano nagaraṃ upagañchi.
到了第八次,他心想:“我要去金地。”于是把货物装上船,登船出发。船驶入大海,还没到达目的地,就在海中遇难了。许多人成了鱼和龟的食物。婆醯抓了一块船板,在海里漂浮,被波浪的推力缓缓冲荡,最后被冲落到海边,像一块金子一样躺在海岸上。他歇去疲劳,稍微恢复了一点力气,就站起来。因为羞愧,他躲进灌木丛里,找不到任何可以遮身的东西,就割下柔软的芦苇茎,用树皮缠绑起来,做成下衣和上衣,遮住了身体。也有人说:“他是把木板钻穿,用树皮串起来,做成下衣和上衣穿上的。”总之,因为他穿着这种木头做的衣服,人们就沿用以前的称呼,叫他“婆醯”,同时又叫他“持木衣者”。巴利
Aṭṭhame vāre pana ‘‘suvaṇṇabhūmiṃ gamissāmī’’ti āropitabhaṇḍo nāvaṃ abhiruhi. Nāvā mahāsamuddaṃ ajjhogāhetvā icchitadesaṃ apatvāva samuddamajjhe vipannā. Mahājano macchakacchapabhakkho ahosi. Bāhiyo pana ekaṃ nāvāphalakaṃ gahetvā taranto ūmivegena mandamandaṃ khipamāno bhassitvā samudde patitattā jātarūpeneva samuddatīre nipanno. Parissamaṃ vinodetvā assāsamattaṃ labhitvā uṭṭhāya lajjāya gumbantaraṃ pavisitvā acchādanaṃ aññaṃ kiñci apassanto akkanāḷāni chinditvā vākehi paliveṭhetvā nivāsanapāvuraṇāni katvā acchādesi. Keci pana ‘‘dāruphalakāni vijjhitvā vākena āvuṇitvā nivāsanapāvuraṇaṃ katvā acchādesī’’ti vadanti. Evaṃ sabbathāpi dārumayacīradhāritāya ‘‘dārucīriyo’’ti purimavohārena ‘‘bāhiyo’’ti ca paññāyittha.
他拿着一只钵,按照前面说的方式在苏波罗迦码头一带乞食。人们看见他,心里想:“如果世上真有阿罗汉,应该就是这样的吧。不知道这位尊者会不会接受我们布施的衣服,还是因为少欲就不肯接受呢?”于是他们想试探一下,就从四面八方拿来衣服送上去。他心想:“如果我不继续装成这个样子,他们就不会对我生起这样的信心。不如我拒绝这些衣服,仍旧保持原来的做派,这样我就会得到更多的利养和恭敬。”他这样想了以后,就站在欺诳的心态里,不肯接受衣服。人们于是更加信心清净,心想:“哎呀,这位尊者真是少欲啊!”就对他做了更盛大的供养和恭敬。巴利
Taṃ ekaṃ kapālaṃ gahetvā vuttaniyāmena suppārakapaṭṭane piṇḍāya carantaṃ disvā manussā cintesuṃ ‘‘sace loke arahanto nāma honti, evaṃvidhehi bhavitabbaṃ, kinnu kho ayaṃ ayyo vatthaṃ diyyamānaṃ gaṇheyya, udāhu appicchatāya na gaṇheyyā’’ti vīmaṃsantā nānādisāhi vatthāni upanesuṃ. So cintesi – ‘‘sacāhaṃ iminā niyāmena nāgamissaṃ, nayime evaṃ mayi pasīdeyyuṃ, yaṃnūnāhaṃ imāni paṭikkhipitvā imināva nīhārena vihareyyaṃ, evaṃ me lābhasakkāro uppajjissatī’’ti. So evaṃ cintetvā kohaññe ṭhatvā vatthāni na paṭiggaṇhi. Manussā ‘‘aho appiccho vatāyaṃ ayyo’’ti bhiyyosomattāya pasannamānasā mahantaṃ sakkārasammānaṃ kariṃsu.
他吃完饭,也走到不远处的一座天祠去。大众跟着他一起过去,把那座天祠收拾好,然后供养给他。他想:“这些人只是因为我穿着树皮衣就生起净信,对我做出这样的恭敬供养。对这些人来说,我应当以高超的行为而存在才是合适的。”于是他保持着资具轻少、少欲知足的样子。可是,当众人把他推想成“阿拉汉”时,他自己也以为自己就是“阿拉汉”。众人对他的恭敬和尊重越来越增长,他也成了能得到各种上妙资具的人。因此经中说:“那时,穿树皮衣的婆醯迦住在苏波罗迦海边,受到恭敬、受到尊重……”等等。巴利
Sopi bhattakiccaṃ katvā avidūraṭṭhāne ekaṃ devāyatanaṃ agamāsi. Mahājano tena saddhiṃ eva gantvā taṃ devāyatanaṃ paṭijaggitvā adāsi. So ‘‘ime mayhaṃ cīradhāraṇamatte pasīditvā evaṃvidhaṃ sakkārasammānaṃ karonti, etesaṃ mayā ukkaṭṭhavuttinā bhavituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti sallahukaparikkhāro appicchova hutvā vihāsi. ‘‘Arahā’’ti pana tehi sambhāvīyamāno ‘‘arahā’’ti attānaṃ amaññi, uparūpari cassa sakkāragarukāro abhivaḍḍhi, lābhī ca ahosi uḷārānaṃ paccayānaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘tena kho pana samayena bāhiyo dārucīriyo suppārake paṭivasati samuddatīre sakkato garukato’’tiādi.
在这里,“被恭敬”是指以尊重和殷勤侍奉的方式受到恭敬。“被尊重”是指因为认定他具有殊胜功德,像对待石伞盖那样,以尊崇的方式受到尊重。“被崇敬”是指以内心的敬仰而受到崇敬。“被供养”是指以花、香等物品供养而受到供养。“被敬礼”是指被信心深厚的人以让路、让座、奉上物品等方式敬礼。“他获得衣……等资具”是指因为获得越来越殊胜、被众人不断呈上的衣等四种资具,所以成为获得者。巴利
Tattha sakkatoti sakkaccaṃ ādarena upaṭṭhānavasena sakkato. Garukatoti guṇavisesena yuttoti adhippāyena pāsāṇacchattaṃ viya garukaraṇavasena garukato. Mānitoti manasā sambhāvanavasena mānito. Pūjitoti pupphagandhādīhi pūjāvasena pūjito. Apacitoti abhippasannacittehi maggadānaāsanābhiharaṇādivasena apacito. Lābhī cīvara…pe… parikkhārānanti paṇītapaṇītānaṃ uparūpari upanīyamānānaṃ cīvarādīnaṃ catunnaṃ paccayānaṃ labhanavasena lābhī.
还有一种解释方式:“受恭敬”就是得到了恭敬。“受尊重”就是得到了尊重。“受崇敬”就是被人以心意推崇、喜爱。“受供养”就是被人用四种生活必需品供养。“受敬礼”就是得到了敬礼。如果有人恭敬地备好四种生活必需品,把最上等、最精美的东西送给某人,那人就是“受恭敬”。如果有人怀着敬重之心把东西送给他,那人就是“受尊重”。如果有人从心里喜爱他、推崇他,那人就是“受崇敬”。如果有人对这一切都以供养的方式来做,那人就是“受供养”。如果有人以合掌、起身迎接、问讯等方式对他表达最高的敬意,那人就是“受敬礼”。而这些人对婆醯做了以上所有的事。因此经中说:“穿树皮衣的婆醯住在苏波罗迦,受恭敬……”等等。在这里,虽然他不接受衣服,但众人把布递给他,说“尊者,来吧,请接受这块布”,因此他也被称为衣服的“获得者”。巴利
Aparo nayo – sakkatoti sakkārappatto. Garukatoti garukārappatto. Mānitoti bahumānito manasā piyāyito ca. Pūjitoti catupaccayābhipūjāya pūjito. Apacitoti apacāyanappatto. Yassa hi cattāro paccaye sakkatvā suabhisaṅkhate paṇītapaṇīte denti, so sakkato. Yasmiṃ garubhāvaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvā denti, so garukato. Yaṃ manasā piyāyanti bahumaññanti ca, so mānito. Yassa sabbampetaṃ pūjanavasena karonti, so pūjito. Yassa abhivādanapaccuṭṭhānañjalikammādivasena paramanipaccakāraṃ karonti, so apacito. Bāhiyassa pana te sabbametaṃ akaṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘bāhiyo dārucīriyo suppārake paṭivasati sakkato’’tiādi. Ettha ca cīvaraṃ so aggaṇhantopi ‘‘ehi, bhante, imaṃ vatthaṃ paṭiggaṇhāhī’’ti upanāmanavasena cīvarassāpi ‘‘lābhī’’tveva vutto.
“独处”是指待在隐蔽寂静的地方。“独坐”是指独自一人。当他被许多人称为“应供”时,就在现在所说的这种情况下,他心里生起了思量,内心生起了邪思惟。是怎样的呢?“世间凡是那些应供者,或是已进入应供道的人,我就是他们当中的一员。”这句话的意思是:在这个有情世间,有些人因为灭尽了烦恼之敌,并且值得供养、恭敬等,所以是应供者;有些人因为正在断除烦恼之敌,所以已进入应供道;我就是他们当中的一位。巴利
Rahogatassāti rahasi gatassa. Paṭisallīnassāti ekībhūtassa bahūhi manussehi ‘‘arahā’’ti vuccamānassa tassa idāni vuccamānākārena cetaso parivitakko udapādi cittassa micchāsaṅkappo uppajji. Kathaṃ? Ye kho keci loke arahanto vā arahattamaggaṃ vā samāpannā, ahaṃ tesaṃ aññataroti. Tassattho – ye imasmiṃ sattaloke kilesārīnaṃ hatattā pūjāsakkārādīnañca arahabhāvena arahanto, ye kilesārīnaṃ hananena arahattamaggaṃ samāpannā, tesu ahaṃ ekoti.
“旧血亲”是指在过去世曾是血亲、像亲属一样,并且一起修沙门法的天神。不过,有些人说:“‘旧血亲’是指过去世中曾为血亲、作为母亲的一位女神。”这种说法在义注里已经被否定,所以这里采用前一种解释。巴利
Purāṇasālohitāti purimasmiṃ bhavesālohitā bandhusadisā ekato katasamaṇadhammā devatā. Keci pana ‘‘purāṇasālohitāti purāṇakāle bhavantare sālohitā mātubhūtā ekā devatā’’ti vadanti, taṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ paṭikkhipitvā purimoyevattho gahito.
据说,过去在迦叶佛的教法逐渐衰败时,七位比丘看到沙弥等人行为败坏,心生警醒,说道:“趁教法还没消失,我们要先为自己打好根基。”他们礼敬金塔后进入森林,看见一座山,就说:“贪恋生命的人退回去吧,不贪恋的人登上这座山。”他们绑好梯子,等所有人都爬上山顶后,把梯子推倒,开始修行沙门法。他们当中,僧团长老只过了一夜就证得阿罗汉果。他从北俱卢洲取来团食,对那几位比丘说:“贤友们,来吃这些团食吧。”他们回答:“尊者,您是靠自己的威德才做到的。如果我们也能像您一样证得殊胜成就,自然会自己去取来吃。”所以不愿意吃。第二天,第二位长老证得不还果。他也同样取来团食,到那里邀请其他人,他们也同样拒绝了。他们当中,证得阿罗汉果的那位般涅槃了,证得不还果的那位投生到净居天。其余五个人虽然努力精进,却没能证得任何殊胜成就。他们无力证得,就在那里命终,投生到天界。他们在整整一尊佛出世的间隔期间只在天界流转,到了现在这尊佛出世时,从天界死后,在各处的良家转生。这五个人当中,一个成为宝库王,一个成为童子迦叶,一个成为末罗之子达婆,一个成为游方者私毗耶,一个成为树皮衣者婆醯。其中,那位证得不还果、投生在梵天界的,就是这里所说的“往昔的血亲天人”。因为天子也像天女一样,同属天,所以称为天人,正如“那时有一位天人”等经文中的用法;这里则特指梵天为天人。巴利
Pubbe kira kassapadasabalassa sāsane osakkamāne sāmaṇerādīnaṃ vippakāraṃ disvā satta bhikkhū saṃvegappattā ‘‘yāva sāsanaṃ na antaradhāyati, tāva attano patiṭṭhaṃ karissāmā’’ti suvaṇṇacetiyaṃ vanditvā araññaṃ paviṭṭhā ekaṃ pabbataṃ disvā ‘‘jīvite sālayā nivattantu, nirālayā imaṃ pabbataṃ abhiruhantū’’ti vatvā nisseṇiṃ bandhitvā sabbe taṃ pabbataṃ abhiruyha nisseṇiṃ pātetvā samaṇadhammaṃ kariṃsu. Tesu saṅghatthero ekarattātikkameneva arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. So uttarakuruto piṇḍapātaṃ ānetvā te bhikkhū, ‘‘āvuso, ito piṇḍapātaṃ paribhuñjathā’’ti āha. Te ‘‘tumhe, bhante, attano ānubhāvena evaṃ akattha, mayampi sace tumhe viya visesaṃ nibbattessāma, sayameva āharitvā bhuñjissāmā’’ti bhuñjituṃ na icchiṃsu. Tato dutiyadivase dutiyatthero anāgāmiphalaṃ pāpuṇi, sopi tatheva piṇḍapātaṃ ādāya tattha gantvā itare nimantesi, tepi tatheva paṭikkhipiṃsu. Tesu arahattappatto parinibbāyi, anāgāmī suddhāvāsabhūmiyaṃ nibbatti. Itare pana pañca janā ghaṭentā vāyamantāpi visesaṃ nibbattetuṃ nāsakkhiṃsu. Te asakkontā tattheva parisussitvā devaloke nibbattā. Ekaṃ buddhantaraṃ devesuyeva saṃsaritvā imasmiṃ buddhuppāde devalokato cavitvā tattha tattha kulaghare nibbattiṃsu. Tesu hi eko pakkusāti rājā ahosi, eko kumārakassapo, eko dabbo mallaputto, eko sabhiyo paribbājako, eko bāhiyo dārucīriyo. Tattha yo so anāgāmī brahmaloke nibbatto, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘purāṇasālohitā devatā’’ti. Devaputtopi hi devadhītā viya devo eva devatāti katvā devatāti vuccati ‘‘atha kho aññatarā devatā’’tiādīsu viya. Idha pana brahmā devatāti adhippeto.
那位梵天刚在那里投生,就立刻观察自己的梵天福报,又回顾自己来的地方,于是想起七个人登山修沙门法的事:其中一人在那里般涅槃,自己则证得不来果并投生到梵天界。他心里想:“其余五个人现在在哪里呢?”于是观察,知道他们投生在欲界天,之后便适时地观察他们在做什么。到了这个时候,他又观察“他们现在在哪里”,看到婆醯住在苏帕拉卡港附近,披着树皮衣,靠伪装苦行来谋生。他心想:“这个人以前和我一起绑梯子登上山修沙门法,那时他修极端的苦行,对生命毫不留恋,连阿拉汉用神通取来的团食都不肯吃;现在他却怀着求人尊敬的心思,明明不是阿拉汉,却自称是阿拉汉,贪求利养、恭敬和名声,到处游走。而且他不知道十力者的出世。好吧,我要让他生起警醒,让他知道佛陀已经出世。”于是他立刻从梵天界下来,在夜里出现在苏帕拉卡港树皮衣者面前。婆醯看见自己住的地方有大光明,心想:“这是什么?”就出门向空中看,见到站在虚空中的大梵天,便合掌问道:“您是谁?”那位梵天对他说:“我是你过去的同伴。那时我证得不来果,投生在梵天界。你却没能证得任何殊胜的成就,以凡夫的身份命终,流转轮回到现在。如今你穿着外道的衣服,明明不是阿拉汉,却抓着‘我是阿拉汉’这个见解到处走。我知道了,所以来告诉你:婆醯,你确实不是阿拉汉,舍弃这个邪恶的见解吧,不要让它长久地给你带来无益和痛苦。正等觉者已经出现在世间,那位世尊是阿拉汉,你去亲近侍奉他吧。”因此经中说:“那时,婆醯树皮衣者的往昔同族天神……”巴利
Tassa hi brahmuno tattha nibbattasamanantarameva attano brahmasampattiṃ oloketvā āgataṭṭhānaṃ āvajjentassa sattannaṃ janānaṃ pabbataṃ āruyha samaṇadhammakaraṇaṃ, tatthekassa parinibbutabhāvo, anāgāmiphalaṃ patvā attano ca ettha nibbattabhāvo upaṭṭhāsi. So ‘‘kattha nu kho itare pañca janā’’ti āvajjento kāmāvacaradevaloke tesaṃ nibbattabhāvaṃ ñatvā aparabhāge kālānukālaṃ ‘‘kinnu kho karontī’’ti tesaṃ pavattiṃ oloketiyeva. Imasmiṃ pana kāle ‘‘kahaṃ nu kho’’ti āvajjento bāhiyaṃ suppārakapaṭṭanaṃ upanissāya dārucīradhāriṃ kohaññena jīvikaṃ kappentaṃ disvā ‘‘ayaṃ mayā saddhiṃ pubbe nisseṇiṃ bandhitvā pabbataṃ abhiruhitvā samaṇadhammaṃ karonto atisallekhavuttiyā jīvite anapekkho arahatāpi ābhataṃ piṇḍapātaṃ aparibhuñjitvā idāni sambhāvanādhippāyo anarahāva arahattaṃ paṭijānitvā vicarati lābhasakkārasilokaṃ nikāmayamāno, dasabalassa ca nibbattabhāvaṃ na jānāti, handa naṃ saṃvejetvā buddhuppādaṃ jānāpessāmī’’ti tāvadeva brahmalokato otaritvā rattibhāge suppārakapaṭṭane dārucīriyassa sammukhe pāturahosi. Bāhiyo attano vasanaṭṭhāne uḷāraṃ obhāsaṃ disvā ‘‘kiṃ nu kho eta’’nti bahi nikkhamitvā olokento ākāse ṭhitaṃ mahābrahmānaṃ disvā añjaliṃ paggayha ‘‘ke tumhe’’ti pucchi. Athassa so brahmā ‘‘ahaṃ te porāṇakasahāyo tadā anāgāmiphalaṃ patvā brahmaloke nibbatto, tvaṃ pana kiñci visesaṃ nibbattetuṃ asakkonto tadā puthujjanakālakiriyaṃ katvā saṃsaranto idāni titthiyavesadhārī anarahāva samāno ‘arahā aha’nti imaṃ laddhiṃ gahetvā vicarasīti ñatvā āgato, neva kho tvaṃ, bāhiya, arahā, paṭinissajjetaṃ pāpakaṃ diṭṭhigataṃ, mā te ahosi dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya, sammāsambuddho loke uppanno. So hi bhagavā arahā, gaccha naṃ payirupāsassū’’ti āha. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho bāhiyassa dārucīriyassa purāṇasālohitā devatā’’tiādi.
这里,“有怜悯”是指有爱护他人的品性、以悲悯为主。“愿求利益”是指希望他人得到好处、以慈爱为主。这里,前一个词显示那位天神想去除婆醯的痛苦,后一个词显示她想给他带来利益。“以心”是指用她自己的心;这里应当理解为本段是以“心”为首要,取的是他心智。“心的活动”是指他内心的运作。“了知后”就是知道之后。“便前去”是说:就像力气大的人能屈伸手臂一样,那位梵天从梵天界消失,以出现在婆醯面前的方式来到他跟前。“说了这话”是指梵天说出接下来要讲的这段话,也就是“婆醯,你绝不是阿拉汉……”等等。这就像抓住一个带着赃物的小偷一样,是针对婆醯心中生起的“世间凡是阿拉汉或入阿拉汉道者……”这类邪念而说的。“婆醯,你绝不是阿拉汉”这句话,否定了他在当时是无学;“也不入阿拉汉道”这句话,否定了他是还有学的圣者。这两者合起来,就显示了他并非圣者。“你甚至没有那条道”——那条能让你成为阿拉汉或进入阿拉汉道的道路,你根本没有:这句话甚至否定了他是善凡夫。这里,“道”指戒清净等六种清净。因为是通过它进入圣道,所以称为“道”。“成为”意思是“你将是”。巴利
Tattha anukampikāti anuggahasīlā karuṇādhikā. Atthakāmāti hitakāmā mettādhikā. Purimapadena cettha bāhiyassa dukkhāpanayanakāmataṃ tassā devatāya dasseti, pacchimena hitūpasaṃhāraṃ. Cetasāti attano cittena, cetosīsena cettha cetopariyañāṇaṃ gahitanti veditabbaṃ. Cetoparivitakkanti tassa cittappavattiṃ. Aññāyāti jānitvā. Tenupasaṅkamīti seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso samiñjitaṃ vā bāhaṃ pasāreyya, pasāritaṃ vā bāhaṃ samiñjeyya, evameva brahmaloke antarahito bāhiyassa purato pātubhavanavasena upasaṅkami. Etadavocāti ‘‘ye kho keci loke arahanto vā’’tiādipavattamicchāparivitakkaṃ bāhiyaṃ sahoḍhaṃ coraṃ gaṇhanto viya ‘‘neva kho tvaṃ, bāhiya, arahā’’tiādikaṃ etaṃ idāni vuccamānavacanaṃ brahmā avoca. Neva kho tvaṃ, bāhiya, arahāti etena tadā bāhiyassa asekkhabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipati, nāpi arahattamaggaṃ vā samāpannoti etena sekkhabhāvaṃ, ubhayenapissa anariyabhāvameva dīpeti. Sāpi te paṭipadā natthi, yāya tvaṃ arahā vā assa arahattamaggaṃ vā samāpannoti iminā panassa kalyāṇaputhujjanabhāvampi paṭikkhipati. Tattha paṭipadāti sīlavisuddhiādayo cha visuddhiyo. Paṭipajjati etāya ariyamaggeti paṭipadā. Assāti bhaveyyāsi.
他这种“我已证得阿拉汉”的增上慢,是依靠什么生起的呢?有些人说:“因为他长期以来少欲、知足、勤修苦行,又因彼分断而灭除了烦恼,所以生起了阿拉汉慢。”另一些人则说:“婆醯是初禅等四种禅那的证得者,所以他因镇伏断而令烦恼不现行,由此生起了阿拉汉慢。”然而这两种说法都只是他们各自的见解,因为注疏中说:“他心怀受人尊敬之想,贪求利养、恭敬与名声。”因此,这里应当依照前面所说的方式来理解其含义。巴利
Ayañcassa arahattādhimāno kiṃ nissāya uppannoti? ‘‘Appicchatāya santuṭṭhitāya sallekhatāya dīgharattaṃ katādhikārattā tadaṅgappahānavasena kilesānaṃ vihatattā arahattādhimāno uppanno’’ti keci vadanti. Apare panāhu ‘‘bāhiyo paṭhamādijhānacatukkalābhī, tasmāssa vikkhambhanappahānena kilesānaṃ asamudācārato arahattādhimāno uppajjatī’’ti. Tadubhayampi tesaṃ matimattameva ‘‘sambhāvanādhippāyo lābhasakkārasilokaṃ nikāmayamāno’’ti ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ āgatattā. Tasmā vuttanayenevettha attho veditabbo.
这时,婆醯看着站在虚空中说法的大梵天,心里想:“啊,这业实在沉重!我竟然自认为已是阿拉汉,而这位却说‘你连通往阿拉汉的道路都没有’。这世间到底有没有阿拉汉呢?”于是他便向大梵天问。因此经中说:“天神,那么如今在这世间,谁是阿拉汉,或者谁已进入阿拉汉道呢?”巴利
Atha bāhiyo ākāse ṭhatvā kathentaṃ mahābrahmānaṃ oloketvā cintesi – ‘‘aho bhāriyaṃ vata kammaṃ, yamahaṃ arahāti cintesiṃ, ayañca ‘arahattagāminī paṭipadāpi te natthī’ti vadati, atthi nu kho loke koci arahā’’ti? Atha naṃ pucchi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha ke carahi devate loke arahanto vā arahattamaggaṃ vā samāpannā’’ti.
这里,“atha(那时)”是提问开头的一个语气词。“ke carahi(哪些人现今)”就是“现在有哪些人”。“loke(世间)”指器世间。这里的意思是:在整个赡部洲这片器世间中,如今哪个地方住着阿拉汉,或者住着已进入阿拉汉道的人?我们到那里去亲近他们,依止他们的教导,就能从轮回之苦中解脱。“Uttaresu(在北方)”是就苏帕拉卡港的东北方向而说的。巴利
Tattha athāti pucchārambhe nipāto. Ke carahīti ke etarahi. Loketi okāsaloke. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – bhājanalokabhūte sakalasmiṃ jambudīpatale kasmiṃ ṭhāne arahanto vā arahattamaggaṃ vā samāpannā etarahi viharanti, yattha mayaṃ te upasaṅkamitvā tesaṃ ovāde ṭhatvā vaṭṭadukkhato muccissāmāti. Uttaresūti suppārakapaṭṭanato pubbuttaradisābhāgaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.
阿拉汉:因为远离,所以叫阿拉汉。他确实以圣道彻底摧毁了一切烦恼连同它们的习气,因此从一切烦恼中远远地、极其遥远地安住。或者,因为杀灭了敌人,所以叫阿拉汉。因为世尊以圣道毫无剩余地杀灭、断除了一切烦恼之敌。或者,因为斩断了轮辐,所以叫阿拉汉。那无始以来不断转起的轮回之轮,以无明、有、渴爱为轮毂,以福行等诸行为轮辐,以老死为轮辋,被诸漏所集成的车轴贯穿,套在三有的车上。世尊在菩提树下,以精进的双脚站在戒的大地上,以信心之手拿起能灭尽诸业的智慧利斧,把所有的轮辐都斩断、击碎、摧毁了。或者,因为值得供养,所以叫阿拉汉。因为世尊在包括天神的世间中是最值得供养的,堪受殊胜的衣等资具以及特别的供养。或者,因为没有隐秘,所以叫阿拉汉。因为如来已经完全断除了贪等一切烦恼,连恶的烦恼都不再生起,绝没有任何作恶需要隐藏的事,所以称为阿拉汉。巴利
Arahanti ārakattā arahaṃ. Ārakā hi so sabbakilesehi suvidūravidūre ṭhito maggena savāsanānaṃ kilesānaṃ viddhaṃsitattā. Arīnaṃ vā hatattā arahaṃ. Bhagavatā hi kilesārayo anavasesato ariyamaggena hatā samucchinnāti. Arānaṃ vā hatattā arahaṃ. Yañca avijjābhavataṇhāmayanābhi puññādiabhisaṅkhārāraṃ jarāmaraṇanemi āsavasamudayamayena akkhena vijjhitvā tibhavarathe samāyojitaṃ anādikālappavattaṃ saṃsāracakkaṃ. Tassānena bodhimaṇḍe vīriyapādehi sīlapathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhāya saddhāhatthena kammakkhayakarañāṇapharasuṃ gahetvā sabbepi arā hatā vihatā viddhaṃsitāti. Arahatīti vā arahaṃ. Bhagavā hi sadevake loke aggadakkhiṇeyyattā uḷāre cīvarādipaccaye pūjāvisesañca arahati. Rahābhāvato vā arahaṃ. Tathāgato hi sabbaso samucchinnarāgādikilesattā pāpakilesassāpi asambhavato pāpakaraṇe rahābhāvatopi arahanti vuccati.
正自觉者:因为他正确、并且靠自己觉悟了一切法,所以称为正自觉者。世尊确实对那些应当证知的法,以应当证知的方式证知了;对那些应当遍知的法,以应当遍知的方式遍知了;对那些应当断除的法,以应当断除的方式断除了;对那些应当证悟的法,以应当证悟的方式证悟了;对那些应当修习的法,以应当修习的方式修习了。关于这一点,经中确实这样说过:巴利
Sammā sāmañca sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattā sammāsambuddho. Bhagavā hi abhiññeyye dhamme abhiññeyyato, pariññeyye dhamme pariññeyyato, pahātabbe dhamme pahātabbato, sacchikātabbe dhamme sacchikātabbato, bhāvetabbe dhamme bhāvetabbato abhisambujjhi. Vuttañhetaṃ –
应当证知的已经证知,应当修习的也已经修习;
应当断除的,我已经断除了,所以,婆罗门啊,我是觉者。巴利
‘‘Abhiññeyyaṃ abhiññātaṃ, bhāvetabbañca bhāvitaṃ; Pahātabbaṃ pahīnaṃ me, tasmā buddhosmi brāhmaṇā’’ti. (su. ni. 563; ma. ni. 2.399; visuddhi. 1.131);
另外,还可以用一切三法、二法等方式来说明这个意思,比如:善法从无过失的乐果来说,不善法从有过失的苦果来说,等等。这样,以不颠倒的自证智,从一切方面觉悟了一切法,所以称为正自觉者——这是这里简略的说明。详细的说明,则应依照《清净道论》里所说的方法来了知。为阿拉汉果位,是指为证得最高的果位。说法,是指随顺所化众生的意乐,开示具备初善等功德、包含戒等修行方法的法,或者开示止与观的法。巴利
Apica kusale dhamme anavajjasukhavipākato, akusale dhamme sāvajjadukkhavipākatotiādinā sabbattikadukādivasena ayamattho netabbo. Iti aviparītaṃ sayambhuñāṇena sabbākārato sabbadhammānaṃ abhisambuddhattā sammāsambuddhoti ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthāro pana visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.129-131) āgatanayeneva veditabbo. Arahattāyāti aggaphalappaṭilābhāya. Dhammaṃ desetīti ādikalyāṇādiguṇavisesayuttaṃ sīlādipaṭipadādhammaṃ samathavipassanādhammameva vā veneyyajjhāsayānurūpaṃ upadisati katheti.
他生起了悚惧,意思是:他被天神那番话所引发,内心受到震动,心想:“唉,真是可厌啊,贤者们,凡夫的状态!我明明不是阿拉汉,却自以为‘我是阿拉汉’;正自觉者已经出现在世间、正在说法,我却不知道。确实,生命难以预料,死亡难以预料。”这就是“生起悚惧”的意思——他因天神所说的话,按上述方式生起了震动。
“就在那时”,就是指在那个当下。
“从苏波罗迦出发”,意思是:他仅仅因为听到“佛”这个名称,心中就生起了以佛为所缘的喜悦,又被悚惧所驱使,于是从苏波罗迦港出发,前往舍卫城。
“一切处只住一夜”,意思是:整段旅途中,他每处都只住一夜就走了。从苏波罗迦港到舍卫城有一百二十由旬,而他在这么长的路上只住了一夜就到了。也就是说,他从苏波罗迦出发的当天,就到达了舍卫城。巴利
Saṃvejitoti ‘‘dhiratthu vata, bho, puthujjanabhāvassa, yenāhaṃ anarahāva samāno arahāti amaññiṃ, sammāsambuddhañca loke uppajjitvā dhammaṃ desentaṃ na jāniṃ, dujjānaṃ kho panidaṃ jīvitaṃ, dujjānaṃ maraṇa’’nti saṃvegamāpādito, devatāvacanena yathāvuttenākārena saṃviggamānasoti attho. Tāvadevāti tasmiṃyeva khaṇe. Suppārakā pakkāmīti buddhoti nāmamapi savanena uppannāya buddhārammaṇāya pītiyā saṃvegena ca codiyamānahadayo suppārakapaṭṭanato sāvatthiṃ uddissa pakkanto. Sabbattha ekarattiparivāsenāti sabbasmiṃ magge ekarattivāseneva agamāsi. Suppārakapaṭṭanato hi sāvatthi vīsayojanasate hoti, tañcāyaṃ ettakaṃ addhānaṃ ekarattivāsena agamāsi. Yadā suppārakato nikkhanto, tadaheva sāvatthiṃ sampattoti.
那么,他究竟是怎样这样到达的呢?有人说是靠天神的威力,也有人说“是靠佛陀的威力”。不过,既然经文说“在一切处都只住一夜”,而这段路程又有一百二十由旬,那么意思就是:他在旅途中的村落、城镇和王都,无论在哪里过夜,都不在那里等到第二天天亮,而是每处都只住一夜,就这样到达了舍卫城。这样,这个含义就显示出来了。但不应该这样理解。因为“在这整整一百二十由旬的路上只住一夜”才是这里要表达的意思。他在那整段路上只过了一夜,第二天上午就到达了舍卫城。巴利
Kathaṃ panāyaṃ evaṃ agamāsīti? Devatānubhāvena, ‘‘buddhānubhāvenā’’tipi vadanti. ‘‘Sabbattha ekarattiparivāsenā’’ti pana vuttattā maggassa ca vīsayojanasatikattā antarāmagge gāmanigamarājadhānīsu yattha yattha rattiyaṃ vasati, tattha tattha dutiyaṃ aruṇaṃ anuṭṭhāpetvā sabbattha ekarattivāseneva sāvatthiṃ upasaṅkamīti ayamattho dīpito hotīti. Nayidaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sabbasmiṃ vīsayojanasatike magge ekarattivāsenāti imassa atthassa adhippetattā. Ekarattimattaṃ so sakalasmiṃ tasmiṃ magge vasitvā pacchimadivase pubbaṇhasamaye sāvatthiṃ anuppattoti.
世尊也知道婆醯来了,心想:“他的根器现在还没成熟,再过一会儿就会成熟。”于是,世尊为了等待他的根器成熟,就在那时被大比丘僧团围绕着,进入舍卫城乞食。婆醯进了祇园,看见许多吃过早饭、为了消除身体的沉重困倦而在露天处经行的比丘,就问:“世尊现在在哪里?”比丘们说:“世尊已经进舍卫城乞食了。”接着问他:“你从哪里来?”他说:“我从苏波罗迦港口来。”比丘们说:“你从那么远来,先坐下,洗洗脚,涂点油,稍微休息一下。等世尊回来,你就能见到大师了。”婆醯说:“尊者,我不知道自己的命还能撑多久。我一整夜没停没坐,赶了一百二十由旬的路来到这里。我要见到大师之后才休息。”说完就急匆匆地进了舍卫城,见到了世尊——正以无与伦比的佛陀威仪光辉赫奕地显现着。因此经文才说:“那时,有众多比丘在露天处经行。这时,穿树皮衣的婆醯来到那些比丘那里……”等等。巴利
Bhagavāpi bāhiyassa āgamanaṃ ñatvā ‘‘na tāvassa indriyāni paripākaṃ gatāni, khaṇantare pana paripākaṃ gamissantī’’ti tassa indriyānaṃ paripākaṃ āgamayamāno mahābhikkhusaṅghaparivuto tasmiṃ khaṇe sāvatthiṃ piṇḍāya pāvisi. So ca jetavanaṃ pavisitvā bhuttapātarāse kāyālasiyavimocanatthaṃ abbhokāse caṅkamante sambahule bhikkhū passitvā ‘‘kahaṃ nu kho etarahi bhagavā’’ti pucchi. Bhikkhū ‘‘bhagavā sāvatthiṃ piṇḍāya paviṭṭho’’ti vatvā pucchiṃsu ‘‘tvaṃ pana kuto āgato’’ti? ‘‘Suppārakapaṭṭanato āgatomhī’’ti. ‘‘Dūrato āgatosi, nisīda, tāva pāde dhovitvā makkhetvā thokaṃ vissamāhi, āgatakāle satthāraṃ dakkhasī’’ti. ‘‘Ahaṃ, bhante, attano jīvitantarāyaṃ na jānāmi, ekarattenevamhi katthacipi ciraṃ aṭṭhatvā anisīditvā vīsayojanasatikaṃ maggaṃ āgato, satthāraṃ passitvāva vissamissāmī’’ti vatvā taramānarūpo sāvatthiṃ pavisitvā anopamāya buddhasiriyā virocamānaṃ bhagavantaṃ passi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tena kho pana samayena sambahulā bhikkhū abbhokāse caṅkamanti. Atha kho bāhiyo dārucīriyo yena te bhikkhū tenupasaṅkamī’’tiādi.
这里,“何处”是问在什么地方。“今”表示疑问,“今”是补足音节的语助词,整句的意思是:如今究竟在什么地方?“我等欲见”是说我们想见到。因为我们想见到那位世尊、想亲近世尊,就像盲人想得到眼睛,聋人想得到耳朵,哑巴想得到善巧的言语,手脚残缺的人想得到手脚,穷人想得到财富,走在旷野险路上的人想得到安稳之地,被疾病压倒的人想得到健康,在大海中船破的人想得到大筏子一样——他用这些来显示这种渴望。“速疾之貌”就是指匆忙急切的样子。巴利
Tattha kahanti kattha. Nūti saṃsaye, khoti padapūraṇe, kasmiṃ nu kho padeseti attho. Dassanakāmamhāti daṭṭhukāmā amha. Mayañhi taṃ bhagavantaṃ andho viya cakkhuṃ, badhiro viya sotaṃ, mūgo viya kalyāṇavākkaraṇaṃ, hatthapādavikalo viya hatthapāde, daliddo viya dhanasampadaṃ, kantāraddhānappaṭipanno viya khemantabhūmiṃ, rogābhibhūto viya ārogyaṃ, mahāsamudde bhinnanāvo viya mahākullaṃ passituṃ upasaṅkamituñca icchāmāti dasseti. Taramānarūpoti taramānākāro.
令人悦意:因为具足三十二大人相、八十随形好、一寻光与顶髻庄严,色身殊胜,从一切方面都令人悦意,所以对于倾心观见色身的人,能在一切方面令其生起净信。应令净信:因为具足十力、四无畏、六不共智、十八不共佛法等无量功德聚集而成的法身成就,对于善于拣择的人,是应令净信、可令净信、值得净信的。寂静根:由于眼等五根的散乱放逸已经消失,所以五根寂静。寂静意:由于第六意根不再追逐外境,所以心意寂静。证得最上调御寂静:已经证得、获得并安住于那称为出世间慧解脱与心解脱的最上调御和寂静。调伏:因为身行极其清净,没有手足乱动等过失,也没有嬉笑等,所以身体已得调伏。守护:因为语行极其清净,没有无义语,也没有嬉笑等,所以语言已得守护。制根:因为意行极其清净,依圣者神通相应,不作无谓的造作与思虑,所以从意根方面说已制根。龙:因为不随贪欲等而去,因为已断的贪等烦恼不再回来,因为对任何人的任何伤害都完全不做,也因为不再受后有,由这些原因称为龙。在这里,以“令人悦意”显示世尊以色身而为衡量标准,以“应令净信”显示以法身而为衡量标准,以“寂静根”等显示以其余功德而为衡量标准。由此可知,在四种衡量标准具足的世间中,世尊作为众生的衡量标准,已毫无遗漏地显示出来。巴利
Pāsādikanti bāttiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇaasītianubyañjanabyāmappabhāketumālālaṅkatāya samantapāsādikāya attano sarīrasobhāsampattiyā rūpakāyadassanabyāvaṭassa janassa sabbabhāgato pasādāvahaṃ. Pasādanīyanti dasabalacatuvesārajjachaasādhāraṇañāṇaaṭṭhārasāveṇika- buddhadhammappabhutiaparimāṇaguṇagaṇasamannāgatāya dhammakāyasampattiyā sarikkhakajanassa pasādanīyaṃ pasīditabbayuttaṃ pasādārahaṃ vā. Santindriyanti cakkhādipañcindriyalolabhāvāpagamanena vūpasantapañcindriyaṃ. Santamānasanti chaṭṭhassa manindriyassa nibbisevanabhāvūpagamanena vūpasantamānasaṃ. Uttamadamathasamathamanuppattanti lokuttarapaññāvimutticetovimuttisaṅkhātaṃ uttamaṃ damathaṃ samathañca anuppatvā adhigantvā ṭhitaṃ. Dantanti suparisuddhakāyasamācāratāya ceva hatthapādakukkuccābhāvato davādiabhāvato ca kāyena dantaṃ. Guttanti suparisuddhavacīsamācāratāya ceva niratthakavācābhāvato davādiabhāvato ca vācāya guttaṃ. Yatindriyanti suparisuddhamanosamācāratāya ariyiddhiyogena abyāvaṭaappaṭisaṅkhānupekkhābhāvato ca manindriyavasena yatindriyaṃ. Nāganti chandādivasena agamanato, pahīnānaṃ rāgādikilesānaṃ punānāgamanato, kassacipi āgussa sabbathāpi akaraṇato, punabbhavassa ca agamanatoti imehi kāraṇehi nāgaṃ. Ettha ca pāsādikanti iminā rūpakāyena bhagavato pamāṇabhūtataṃ dīpeti, pasādanīyanti iminā dhammakāyena, santindriyantiādinā sesehi pamāṇabhūtataṃ dīpeti. Tena catuppamāṇike lokasannivāse anavasesato sattānaṃ bhagavato pamāṇabhāvo pakāsitoti veditabbo.
他看见世尊这样在街道中间行走,心中欢喜满足,想道:“我过了这么久,终于见到了正自觉者!”五种喜悦遍满全身,没有一刻间断。因为太欢喜了,他双眼睁得大大的,一动不动。从看见世尊的那个地方开始,他就弯下身子,融入并沉没在世尊身体光明的中间,然后走近世尊,以五体投地的方式礼拜,一边揉抚、亲吻世尊的双脚,一边说:“尊者,请世尊为我说法。”因此经中说:“他以头面顶礼世尊的双足后,对世尊这样说:‘尊者,请世尊为我说法,请善逝为我说法,这能让我长久获得利益和安乐。’”巴利
Evaṃbhūtañca bhagavantaṃ antaravīthiyaṃ gacchantaṃ disvā ‘‘cirassaṃ vata me sammāsambuddho diṭṭho’’ti haṭṭhatuṭṭho pañcavaṇṇāya pītiyā nirantaraṃ phuṭasarīro pītivipphāritavivaṭaniccalalocano diṭṭhaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya oṇatasarīro bhagavato sarīrappabhāvemajjhaṃ ajjhogāhetvā tattha nimujjanto bhagavato samīpaṃ upasaṅkamitvā pañcapatiṭṭhitena vanditvā bhagavato pāde sambāhanto paricumbanto ‘‘desetu me, bhante, bhagavā dhamma’’nti āha. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘bhagavato pādesirasā nipatitvā bhagavantaṃ etadavoca – ‘desetu me, bhante, bhagavā dhammaṃ, desetu sugato dhammaṃ, yaṃ mamassa dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāyā’’’ti.
在这里,“善逝”这个称号,是因为行走美好,因为到达了美妙之处,因为正确地行走,因为正确地言说,所以称为善逝。因为“行走”也可以叫作“去”,而世尊的去行是美好、清净、无可指责的。那这又是什么呢?就是圣道。凭借这个行走,他毫无阻碍地走向安稳的方向,也让别人走向那里,所以因为行走美好而称为善逝。而且他到达了美妙之处——不死的涅槃,所以因为到达美妙之处而称为善逝。又因为正确地行走,通过种种圣道所断除的烦恼不再回来,所以也是善逝。关于这一点确实这样说过:巴利
Tattha sugatoti sobhanagamanattā, sundaraṃ ṭhānaṃ gatattā, sammā gatattā, sammā gadattā sugato. Gamanampi hi gatanti vuccati, tañca bhagavato sobhanaṃ parisuddhaṃ anavajjaṃ. Kiṃ pana tanti? Ariyamaggo. Tena hesa gamanena khemaṃ disaṃ asajjamāno gato, aññepi gametīti sobhanagamanattā sugato. Sundarañcesa ṭhānaṃ amataṃ nibbānaṃ gatoti sundaraṃ ṭhānaṃ gatattā sugato. Sammā ca gatattā sugato tena tena maggena pahīne kilese puna apaccāgamanato. Vuttañhetaṃ –
以须陀洹道所断除的烦恼,他不再返回、不再退转、不再回到那些烦恼,所以称为善逝。以一来道……(中略)……以阿罗汉道……(中略)……所断除的烦恼,他不再返回、不再退转、不再回到那些烦恼,所以称为善逝。巴利
‘‘Sotāpattimaggena ye kilesā pahīnā, te kilese na puneti na pacceti na paccāgacchatīti sugato. Sakadāgāmi…pe… arahattamaggena…pe… na paccāgacchatīti sugato’’ti (cūḷani. mettagūmāṇavapucchāniddesa 27).
或者,因为正确行进的缘故——在三个阶段中都以正确的方式行进,所以是善逝,意思是善于修行。确实,从燃灯佛足下开始,一直到菩提座,圆满三十种波罗蜜,以正行道达到知义行、世间义行、佛陀义行的顶点,一直在增长一切世间的利益与安乐;不落入常见、断见、欲乐、自我折磨这些极端,以无上的、被称为觉支修习的中道,在圣谛上进一步证得法的殊胜。对一切众生以不执著的正行道而行、而修行,因此也因为正确行进而名为善逝。而且他正确地说话,在恰当之处只说恰当的话,所以也是善逝。关于这一点也曾这样说:巴利
Atha vā sammā gatattāti tīsupi avatthāsu sammāpaṭipattiyā gatattā, suppaṭipannattāti attho. Dīpaṅkarapādamūlato hi paṭṭhāya yāva mahābodhimaṇḍā tāva samatiṃsapāramipūritāya sammāpaṭipattiyā ñātatthacariyāya lokatthacariyāya buddhatthacariyāya koṭiṃ pāpuṇitvā sabbalokassa hitasukhameva paribrūhanto sassataṃ ucchedaṃ kāmasukhaṃ attakilamathanti ime ante anupagacchantiyā anuttarāya bojjhaṅgabhāvanāsaṅkhātāya majjhimāya paṭipadāya ariyasaccesu tato paraṃ samadhigatadhammādhipateyyo sabbasattesu avisayāya sammāpaṭipattiyā ca gato paṭipannoti evampi sammā gatattā sugato. Sammā cesa gadati yuttaṭṭhāne yuttameva vācaṃ bhāsatīti sugato. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
他说适时的话、说真实的话、说有益的话、说法、说律;在适当的时候说话,所说的话有根据、有理由、有分寸、与义利相应。巴利
‘‘Kālavādī , bhūtavādī, atthavādī, dhammavādī, vinayavādī, nidhānavatiṃ vācaṃ bhāsitā kālena sāpadesaṃ pariyantavatiṃ atthasaṃhita’’nti (dī. ni. 1.9; ma. ni. 3.14).
另外还有一种说法。巴利
Aparampi vuttaṃ –
如果一句话不真实、不符合事实、没有利益,而且会让别人听了不喜欢、不舒服,如来就不会说这样的话。巴利
‘‘Yā sā vācā abhūtā atacchā anatthasaṃhitā, yā ca paresaṃ appiyā amanāpā, na taṃ tathāgato vācaṃ bhāsatī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 2.86).
因为自己这样如实地说了,所以他是善逝。巴利
Evaṃ sammā gadattāpi sugato.
“能让我长久得到利益和安乐”,意思是:对法的开示,能让我在很长时间里获得禅那、解脱等利益,以及证得这些之后所得的安乐。“婆醯,现在还不是时候”,意思是:现在还不是为你说法的时候。那难道世尊在利益众生的事业上,也会有“不是时候”吗?世尊不是一向应时而言的吗?这里说的“时候”,指的是应受教化的众生根器成熟的时候。可是当时婆醯自己的根器是成熟还是没成熟,很难判断,所以世尊没有直接说这个,而是举出自己正站在街巷中间这件事作为理由,说“我们已经走进人家屋里了”。“难知”就是难以明了。“命的障碍”:他本来想说“那些能障碍生命存续的法,是在起作用还是没起作用”,但因为话说得急,就只说成“命的障碍”。生命确实是靠许多条件才得以延续的,而障碍它的情况也有种种不同。过去曾这样说:巴利
Yaṃ mamassa dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāyāti yaṃ dhammassa upadisanaṃ cirakālaṃ mama jhānavimokkhādihitāya tadadhigantabbasukhāya ca siyā. Akālo kho tāva bāhiyāti tava dhammadesanāya na tāva kāloti attho. Kiṃ pana bhagavato sattahitapaṭipattiyā akālopi nāma atthi, yato bhagavā kālavādīti? Vuccate – kāloti cettha veneyyānaṃ indriyaparipākakālo adhippeto. Yasmā pana tadā bāhiyassa attano indriyānaṃ paripakkāparipakkabhāvo dubbiññeyyo, tasmā bhagavā taṃ avatvā attano antaravīthiyaṃ ṭhitabhāvamassa kāraṇaṃ apadisanto āha ‘‘antaragharaṃ paviṭṭhamhā’’ti. Dujjānanti dubbiññeyyaṃ. Jīvitantarāyānanti jīvitassa antarāyakaradhammānaṃ vattanaṃ avattanaṃ vāti vattukāmo sambhamavasena ‘‘jīvitantarāyāna’’nti āha. Tathā hi anekapaccayappaṭibaddhavuttijīvitaṃ anekarūpā ca tadantarāyā. Vuttañhi –
今天就该努力修行,谁知道明天会不会死呢?
我们和那拥有大军的死神,确实没有什么约定。巴利
‘‘Ajjeva kiccamātappaṃ, ko jaññā maraṇaṃ suve; Na hi no saṅgaraṃ tena, mahāsenena maccunā’’ti. (ma. ni. 3.272; netti. 103);
为什么他首先只把生命危险提出来呢?有些人说:“因为他善于了解征相,或者因为他有守护的善巧。”另一些人说:“因为他在天神面前听说了生命有危险。”然而,由于他是最后一生的人,受到亲依止成就的推动,才这样说。因为那些还没有证得阿罗汉果的人,生命并不会就此结束。那么,世尊本来就想为他说法,为什么两次拒绝呢?据说世尊这样想:“从见到我的那一刻起,他全身就被喜悦不断遍满,喜悦的冲动极为强烈,即使听了法,当下也还不能通达。不过,等到中舍的状态稳定下来,就让它稳定吧;他走了一百由旬的路,身体的疲惫也很强烈,也让那疲惫先平息下来吧。”所以世尊两次拒绝。也有些人说:“世尊这样做,是为了让婆醯对听闻佛法生起恭敬心。”然而,当第三次被请求时,世尊看到他已处于中舍,疲惫已经平息,而且他的生命危险也现前了,便想:“现在正是说法的时候。”于是以“因此,婆醯……”等语开始说法。巴利
Kasmā panāyaṃ jīvitantarāyameva tāva purakkharoti? ‘‘Nimittaññutāya adiṭṭhakosallena vā’’ti keci. Apare ‘‘devatāya santike jīvitantarāyassa sutattā’’ti vadanti. Antimabhavikattā pana upanissayasampattiyā codiyamāno evamāha. Na hi tesaṃ appattaarahattānaṃ jīvitakkhayo hoti. Kiṃ pana kāraṇā bhagavā tassa dhammaṃ desetukāmova dvikkhattuṃ paṭikkhipi? Evaṃ kirassa ahosi ‘‘imassa maṃ diṭṭhakālato paṭṭhāya sakalasarīraṃ pītiyā nirantaraṃ phuṭaṃ, atibalavā pītivego, dhammaṃ sutvāpi na tāva sakkhissati paṭivijjhituṃ. Yāva pana majjhattupekkhā saṇṭhāti, tāva tiṭṭhatu, vīsayojanasataṃ maggaṃ āgatattā darathopissa kāye balavā, sopi tāva paṭippassambhatū’’ti. Tasmā dvikkhattuṃ paṭikkhipi. Keci pana ‘‘dhammassavane ādarajananatthaṃ bhagavā evamakāsī’’ti vadanti. Tatiyavāraṃ yācito pana majjhattupekkhaṃ darathappaṭipassaddhiṃ paccupaṭṭhitañcassa jīvitantarāyaṃ disvā ‘‘idāni dhammadesanāya kālo’’ti cintetvā ‘‘tasmā tihā’’tiādinā dhammadesanaṃ ārabhi.
在这里,“因此”是说:因为你急切地生起,极其恳切地向我请求;或者因为你说生命障碍难以了知,而且你的诸根已经成熟,所以说“因此”。“那么”只是一个语气词。“你”是指“由你”,现在说出应当表达的方式。巴利
Tattha tasmāti yasmā tvaṃ ussukkajāto hutvā ativiya maṃ yācasi, yasmā vā jīvitantarāyānaṃ dujjānataṃ vadasi, indriyāni ca te paripākaṃ gatāni, tasmā. Tihāti nipātamattaṃ. Teti tayā evanti idāni vattabbākāraṃ vadati.
应当修学,是指依增上戒学等三学来修习。接着,为了说明应当怎样修学,他说了“于所见,唯是所见”等话。巴利
Sikkhitabbanti adhisīlasikkhādīnaṃ tissannampi sikkhānaṃ vasena sikkhanaṃ kātabbaṃ. Yathā pana sikkhitabbaṃ, taṃ dassento ‘‘diṭṭhe diṭṭhamattaṃ bhavissatī’’tiādimāha.
在这里,“于所见,只是所见”,是指在色处由眼识所见的,仅仅是所见本身。就像眼识对诸色只看到色本身,并不看到无常等性质,其余诸识也是如此。应当这样修学:对我来说,通过眼门识,仅仅保持为所见本身。这就是这段话的意思。或者,“于所见”中的“所见”,是指由眼识了知色;“只是”是尺度。以所见为尺度的,就是“所见只是所见”,意思是心仅仅保持在眼识的程度。这里说的是:就像眼识面对现前的诸色,不贪、不嗔、不痴,同样,我也要远离贪等,让速行心仅仅保持在眼识的程度,以眼识为尺度来安立速行心。巴利
Tattha diṭṭhe diṭṭhamattanti rūpāyatane cakkhuviññāṇena diṭṭhamattaṃ. Yathā hi cakkhuviññāṇaṃ rūpe rūpamattameva passati, na aniccādisabhāvaṃ, evameva sesaṃ. Cakkhudvārikaviññāṇena hi me diṭṭhamattameva bhavissatīti sikkhitabbanti attho. Atha vā diṭṭhe diṭṭhaṃ nāma cakkhuviññāṇena rūpavijānananti attho. Mattanti pamāṇaṃ. Diṭṭhā mattā etassāti diṭṭhamattaṃ, cakkhuviññāṇamattameva cittaṃ bhavissatīti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā āpāthagate rūpe cakkhuviññāṇaṃ na rajjati, na dussati, na muyhati, evaṃ rāgādivirahena cakkhuviññāṇamattameva me javanaṃ bhavissati, cakkhuviññāṇappamāṇeneva javanaṃ ṭhapessāmīti.
另一种说法是:“所见”指的是由眼识看到的色;“唯是所见”指的是就在那个色上生起的领受心、推度心、确定心这三种心。就像这三种心不贪、不嗔、不痴一样,面对出现在眼前的色,我也要让速行心生起,而且只以这些心为尺度,不会越过这个尺度,不让它带着贪等生起。这里要理解的就是这个意思。“闻”和“觉”也是同样的道理。“觉”应当理解为香、味、触处,以及与之相应的领受识等。至于“于所知,唯是所知”:这里的“所知”指的是由意门转向识所了知的所缘。“于那个所知,唯是所知”就是以转向为尺度。就像转向心不贪、不嗔、不痴一样,我不让心带着贪等生起,而是只以转向的尺度来安住心。这就是这里的意思。婆醯,你就应当这样修学:也就是说,婆醯,你应当依照这条修行道路,随顺戒、定、慧三学来修学。巴利
Atha vā diṭṭhaṃ nāma cakkhuviññāṇena diṭṭhaṃ rūpaṃ, diṭṭhamattaṃ nāma tattheva uppannaṃ sampaṭicchanasantīraṇavoṭṭhabbanasaṅkhātaṃ cittattayaṃ. Yathā taṃ na rajjati, na dussati, na muyhati, evaṃ āpāthagate rūpe teneva sampaṭicchanādippamāṇena javanaṃ uppādessāmi, nāhaṃ taṃ pamāṇaṃ atikkamitvā rajjanādivasena uppajjituṃ dassāmīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Eseva nayo sutamute . Mutanti tadārammaṇaviññāṇehi saddhiṃ gandharasaphoṭṭhabbāyatanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Viññāte viññātamattanti ettha pana viññātaṃ nāma manodvārāvajjanena viññātārammaṇaṃ. Tasmiṃ viññāte viññātamattanti āvajjanappamāṇaṃ. Yathā āvajjanaṃ na rajjati, na dussati, na muyhati, evaṃ rajjanādivasena ca uppajjituṃ adatvā āvajjanappamāṇeneva cittaṃ ṭhapessāmīti ayamettha attho. Evañhi te, bāhiya, sikkhitabbanti evaṃ imāya paṭipadāya tayā, bāhiya, tissannaṃ sikkhānaṃ anuvattanavasena sikkhitabbaṃ.
世尊因为婆醯喜欢简略,就用六识身配合六种所缘,把有差别的观禅境界分成“所见”等四个方面来说明,并为他开示了其中的知遍知和度遍知。怎么开示呢?这里,色处因为具有“应当被见”的意义,所以叫“所见”;而眼识以及和它同一门的所有识,因为具有“见”的作用,所以也叫“所见”。这两者都只是随因缘而生起的法而已,其中没有任何作者或指使者。因此,它们以“生起后便消失”为无常,以“不断被生灭逼迫”为苦,以“不能自主”为无我。有智慧的人怎么还会在其中生起贪著等呢?这就是这里的意旨。对“所闻”等也是如此。巴利
Iti bhagavā bāhiyassa saṃkhittarucitāya chahi viññāṇakāyehi saddhiṃ chaḷārammaṇabhedabhinnaṃ vipassanāya visayaṃ diṭṭhādīhi catūhi koṭṭhāsehi vibhajitvā tatthassa ñātatīraṇapariññaṃ dasseti. Kathaṃ? Ettha hi rūpāyatanaṃ passitabbaṭṭhena diṭṭhaṃ nāma, cakkhuviññāṇaṃ pana saddhiṃ taṃdvārikaviññāṇehi dassanaṭṭhena, tadubhayampi yathāpaccayaṃ pavattamānaṃ dhammamattameva, na ettha koci kattā vā kāretā vā, yato taṃ hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccaṃ, udayabbayappaṭipīḷanaṭṭhena dukkhaṃ, avasavattanaṭṭhena anattāti kuto tattha paṇḍitassa rajjanādīnaṃ okāsoti? Ayamettha adhippāyo sutādīsupi.
现在,为了说明已经安住在知遍知和度遍知之上的人,如何进一步通过道与果来成就断遍知,世尊开始了“婆醯,当……”这一段开示。其中,“当”是指“在……的时候”,或者“因为”。“你”就是指你。“那时”是指那个时候,或者“因此”。“以此”是指以这些所见等,或者指与所见等相关联的贪等。这里说的是:婆醯,当你按照我所说的方式,在所见等对象上修习,以不颠倒地了知它们的真实本性,从而到达“只是所见”等状态的那个时候,或者因为这个原因,你就不会与跟所见等相关联的贪等共存,不会成为被贪染污的人、被嗔激怒的人、被痴迷惑的人;由于贪等已被断除,你就不再与那些所见等相系缚。婆醯,当你不再因贪而染、因嗔而怒、因痴而迷的时候,那时,或者因为这个原因,你就不会黏着在所见等之中,不会以“这是我的,我就是这个,这是我的自我”这样的渴爱、慢和邪见,去执取和安住在所见、所闻、所觉、所识知的对象上。到这里,断遍知已经被推到了顶点,漏尽者的境界也就显示出来了。巴利
Idāni ñātatīraṇapariññāsu patiṭṭhitassa upari saha maggaphalena pahānapariññaṃ dassetuṃ, ‘‘yato kho te, bāhiyā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha yatoti yadā, yasmā vā. Teti tava. Tatoti tadā, tasmā vā. Tenāti tena diṭṭhādinā, diṭṭhādipaṭibaddhena rāgādinā vā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – bāhiya, tava yasmiṃ kāle yena vā kāraṇena diṭṭhādīsu mayā vuttavidhiṃ paṭipajjantassa aviparītasabhāvāvabodhena diṭṭhādimattaṃ bhavissati, tasmiṃ kāle tena vā kāraṇena diṭṭhādipaṭibaddhena rāgādinā saha na bhavissasi, ratto vā duṭṭho vā mūḷho vā na bhavissasi, pahīnarāgādikattā tena vā diṭṭhādinā saha paṭibaddho na bhavissasīti. Tato tvaṃ, bāhiya, na tatthāti yadā yasmā vā tvaṃ tena rāgena vā ratto dosena vā duṭṭho mohena vā mūḷho na bhavissasi, tadā tasmā vā tvaṃ tattha diṭṭhādike na bhavissasi, tasmiṃ diṭṭhe vā sutamutaviññāte vā ‘‘etaṃ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’’ti taṇhāmānadiṭṭhīhi allīno patiṭṭhito na bhavissasi. Ettāvatā pahānapariññaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā khīṇāsavabhūmi dassitā.
婆醯,当你不再被贪等法束缚于那些所见等对象时,你就不在这个世间,不在他方世间,也不在两者之间。这就是苦的尽头——这里说的正是烦恼之苦和轮回之苦的尽头,是它们的终结。有些人抓住“在两者之间”这个词,主张有“中阴身”,这种看法是错误的。因为中阴身的存在,在阿毗达摩中已经被明确否定了。而“在之间”这个说法,只是表明另一种理解方式,所以这里的意思是:不在此,不在彼,也没有所谓的两者之间。巴利
Tatotvaṃ, bāhiya, nevidha na huraṃ na ubhayamantarenāti yadā tvaṃ, bāhiya, tena rāgādinā tattha diṭṭhādīsu paṭibaddho na bhavissasi, tadā tvaṃ neva idhaloke na paraloke na ubhayatthāpi. Esevanto dukkhassāti kilesadukkhassa ca vaṭṭadukkhassa ca ayameva hi anto ayaṃ parivaṭumabhāvoti ayameva hi ettha attho. Ye pana ‘‘ubhayamantarenā’’ti padaṃ gahetvā antarābhavaṃ nāma icchanti, tesaṃ taṃ micchā. Antarābhavassa hi bhāvo abhidhamme paṭikkhittoyeva. Antarenāti vacanaṃ pana vikappantaradīpanaṃ, tasmā ayamettha attho – ‘‘neva idha na huraṃ, aparo vikappo na ubhaya’’nti.
另外,“在之间”这个说法,是为了表明没有别的可能性。它的意思是:“不在这里,也不在那边,而在两者之间也没有别的地方。”有些人没有如理理解“中般涅槃者”和“有再生者”这些经文语句的含义,就说“确实存在中阴”。然而,所谓“中般涅槃者”,是指在无烦天等各处,没有越过寿命的中间点,就在这中间阶段通过证得最高之道、以灭尽一切烦恼的般涅槃而般涅槃,所以叫“中般涅槃者”,并不是说他是中阴的存在。这是前一句经文的意思。后一句经文里,那些已经生有而不会再受生有的漏尽者,在前一句中被说为“已生有者”。与此相反,寻求再生的人就是“有再生者”,因为还没有断除“有”的结缚,所以是有学人和凡夫。或者在胎生、卵生、湿生、化生这四种生育方式中,卵生和胎生的有情,在还没有破开卵壳或胎膜之前,就叫“有再生者”;从卵壳或胎膜出来之后,就叫“已生有者”。湿生和化生的有情,在第一个心识刹那叫“有再生者”,从第二个心识刹那开始叫“已生有者”。或者,按照他们出生时的威仪姿势,在还没有达到另一种威仪之前,叫“有再生者”,之后叫“已生有者”。因此,必须驳斥“有中阴”的说法。因为,当有与圣典直接相符的含义存在时,一个作用尚未确定、只是凭空设想出来的中阴,又有什么用处呢?巴利
Atha vā antarenāti vacanaṃ pana vikappantarābhāvadīpanaṃ. Tassattho – ‘‘neva idha na huraṃ, ubhayamantare pana na aññaṭṭhānaṃ atthī’’ti. Yepi ca ‘‘antarāparinibbāyī sambhavesī’’ti ca imesaṃ suttapadānaṃ atthaṃ ayoniso gahetvā ‘‘atthiyeva antarābhavo’’ti vadanti, tepi yasmā avihādīsu tattha tattha āyuvemajjhaṃ anatikkamitvā antarā aggamaggādhigamena anavasesakilesaparinibbānena parinibbāyatīti antarāparinibbāyī, na antarābhavabhūtoti purimassa suttapadassa attho. Pacchimassa ca ye bhūtā eva, na bhavissanti, te khīṇāsavā purimapade bhūtāti vuttā. Tabbiruddhatāya sambhavamesantīti sambhavesino, appahīnabhavasaṃyojanattā sekhā puthujjanā ca. Catūsu vā yonīsu aṇḍajajalābujasattā yāva aṇḍakosaṃ vatthikosañca na bhindanti, tāva sambhavesī nāma, aṇḍakosato vatthikosato ca bahi nikkhantā bhūtā nāma. Saṃsedajā opapātikā ca paṭhamacittakkhaṇe sambhavesī nāma, dutiyacittakkhaṇato paṭṭhāya bhūtā nāma. Yena vā iriyāpathena jāyanti, yāva tato aññaṃ na pāpuṇanti, tāva sambhavesino, tato paraṃ bhūtāti attho. Tasmā natthīti paṭikkhipitabbā. Sati hi ujuke pāḷianugate atthe kiṃ aniddhāritasāmatthiyena antarābhavena parikappitena payojananti.
不过,有些人提出这样的论证:“就像在稻种等没有心识的相续中,可以看到诸法依相续而转起时,不间断地在其他地方显现;同样,在有识的相续中,也应当以不间断的方式在其他地方显现。而这个道理只有在承认中有的情况下才说得通,否则不行。”那么,对于具足神通、心得自在的人,当他决意让身体随心意而行时,能在一刹那间从梵天界来到此处,或从此处前往梵天界,这个道理也应该说得通。如果在一切情况下都主张诸法只在没有间隔的地方生起,那么即使说“神通者的神通境界不可思议”,在这里也是一样的,因为经中说“业异熟不可思议”。所以,那只不过是他们的个人见解罢了。诸法的自性本来就是不可思议的,它们有时依靠诸缘在被隔开的地方显现,有时在没有间隔的地方显现。就像凭借口音等缘,在另一个地方——比如镜面、山壁等处——可以看到映像和回声等由缘所生的事物生起。因此,不能把一切都类推到一切地方。这是此处的简要说明。至于详细展开,比如以映像为比喻来论证等,关于中有论的探讨,应当从《论事》的复注中了解。巴利
Ye pana ‘‘santānavasena pavattamānānaṃ dhammānaṃ avicchedena desantaresu pātubhāvo diṭṭho, yathā taṃ vīhiādiaviññāṇakasantāne, evaṃ saviññāṇakasantānepi avicchedena desantaresu pātubhāvena bhavitabbaṃ. Ayañca nayo sati antarābhave yujjati, na aññathā’’ti yuttiṃ vadanti. Tena hi iddhimato cetovasippattassa cittānugatikaṃ kāyaṃ adhiṭṭhahantassa khaṇena brahmalokato idhūpasaṅkamane ito vā brahmalokagamane yutti vattabbā. Yadi sabbattheva avicchinnadese dhammānaṃ pavatti icchitā, yadipi siyā iddhimantānaṃ iddhivisayo acinteyyoti. Taṃ idhāpi samānaṃ ‘‘kammavipāko acinteyyo’’ti vacanato. Tasmā taṃ tesaṃ matimattameva. Acinteyyasabhāvā hi sabhāvadhammā, te katthaci paccayavasena vicchinnadese pātubhavanti, katthaci avicchinnadese. Tathā hi mukhaghosādīhi paccayehi aññasmiṃ dese ādāsapabbatappadesādike paṭibimbapaṭighosādikaṃ paccayuppannaṃ nibbattamānaṃ dissati, tasmā na sabbaṃ sabbattha upanetabbanti ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthāro pana paṭibimbassa udāharaṇabhāvasādhanādiko antarābhavakathāvicāro kathāvatthupakaraṇassa (kathā. 505; kathā. aṭṭha. 505) ṭīkāyaṃ gahetabbo.
另有一些人说:“‘此处’是指欲有,‘彼处’是指无色有,‘两者之间’则是指色有。”又有人说:“‘此处’是指内六处,‘彼处’是指外六处,‘两者之间’是指心与心所法。”还有人这样说:“‘此处’是指缘法,‘彼处’是指缘所生法,‘两者之间’是指施设法。”这些说法在注疏里都没有出现。首先,以“于所见唯是所见”等,按所见等把三界诸法归纳为四类。其中,通过遮止对净、乐、常、我的执取,开示了不净、苦、无常、无我的随观。因此,连同下分的清净,便以简略的方式宣说了观。而“那时,婆醯,你不随彼”这一句,因为意在令贪等烦恼彻底断除,所以是指道。“那时,婆醯,你不在那之中”是指果。“不在此……不在两者之间”等,则宣说了无余涅槃界。应当如此理解。因此经中说:“那时,婆醯……心从诸漏中解脱。”巴利
Apare pana ‘‘idhāti kāmabhavo, huranti arūpabhavo, ubhayamantarenāti rūpabhavo vutto’’ti. Aññe ‘‘idhāti ajjhattikāyatanāni, huranti bāhirāyatanāni, ubhayamantarenāti cittacetasikā’’ti. ‘‘Idhāti vā paccayadhammā, huranti paccayuppannadhammā, ubhayamantarenāti paṇṇattidhammā vuttā’’ti vadanti. Taṃ sabbaṃ aṭṭhakathāsu natthi. Evaṃ tāva ‘‘diṭṭhe diṭṭhamattaṃ bhavissatī’’tiādinā diṭṭhādivasena catudhā tebhūmakadhammā saṅgahetabbā. Tattha subhasukhaniccaattaggāhaparivajjanamukhena asubhadukkhāniccānattānupassanā dassitāti heṭṭhimāhi visuddhīhi saddhiṃ saṅkhepeneva vipassanā kathitā. ‘‘Tato tvaṃ, bāhiya, na tenā’’ti iminā rāgādīnaṃ samucchedassa adhippetattā maggo. ‘‘Tato tvaṃ, bāhiya, na tatthā’’ti iminā phalaṃ. ‘‘Nevidhā’’tiādinā anupādisesā parinibbānadhātu kathitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho bāhiyassa…pe… āsavehi cittaṃ vimuccī’’ti.
在这段简略开示的法教中,“当即”就是指就在那个刹那,而不是过了一段时间。“不执取”就是不抓取。“从诸漏”中的“漏”,是指欲贪等烦恼,它们得名“漏”,是因为流向有顶、直至种姓地、具有流转和长久伴随的含义,又像酒等使人放逸的东西一样。“解脱”是指以断除的解脱和止息的解脱而解脱,也就是舍离。因为他听导师说法时,就清净了戒,依靠所获得的心定建立观,由于速疾通晓,当即灭尽一切诸漏,连同无碍解一起证得阿拉汉果。他截断轮回之流,穷尽轮回的边际,成为最后身者;当十九种省察生起时,受到法性的鞭策,他向世尊请求出家。世尊问:“你的钵和衣齐全了吗?”他答:“不齐全。”于是导师说:“那你就去找齐钵和衣吧。”然后就离开了。因此说:“那时,世尊……便离去了。”巴利
Imāya saṃkhittapadāya desanāya tāvadevāti tasmiṃyeva khaṇe, na kālantare. Anupādāyāti aggahetvā. Āsavehīti ābhavaggaṃ āgotrabhuṃ savanato pavattanato cirapārivāsiyaṭṭhena madirādiāsavasadisatāya ca ‘‘āsavā’’ti laddhanāmehi kāmarāgādīhi. Vimuccīti samucchedavimuttiyā paṭippassaddhivimuttiyā ca vimucci nissajji. So hi satthu dhammaṃ suṇanto eva sīlāni sodhetvā yathāladdhaṃ cittasamādhiṃ nissāya vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā khippābhiññatāya tāvadeva sabbāsave khepetvā saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. So saṃsārasotaṃ chinditvā katavaṭṭapariyanto antimadehadharo hutvā ekūnavīsatiyā paccavekkhaṇāsu pavattāsu dhammatāya codiyamāno bhagavantaṃ pabbajjaṃ yāci. ‘‘Paripuṇṇaṃ te pattacīvara’’nti puṭṭho ‘‘na paripuṇṇa’’nti āha. Atha naṃ satthā ‘‘tena hi pattacīvaraṃ pariyesā’’ti vatvā pakkāmi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho bhagavā…pe… pakkāmī’’ti.
据说,他在迦叶正自觉者的教法里,做了两万年的沙门行,却心想:“所谓比丘,自己得到资具之后,随所得而布施时,应该自己受用。”因此,他连一位比丘都不曾用钵或衣来摄受,也就没有获得善来比丘具足戒的因缘。不过也有人说:“他在没有佛出世的时代做过盗贼,背弓带箭在森林里抢劫。有一次,他看见一位独觉佛,贪图那人的钵和衣,就用箭射死他,把钵和衣拿走了。因此,他不会有神通化现的钵和衣生起。导师知道这件事,就没有以善来比丘的方式让他出家。”当他正四处寻找钵和衣时,一头母牛急速冲过来,把他撞倒,夺去了他的性命。针对这件事才说:“那时,世尊离去不久,一头有幼犊的母牛冲撞了穿树皮衣的婆醯,夺去了他的生命。”巴利
So kira kassapadasabalassa sāsane vīsavassasahassāni samaṇadhammaṃ karonto ‘‘bhikkhunā nāma attanā paccaye labhitvā yathādānaṃ karontena attanāva paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti ekassa bhikkhussapi pattena vā cīvarena vā saṅgahaṃ nākāsi, tenassa ehibhikkhuupasampadāya upanissayo nāhosi. Keci panāhu – ‘‘so kira buddhasuññe loke coro hutvā dhanukalāpaṃ sannayhitvā araññe corikaṃ karonto ekaṃ paccekabuddhaṃ disvā pattacīvaralobhena taṃ usunā vijjhitvā pattacīvaraṃ gaṇhi, tenassa iddhimayapattacīvaraṃ na uppajjissatīti, satthā taṃ ñatvā ehibhikkhubhāvena pabbajjaṃ na adāsī’’ti. Tampi pattacīvarapariyesanaṃ caramānaṃ ekā dhenu vegena āpatantī paharitvā jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpesi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘atha kho acirapakkantassa bhagavato bāhiyaṃ dārucīriyaṃ gāvī taruṇavacchā adhipatitvā jīvitā voropesī’’ti.
这里,“离去不久”是指世尊离开没多久。“有幼犊的母牛”是指一位化作有幼犊母牛模样的女夜叉。“冲撞”是指压倒、踩踏。“夺去了他的生命”是指:因为过去生中曾被他杀害,所以一见到他就生起怨恨之心,用角顶撞,夺去了他的性命。巴利
Tattha acirapakkantassāti na ciraṃ pakkantassa bhagavato. Gāvī taruṇavacchāti ekā yakkhinī taruṇavacchadhenurūpā. Adhipatitvāti abhibhavitvā madditvā. Jīvitā voropesīti purimasmiṃ attabhāve laddhāghātatāya diṭṭhamatteneva vericittaṃ uppādetvā siṅgena paharitvā jīvitā voropesi.
导师乞食后,吃完饭,和许多比丘一起从城里出来时,看见婆醯的尸体被丢在垃圾堆上,就命令比丘们:“比丘们,你们站在一户人家门口,让人拿一张床来,把这具尸体从城里运出去火化,再给他建一座塔。”比丘们照办了。办完之后回到精舍,走到导师面前,禀告自己做完的事,然后问起他死后投生到哪里。于是世尊告诉他们,他已经般涅槃了。比丘们问:“尊者,您说‘穿树皮衣的婆醯证得了阿罗汉果’,他是什么时候证得的?”回答:“在我为他说法的时候。”又问:“那您是什么时候为他说法的?”回答:“就在今天,我乞食时站在街道中间为他说。”比丘们说:“尊者,您站在街道中间为他说法,那才那么一点点,他怎么能凭那么一点就证得殊胜?”世尊为了说明这个道理,说道:“比丘们,你们为何把我说的法衡量为‘少或多’呢?即使有数千首偈颂而无义利,也不如一首依于义利的偈句。”巴利
Satthā piṇḍāya caritvā katabhattakicco sambahulehi bhikkhūhi saddhiṃ nagarato nikkhamanto bāhiyassa sarīraṃ saṅkāraṭṭhāne patitaṃ disvā bhikkhū āṇāpesi – ‘‘bhikkhave, ekasmiṃ gharadvāre ṭhatvā mañcakaṃ āharāpetvā idaṃ sarīraṃ nagarato nīharitvā jhāpetvā thūpaṃ karothā’’ti, bhikkhū tathā akaṃsu. Katvā ca pana vihāraṃ gantvā satthāraṃ upasaṅkamitvā attanā katakiccaṃ ārocetvā tassa abhisamparāyaṃ pucchiṃsu. Atha nesaṃ bhagavā tassa parinibbutabhāvaṃ ācikkhi. Bhikkhū ‘‘tumhe, bhante, ‘bāhiyo dārucīriyo arahattaṃ patto’ti vadatha, kadā so arahattaṃ patto’’ti pucchiṃsu. ‘‘Mama dhammaṃ sutakāle’’ti ca vutte ‘‘kadā panassa tumhehi dhammo kathito’’ti? ‘‘Piṇḍāya carantena ajjeva antaravīthiyaṃ ṭhatvā’’ti. ‘‘Appamattako so, bhante, tumhehi antaravīthiyaṃ ṭhatvā kathitadhammo, kathaṃ so tāvatakena visesaṃ nibbattesī’’ti? ‘‘Kiṃ, bhikkhave, mama dhammaṃ ‘appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā’ti pamiṇatha, anekāni gāthāsahassānipi anatthasaṃhitāni na seyyo, atthanissitaṃ pana ekampi gāthāpadaṃ seyyo’’ti dassento –
即使有上千首偈颂,若全是无意义的句子,
哪怕只是一句偈颂,只要听了之后能让人内心平静,也比千句无意义的偈颂更好。巴利
‘‘Sahassamapi ce gāthā, anatthapadasañhitā; Ekaṃ gāthāpadaṃ seyyo, yaṃ sutvā upasammatī’’ti. (dha. pa. 101) –
说完《法句经》里的这首偈颂之后,为了表明他不仅仅因为般涅槃才值得供养,还因为“在我的声闻比丘中,他是速疾通智第一”而值得供养,世尊便说:“比丘们,在我的声闻比丘中,速疾通智第一的,就是这位穿树皮衣的婆醯。”于是把这位尊者安立在这个第一的位置上。针对这件事,经中这样说:“那时,世尊在舍卫城乞食之后……比丘们,穿树皮衣的婆醯已经般涅槃了。”巴利
Dhammapade imaṃ gāthaṃ vatvā ‘‘na kevalaṃ so parinibbānamattena, atha kho mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ khippābhiññānaṃ aggabhāvenapi pūjāraho’’ti dassento ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ khippābhiññānaṃ, yadidaṃ bāhiyo dārucīriyo’’ti (a. ni. 1.216) taṃ āyasmantaṃ etadagge ṭhapesi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘atha kho bhagavā sāvatthiyaṃ piṇḍāya caritvā…pe… parinibbuto, bhikkhave, bāhiyo dārucīriyo’’ti.
这里,“午后”是指用过饭之后。“乞食归来”是指出去乞食之后又回到原处。这两句合起来,就是在说已经用过饭了。“抬出去”是指从城里抬到城外。“火化”就是烧掉。“为他建塔”是指收取婆醯的舍利,再为他建一座塔。接着说明这样做的原因:“比丘们,你们的同梵行者已经命终了。”这句话的意思是:你们所修的是最殊胜的梵行,也就是增上戒等修行之法,他也和你们一样修了这种梵行,所以叫同梵行者;因为他已经到了临终的时候,所以说他命终了;因此,你们应当用床把他抬出去,火化之后,再为他建塔。巴利
Tattha pacchābhattanti bhattakiccato pacchā. Piṇḍapātapaṭikkantoti piṇḍapātapariyesanato paṭinivatto. Padadvayenāpi katabhattakiccoti vuttaṃ hoti. Nīharitvāti nagarato bahi netvā. Jhāpethāti dahatha. Thūpañcassa karothāti assa bāhiyassa sarīradhātuyo gahetvā cetiyañca karotha . Tattha kāraṇamāha – ‘‘sabrahmacārī vo, bhikkhave, kālakato’’ti. Tassattho – yaṃ tumhe seṭṭhaṭṭhena brahmaṃ adhisīlādipaṭipattidhammaṃ sandiṭṭhaṃ caratha, taṃ so tumhehi samānaṃ brahmaṃ acarīti sabrahmacārī maraṇakālassa pattiyāva kālakato, tasmā taṃ mañcakena nīharitvā jhāpetha, thūpañcassa karothāti.
他投生到哪儿去了?在五趣当中,他投生到哪一趣?所谓“趣”,就是再生、成为某种生命存在的方式。“趣”就是果报的达成。意思是:无论他是圣者还是凡夫,其意义如何?“死后”是指死了以后再投生,或者是指有的灭尽。虽然世尊吩咐为他建塔这件事,实际上已经表明他般涅槃了,但有些比丘光凭这一点还不明白,就问道:“他投生到哪儿去了?”也有些人是想把这件事弄得更清楚,才这样去问世尊。巴利
Tassa kā gatīti pañcasu gatīsu tassa katamā gati upapatti bhavabhūtā, gatīti nipphatti, ariyo puthujjano vāti kā niṭṭhāti attho. Abhisamparāyoti pecca bhavuppatti bhavanirodho vā. Kiñcāpi tassa thūpakaraṇāṇattiyāva parinibbutabhāvo atthato pakāsito hoti, ye pana bhikkhū tattakena na jāniṃsu, te ‘‘tassa kā gatī’’ti pucchiṃsu. Pākaṭataraṃ vā kārāpetukāmā tathā bhagavantaṃ pucchiṃsu.
“贤者”:因为已经证得最上道智,以贤智从此处到达彼岸、继续前行,所以叫贤者。“遵行”:就是依教奉行。“法”:指世间以外的法。“随法”:指戒清净等修行之道。或者,“法”指涅槃法,“随法”指圣道和圣果之法。“他并没有因为法的事来烦扰我”:因为依教奉行,所以没有因为说法的事来烦扰我。如果有人到师长面前听了法,或者领受了业处,却不依教奉行,这个人就叫烦扰师长。关于这一点有这样的话:“对心怀伤害想的人,我不为他说已经熟练的殊胜法,不在人间为梵天说。”或者,“并没有因为法的事来烦扰我”:意思是并没有因为这件事来烦扰我。这里说的是:这个能让人从轮回之苦中出离、属于我教法的法,因为他善巧修行,所以没有带来烦扰。修行不善巧的人破坏教法,就等于打击师长的法身。而这位婆醯把正行道修到了顶点,依无余涅槃界而般涅槃。因此世尊说:“诸比丘,婆醯·达如支利耶已经般涅槃。”巴利
Paṇḍitoti aggamaggapaññāya adhigatattā paṇḍena ito gato pavattoti paṇḍito. Paccapādīti paṭipajji. Dhammassāti lokuttaradhammassa. Anudhammanti sīlavisuddhiādipaṭipadādhammaṃ. Atha vā dhammassāti nibbānadhammassa. Anudhammanti ariyamaggaphaladhammaṃ. Na ca maṃ dhammādhikaraṇanti dhammadesanāhetu na ca maṃ vihesesi yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipannattā. Yo hi satthu santike dhammaṃ sutvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ vā gahetvā yathānusiṭṭhaṃ na paṭipajjati, so satthāraṃ viheseti nāma. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘vihiṃsasaññī paguṇaṃ na bhāsiṃ, dhammaṃ paṇītaṃ manujesu brahme’’ti (mahāva. 9; ma. ni. 1.283; 2.339). Atha vā na ca maṃ dhammādhikaraṇanti na ca imaṃ dhammādhikaraṇaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – vaṭṭadukkhato niyyānahetubhūtaṃ imaṃ mama sāsanadhammaṃ suppaṭipannattā na viheseti. Duppaṭipanno hi sāsanaṃ bhindanto satthu dhammasarīre pahāraṃ deti nāma. Ayaṃ pana sammāpaṭipattiṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyi. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘parinibbuto, bhikkhave, bāhiyo dārucīriyo’’ti.
明白了这个意义之后,也就是从一切方面清楚了这位婆醯长老已经依无余涅槃界而般涅槃,并且清楚了同样般涅槃的诸漏尽者,他们的去向是一般人很难了解的。于是,世尊说出了这首优陀那——这首阐明无依止般涅槃之威力的优陀那。巴利
Etamatthaṃ viditvāti etaṃ therassa bāhiyassa anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbutabhāvaṃ, tathā parinibbutānañca khīṇāsavānaṃ gatiyā pacurajanehi dubbiññeyyabhāvaṃ sabbākārato viditvā. Imaṃ udānanti imaṃ appatiṭṭhitaparinibbānānubhāvadīpakaṃ udānaṃ udānesi.
在这里,所谓“在那里”,就是指在那个涅槃之中,水不能住,地不能住,火不能住,风也不能住,无法安立。为什么呢?因为涅槃的本质是无为。在那里,连有为法的丝毫痕迹都不可能存在。所谓“白净”,是因为色泽洁白而被称为“白净”的那些深隐的星宿与星辰。“不发光”,就是不闪耀。“太阳不显现”,就是说,即使那能在三大洲于一刹那间遍放光明的太阳,在涅槃中也不能以光芒照耀。“月天子不照”,就是说,即使那具有光辉、散发可爱清凉光线的月天子,在涅槃中因为根本不存在,所以也绝不能以自己的月光显耀。如果有人想:既然那里没有日月等,那岂不是会像世界中间那样永远黑暗?为了消除这种疑虑,所以说“那里没有黑暗”。因为既然没有色,也就不可能有所谓的黑暗。巴利
Tattha yatthāti yasmiṃ nibbāne āpo ca na gādhati, pathavī ca tejo ca vāyo ca na gādhati, na patiṭṭhāti. Kasmā? Nibbānassa asaṅkhatasabhāvattā. Na hi tattha saṅkhatadhammānaṃ lesopi sambhavati. Sukkāti sukkavaṇṇatāya sukkāti laddhanāmā gahanakkhattatārakā. Na jotantīti na bhāsanti. Ādicco nappakāsatīti tīsu dīpesu ekasmiṃ khaṇe ālokapharaṇasamattho ādiccopi ābhāvasena na dibbati. Na tattha candimā bhātīti satipi bhāsurabhāve kantasītalakiraṇo candopi tasmiṃ nibbāne abhāvato eva attano juṇhāvibhāsanena na virocati. Yadi tattha candimasūriyādayo natthi, lokantaro viya niccandhakārameva taṃ bhaveyyāti āsaṅkaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tamo tattha na vijjatī’’ti. Sati hi rūpābhāve tamo nāma na siyā.
当他自己亲自了知时,那位牟尼以牟那而成为婆罗门。由于以了知四谛的牟那而获得“牟那”之名的道智,并具足身牟那等,所以被称为“牟尼”的圣弟子婆罗门,在什么时候呢?就在他以这称为牟那的证悟之智,于最上道的刹那,自己亲自舍弃传闻等,以亲证的方式了知、通达涅槃的时候。也有“avedī”的读法,意思是了知。然后,他从色、无色、苦乐中解脱:这里的“然后”是指了知涅槃之后。色,指色法,这涵盖了五蕴有和一蕴有。无色,指无色法,这涵盖了不与色混杂的无色有,这也称为四蕴有。苦乐,指从一切处生起的苦乐中,亦从轮回中解脱。或者,色指从色界结生中解脱;无色指从无色界结生中解脱;苦乐指从欲界结生中解脱,因为欲有是苦乐混杂的。如此,他从整个轮回彻底解脱。世尊也以这两首偈颂显示:“我的法子婆醯,有如此的涅槃趣向。”巴利
Yadā ca attanā vedi, muni monena brāhmaṇoti catusaccamunanato monanti laddhanāmena maggañāṇena kāyamoneyyādīhi ca samannāgatattā ‘‘munī’’ti laddhanāmo ariyasāvakabrāhmaṇo teneva monasaṅkhātena paṭivedhañāṇena yadā yasmiṃ kāle aggamaggakkhaṇe attanā sayameva anussavādike pahāya attapaccakkhaṃ katvā nibbānaṃ vedi paṭivijjhi. ‘‘Avedī’’tipi pāṭho, aññāsīti attho. Atha rūpā arūpā ca, sukhadukkhā pamuccatīti athāti tassa nibbānassa jānanato pacchā. Rūpāti rūpadhammā, tena pañcavokārabhavo ekavokārabhavo ca gahito hoti. Arūpāti arūpadhammā, tena rūpenāmissīkato arūpabhavo gahito hoti. So ‘‘catuvokārabhavo’’tipi vuccati. Sukhadukkhāti sabbattha uppajjanakasukhadukkhatopi vaṭṭato. Atha vā rūpāti rūpalokapaṭisandhito. Arūpāti arūpalokapaṭisandhito. Sukhadukkhāti kāmāvacarapaṭisandhito. Kāmabhavo hi byāmissasukhadukkho. Evametasmā sakalatopi vaṭṭato accantameva muccatīti gāthādvayenapi bhagavā ‘‘mayhaṃ puttassa bāhiyassa evarūpā nibbānagatī’’ti dasseti.